summaryrefslogtreecommitdiffstats
path: root/Documentation/networking/device_drivers
diff options
context:
space:
mode:
authorDaniel Baumann <daniel.baumann@progress-linux.org>2024-04-27 10:05:51 +0000
committerDaniel Baumann <daniel.baumann@progress-linux.org>2024-04-27 10:05:51 +0000
commit5d1646d90e1f2cceb9f0828f4b28318cd0ec7744 (patch)
treea94efe259b9009378be6d90eb30d2b019d95c194 /Documentation/networking/device_drivers
parentInitial commit. (diff)
downloadlinux-5d1646d90e1f2cceb9f0828f4b28318cd0ec7744.tar.xz
linux-5d1646d90e1f2cceb9f0828f4b28318cd0ec7744.zip
Adding upstream version 5.10.209.upstream/5.10.209upstream
Signed-off-by: Daniel Baumann <daniel.baumann@progress-linux.org>
Diffstat (limited to 'Documentation/networking/device_drivers')
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/cops.rst80
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/index.rst19
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/ltpc.rst144
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/cxacru-cf.py48
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/cxacru.rst120
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/fore200e.rst66
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/index.rst20
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/iphase.rst193
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cable/index.rst18
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cable/sb1000.rst222
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cellular/index.rst18
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cellular/qualcomm/rmnet.rst95
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/3c509.rst249
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/vortex.rst459
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/altera/altera_tse.rst286
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/amazon/ena.rst325
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/aquantia/atlantic.rst556
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/chelsio/cxgb.rst393
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/cirrus/cs89x0.rst647
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/davicom/dm9000.rst171
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dec/de4x5.rst189
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dec/dmfe.rst71
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dlink/dl2k.rst314
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa.rst269
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst160
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/ethernet-driver.rst186
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst11
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/mac-phy-support.rst191
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst405
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/gianfar.rst51
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/google/gve.rst123
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/huawei/hinic.rst128
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/index.rst60
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e100.rst188
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000.rst463
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000e.rst383
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/fm10k.rst142
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/i40e.rst771
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/iavf.rst331
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ice.rst46
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igb.rst213
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igbvf.rst65
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgb.rst468
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbe.rst557
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbevf.rst67
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeontx2.rst159
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/mellanox/mlx5.rst321
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/microsoft/netvsc.rst116
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/neterion/s2io.rst196
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/neterion/vxge.rst115
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/netronome/nfp.rst249
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/pensando/ionic.rst274
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/smsc/smc9.rst48
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/stmicro/stmmac.rst700
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw.rst587
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw_switchdev.rst242
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/tlan.rst140
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/toshiba/spider_net.rst202
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/defza.rst63
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/index.rst19
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/skfp.rst253
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/baycom.rst174
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/index.rst19
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/z8530drv.rst686
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/index.rst26
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wan/index.rst18
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wan/z8530book.rst256
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/index.rst20
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/intel/ipw2100.rst323
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/intel/ipw2200.rst526
-rw-r--r--Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/ray_cs.rst165
71 files changed, 15878 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/cops.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/cops.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..964ba8059
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/cops.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,80 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+========================================
+The COPS LocalTalk Linux driver (cops.c)
+========================================
+
+By Jay Schulist <jschlst@samba.org>
+
+This driver has two modes and they are: Dayna mode and Tangent mode.
+Each mode corresponds with the type of card. It has been found
+that there are 2 main types of cards and all other cards are
+the same and just have different names or only have minor differences
+such as more IO ports. As this driver is tested it will
+become more clear exactly what cards are supported.
+
+Right now these cards are known to work with the COPS driver. The
+LT-200 cards work in a somewhat more limited capacity than the
+DL200 cards, which work very well and are in use by many people.
+
+TANGENT driver mode:
+ - Tangent ATB-II, Novell NL-1000, Daystar Digital LT-200
+
+DAYNA driver mode:
+ - Dayna DL2000/DaynaTalk PC (Half Length), COPS LT-95,
+ - Farallon PhoneNET PC III, Farallon PhoneNET PC II
+
+Other cards possibly supported mode unknown though:
+ - Dayna DL2000 (Full length)
+
+The COPS driver defaults to using Dayna mode. To change the driver's
+mode if you built a driver with dual support use board_type=1 or
+board_type=2 for Dayna or Tangent with insmod.
+
+Operation/loading of the driver
+===============================
+
+Use modprobe like this: /sbin/modprobe cops.o (IO #) (IRQ #)
+If you do not specify any options the driver will try and use the IO = 0x240,
+IRQ = 5. As of right now I would only use IRQ 5 for the card, if autoprobing.
+
+To load multiple COPS driver Localtalk cards you can do one of the following::
+
+ insmod cops io=0x240 irq=5
+ insmod -o cops2 cops io=0x260 irq=3
+
+Or in lilo.conf put something like this::
+
+ append="ether=5,0x240,lt0 ether=3,0x260,lt1"
+
+Then bring up the interface with ifconfig. It will look something like this::
+
+ lt0 Link encap:UNSPEC HWaddr 00-00-00-00-00-00-00-F7-00-00-00-00-00-00-00-00
+ inet addr:192.168.1.2 Bcast:192.168.1.255 Mask:255.255.255.0
+ UP BROADCAST RUNNING NOARP MULTICAST MTU:600 Metric:1
+ RX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 frame:0
+ TX packets:0 errors:0 dropped:0 overruns:0 carrier:0 coll:0
+
+Netatalk Configuration
+======================
+
+You will need to configure atalkd with something like the following to make
+it work with the cops.c driver.
+
+* For single LTalk card use::
+
+ dummy -seed -phase 2 -net 2000 -addr 2000.10 -zone "1033"
+ lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1000 -addr 1000.50 -zone "1033"
+
+* For multiple cards, Ethernet and LocalTalk::
+
+ eth0 -seed -phase 2 -net 3000 -addr 3000.20 -zone "1033"
+ lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1000 -addr 1000.50 -zone "1033"
+
+* For multiple LocalTalk cards, and an Ethernet card.
+
+* Order seems to matter here, Ethernet last::
+
+ lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1000 -addr 1000.10 -zone "LocalTalk1"
+ lt1 -seed -phase 1 -net 2000 -addr 2000.20 -zone "LocalTalk2"
+ eth0 -seed -phase 2 -net 3000 -addr 3000.30 -zone "EtherTalk"
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..de7507f02
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+AppleTalk Device Drivers
+========================
+
+Contents:
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 2
+
+ cops
+ ltpc
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/ltpc.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/ltpc.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0ad197fd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/appletalk/ltpc.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,144 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===========
+LTPC Driver
+===========
+
+This is the ALPHA version of the ltpc driver.
+
+In order to use it, you will need at least version 1.3.3 of the
+netatalk package, and the Apple or Farallon LocalTalk PC card.
+There are a number of different LocalTalk cards for the PC; this
+driver applies only to the one with the 65c02 processor chip on it.
+
+To include it in the kernel, select the CONFIG_LTPC switch in the
+configuration dialog. You can also compile it as a module.
+
+While the driver will attempt to autoprobe the I/O port address, IRQ
+line, and DMA channel of the card, this does not always work. For
+this reason, you should be prepared to supply these parameters
+yourself. (see "Card Configuration" below for how to determine or
+change the settings on your card)
+
+When the driver is compiled into the kernel, you can add a line such
+as the following to your /etc/lilo.conf::
+
+ append="ltpc=0x240,9,1"
+
+where the parameters (in order) are the port address, IRQ, and DMA
+channel. The second and third values can be omitted, in which case
+the driver will try to determine them itself.
+
+If you load the driver as a module, you can pass the parameters "io=",
+"irq=", and "dma=" on the command line with insmod or modprobe, or add
+them as options in a configuration file in /etc/modprobe.d/ directory::
+
+ alias lt0 ltpc # autoload the module when the interface is configured
+ options ltpc io=0x240 irq=9 dma=1
+
+Before starting up the netatalk demons (perhaps in rc.local), you
+need to add a line such as::
+
+ /sbin/ifconfig lt0 127.0.0.42
+
+The address is unimportant - however, the card needs to be configured
+with ifconfig so that Netatalk can find it.
+
+The appropriate netatalk configuration depends on whether you are
+attached to a network that includes AppleTalk routers or not. If,
+like me, you are simply connecting to your home Macintoshes and
+printers, you need to set up netatalk to "seed". The way I do this
+is to have the lines::
+
+ dummy -seed -phase 2 -net 2000 -addr 2000.26 -zone "1033"
+ lt0 -seed -phase 1 -net 1033 -addr 1033.27 -zone "1033"
+
+in my atalkd.conf. What is going on here is that I need to fool
+netatalk into thinking that there are two AppleTalk interfaces
+present; otherwise, it refuses to seed. This is a hack, and a more
+permanent solution would be to alter the netatalk code. Also, make
+sure you have the correct name for the dummy interface - If it's
+compiled as a module, you will need to refer to it as "dummy0" or some
+such.
+
+If you are attached to an extended AppleTalk network, with routers on
+it, then you don't need to fool around with this -- the appropriate
+line in atalkd.conf is::
+
+ lt0 -phase 1
+
+
+Card Configuration
+==================
+
+The interrupts and so forth are configured via the dipswitch on the
+board. Set the switches so as not to conflict with other hardware.
+
+ Interrupts -- set at most one. If none are set, the driver uses
+ polled mode. Because the card was developed in the XT era, the
+ original documentation refers to IRQ2. Since you'll be running
+ this on an AT (or later) class machine, that really means IRQ9.
+
+ === ===========================================================
+ SW1 IRQ 4
+ SW2 IRQ 3
+ SW3 IRQ 9 (2 in original card documentation only applies to XT)
+ === ===========================================================
+
+
+ DMA -- choose DMA 1 or 3, and set both corresponding switches.
+
+ === =====
+ SW4 DMA 3
+ SW5 DMA 1
+ SW6 DMA 3
+ SW7 DMA 1
+ === =====
+
+
+ I/O address -- choose one.
+
+ === =========
+ SW8 220 / 240
+ === =========
+
+
+IP
+==
+
+Yes, it is possible to do IP over LocalTalk. However, you can't just
+treat the LocalTalk device like an ordinary Ethernet device, even if
+that's what it looks like to Netatalk.
+
+Instead, you follow the same procedure as for doing IP in EtherTalk.
+See Documentation/networking/ipddp.rst for more information about the
+kernel driver and userspace tools needed.
+
+
+Bugs
+====
+
+IRQ autoprobing often doesn't work on a cold boot. To get around
+this, either compile the driver as a module, or pass the parameters
+for the card to the kernel as described above.
+
+Also, as usual, autoprobing is not recommended when you use the driver
+as a module. (though it usually works at boot time, at least)
+
+Polled mode is *really* slow sometimes, but this seems to depend on
+the configuration of the network.
+
+It may theoretically be possible to use two LTPC cards in the same
+machine, but this is unsupported, so if you really want to do this,
+you'll probably have to hack the initialization code a bit.
+
+
+Thanks
+======
+
+Thanks to Alan Cox for helpful discussions early on in this
+work, and to Denis Hainsworth for doing the bleeding-edge testing.
+
+Bradford Johnson <bradford@math.umn.edu>
+
+Updated 11/09/1998 by David Huggins-Daines <dhd@debian.org>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/cxacru-cf.py b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/cxacru-cf.py
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..b41d29839
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/cxacru-cf.py
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+#!/usr/bin/env python
+# Copyright 2009 Simon Arlott
+#
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+# under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free
+# Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
+# ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+# FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for
+# more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+# this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59
+# Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+#
+# Usage: cxacru-cf.py < cxacru-cf.bin
+# Output: values string suitable for the sysfs adsl_config attribute
+#
+# Warning: cxacru-cf.bin with MD5 hash cdbac2689969d5ed5d4850f117702110
+# contains mis-aligned values which will stop the modem from being able
+# to make a connection. If the first and last two bytes are removed then
+# the values become valid, but the modulation will be forced to ANSI
+# T1.413 only which may not be appropriate.
+#
+# The original binary format is a packed list of le32 values.
+
+import sys
+import struct
+
+i = 0
+while True:
+ buf = sys.stdin.read(4)
+
+ if len(buf) == 0:
+ break
+ elif len(buf) != 4:
+ sys.stdout.write("\n")
+ sys.stderr.write("Error: read {0} not 4 bytes\n".format(len(buf)))
+ sys.exit(1)
+
+ if i > 0:
+ sys.stdout.write(" ")
+ sys.stdout.write("{0:x}={1}".format(i, struct.unpack("<I", buf)[0]))
+ i += 1
+
+sys.stdout.write("\n")
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/cxacru.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/cxacru.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..6088af2ff
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/cxacru.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+========================
+ATM cxacru device driver
+========================
+
+Firmware is required for this device: http://accessrunner.sourceforge.net/
+
+While it is capable of managing/maintaining the ADSL connection without the
+module loaded, the device will sometimes stop responding after unloading the
+driver and it is necessary to unplug/remove power to the device to fix this.
+
+Note: support for cxacru-cf.bin has been removed. It was not loaded correctly
+so it had no effect on the device configuration. Fixing it could have stopped
+existing devices working when an invalid configuration is supplied.
+
+There is a script cxacru-cf.py to convert an existing file to the sysfs form.
+
+Detected devices will appear as ATM devices named "cxacru". In /sys/class/atm/
+these are directories named cxacruN where N is the device number. A symlink
+named device points to the USB interface device's directory which contains
+several sysfs attribute files for retrieving device statistics:
+
+* adsl_controller_version
+
+* adsl_headend
+* adsl_headend_environment
+
+ - Information about the remote headend.
+
+* adsl_config
+
+ - Configuration writing interface.
+ - Write parameters in hexadecimal format <index>=<value>,
+ separated by whitespace, e.g.:
+
+ "1=0 a=5"
+
+ - Up to 7 parameters at a time will be sent and the modem will restart
+ the ADSL connection when any value is set. These are logged for future
+ reference.
+
+* downstream_attenuation (dB)
+* downstream_bits_per_frame
+* downstream_rate (kbps)
+* downstream_snr_margin (dB)
+
+ - Downstream stats.
+
+* upstream_attenuation (dB)
+* upstream_bits_per_frame
+* upstream_rate (kbps)
+* upstream_snr_margin (dB)
+* transmitter_power (dBm/Hz)
+
+ - Upstream stats.
+
+* downstream_crc_errors
+* downstream_fec_errors
+* downstream_hec_errors
+* upstream_crc_errors
+* upstream_fec_errors
+* upstream_hec_errors
+
+ - Error counts.
+
+* line_startable
+
+ - Indicates that ADSL support on the device
+ is/can be enabled, see adsl_start.
+
+* line_status
+
+ - "initialising"
+ - "down"
+ - "attempting to activate"
+ - "training"
+ - "channel analysis"
+ - "exchange"
+ - "waiting"
+ - "up"
+
+ Changes between "down" and "attempting to activate"
+ if there is no signal.
+
+* link_status
+
+ - "not connected"
+ - "connected"
+ - "lost"
+
+* mac_address
+
+* modulation
+
+ - "" (when not connected)
+ - "ANSI T1.413"
+ - "ITU-T G.992.1 (G.DMT)"
+ - "ITU-T G.992.2 (G.LITE)"
+
+* startup_attempts
+
+ - Count of total attempts to initialise ADSL.
+
+To enable/disable ADSL, the following can be written to the adsl_state file:
+
+ - "start"
+ - "stop
+ - "restart" (stops, waits 1.5s, then starts)
+ - "poll" (used to resume status polling if it was disabled due to failure)
+
+Changes in adsl/line state are reported via kernel log messages::
+
+ [4942145.150704] ATM dev 0: ADSL state: running
+ [4942243.663766] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: down
+ [4942249.665075] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: attempting to activate
+ [4942253.654954] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: training
+ [4942255.666387] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: channel analysis
+ [4942259.656262] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: exchange
+ [2635357.696901] ATM dev 0: ADSL line: up (8128 kb/s down | 832 kb/s up)
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/fore200e.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/fore200e.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..55df9ec09
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/fore200e.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=============================================
+FORE Systems PCA-200E/SBA-200E ATM NIC driver
+=============================================
+
+This driver adds support for the FORE Systems 200E-series ATM adapters
+to the Linux operating system. It is based on the earlier PCA-200E driver
+written by Uwe Dannowski.
+
+The driver simultaneously supports PCA-200E and SBA-200E adapters on
+i386, alpha (untested), powerpc, sparc and sparc64 archs.
+
+The intent is to enable the use of different models of FORE adapters at the
+same time, by hosts that have several bus interfaces (such as PCI+SBUS,
+or PCI+EISA).
+
+Only PCI and SBUS devices are currently supported by the driver, but support
+for other bus interfaces such as EISA should not be too hard to add.
+
+
+Firmware Copyright Notice
+-------------------------
+
+Please read the fore200e_firmware_copyright file present
+in the linux/drivers/atm directory for details and restrictions.
+
+
+Firmware Updates
+----------------
+
+The FORE Systems 200E-series driver is shipped with firmware data being
+uploaded to the ATM adapters at system boot time or at module loading time.
+The supplied firmware images should work with all adapters.
+
+However, if you encounter problems (the firmware doesn't start or the driver
+is unable to read the PROM data), you may consider trying another firmware
+version. Alternative binary firmware images can be found somewhere on the
+ForeThought CD-ROM supplied with your adapter by FORE Systems.
+
+You can also get the latest firmware images from FORE Systems at
+https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/FORE_Systems. Register TACTics Online and go to
+the 'software updates' pages. The firmware binaries are part of
+the various ForeThought software distributions.
+
+Notice that different versions of the PCA-200E firmware exist, depending
+on the endianness of the host architecture. The driver is shipped with
+both little and big endian PCA firmware images.
+
+Name and location of the new firmware images can be set at kernel
+configuration time:
+
+1. Copy the new firmware binary files (with .bin, .bin1 or .bin2 suffix)
+ to some directory, such as linux/drivers/atm.
+
+2. Reconfigure your kernel to set the new firmware name and location.
+ Expected pathnames are absolute or relative to the drivers/atm directory.
+
+3. Rebuild and re-install your kernel or your module.
+
+
+Feedback
+--------
+
+Feedback is welcome. Please send success stories/bug reports/
+patches/improvement/comments/flames to <lizzi@cnam.fr>.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7b593f031
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) Device Drivers
+===============================================
+
+Contents:
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 2
+
+ cxacru
+ fore200e
+ iphase
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/iphase.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/iphase.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..92d9b757d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/atm/iphase.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,193 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==================================
+ATM (i)Chip IA Linux Driver Source
+==================================
+
+ READ ME FISRT
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ Read This Before You Begin!
+
+--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Description
+===========
+
+This is the README file for the Interphase PCI ATM (i)Chip IA Linux driver
+source release.
+
+The features and limitations of this driver are as follows:
+
+ - A single VPI (VPI value of 0) is supported.
+ - Supports 4K VCs for the server board (with 512K control memory) and 1K
+ VCs for the client board (with 128K control memory).
+ - UBR, ABR and CBR service categories are supported.
+ - Only AAL5 is supported.
+ - Supports setting of PCR on the VCs.
+ - Multiple adapters in a system are supported.
+ - All variants of Interphase ATM PCI (i)Chip adapter cards are supported,
+ including x575 (OC3, control memory 128K , 512K and packet memory 128K,
+ 512K and 1M), x525 (UTP25) and x531 (DS3 and E3). See
+ http://www.iphase.com/
+ for details.
+ - Only x86 platforms are supported.
+ - SMP is supported.
+
+
+Before You Start
+================
+
+
+Installation
+------------
+
+1. Installing the adapters in the system
+
+ To install the ATM adapters in the system, follow the steps below.
+
+ a. Login as root.
+ b. Shut down the system and power off the system.
+ c. Install one or more ATM adapters in the system.
+ d. Connect each adapter to a port on an ATM switch. The green 'Link'
+ LED on the front panel of the adapter will be on if the adapter is
+ connected to the switch properly when the system is powered up.
+ e. Power on and boot the system.
+
+2. [ Removed ]
+
+3. Rebuild kernel with ABR support
+
+ [ a. and b. removed ]
+
+ c. Reconfigure the kernel, choose the Interphase ia driver through "make
+ menuconfig" or "make xconfig".
+ d. Rebuild the kernel, loadable modules and the atm tools.
+ e. Install the new built kernel and modules and reboot.
+
+4. Load the adapter hardware driver (ia driver) if it is built as a module
+
+ a. Login as root.
+ b. Change directory to /lib/modules/<kernel-version>/atm.
+ c. Run "insmod suni.o;insmod iphase.o"
+ The yellow 'status' LED on the front panel of the adapter will blink
+ while the driver is loaded in the system.
+ d. To verify that the 'ia' driver is loaded successfully, run the
+ following command::
+
+ cat /proc/atm/devices
+
+ If the driver is loaded successfully, the output of the command will
+ be similar to the following lines::
+
+ Itf Type ESI/"MAC"addr AAL(TX,err,RX,err,drop) ...
+ 0 ia xxxxxxxxx 0 ( 0 0 0 0 0 ) 5 ( 0 0 0 0 0 )
+
+ You can also check the system log file /var/log/messages for messages
+ related to the ATM driver.
+
+5. Ia Driver Configuration
+
+5.1 Configuration of adapter buffers
+ The (i)Chip boards have 3 different packet RAM size variants: 128K, 512K and
+ 1M. The RAM size decides the number of buffers and buffer size. The default
+ size and number of buffers are set as following:
+
+ ========= ======= ====== ====== ====== ====== ======
+ Total Rx RAM Tx RAM Rx Buf Tx Buf Rx buf Tx buf
+ RAM size size size size size cnt cnt
+ ========= ======= ====== ====== ====== ====== ======
+ 128K 64K 64K 10K 10K 6 6
+ 512K 256K 256K 10K 10K 25 25
+ 1M 512K 512K 10K 10K 51 51
+ ========= ======= ====== ====== ====== ====== ======
+
+ These setting should work well in most environments, but can be
+ changed by typing the following command::
+
+ insmod <IA_DIR>/ia.o IA_RX_BUF=<RX_CNT> IA_RX_BUF_SZ=<RX_SIZE> \
+ IA_TX_BUF=<TX_CNT> IA_TX_BUF_SZ=<TX_SIZE>
+
+ Where:
+
+ - RX_CNT = number of receive buffers in the range (1-128)
+ - RX_SIZE = size of receive buffers in the range (48-64K)
+ - TX_CNT = number of transmit buffers in the range (1-128)
+ - TX_SIZE = size of transmit buffers in the range (48-64K)
+
+ 1. Transmit and receive buffer size must be a multiple of 4.
+ 2. Care should be taken so that the memory required for the
+ transmit and receive buffers is less than or equal to the
+ total adapter packet memory.
+
+5.2 Turn on ia debug trace
+
+ When the ia driver is built with the CONFIG_ATM_IA_DEBUG flag, the driver
+ can provide more debug trace if needed. There is a bit mask variable,
+ IADebugFlag, which controls the output of the traces. You can find the bit
+ map of the IADebugFlag in iphase.h.
+ The debug trace can be turn on through the insmod command line option, for
+ example, "insmod iphase.o IADebugFlag=0xffffffff" can turn on all the debug
+ traces together with loading the driver.
+
+6. Ia Driver Test Using ttcp_atm and PVC
+
+ For the PVC setup, the test machines can either be connected back-to-back or
+ through a switch. If connected through the switch, the switch must be
+ configured for the PVC(s).
+
+ a. For UBR test:
+
+ At the test machine intended to receive data, type::
+
+ ttcp_atm -r -a -s 0.100
+
+ At the other test machine, type::
+
+ ttcp_atm -t -a -s 0.100 -n 10000
+
+ Run "ttcp_atm -h" to display more options of the ttcp_atm tool.
+ b. For ABR test:
+
+ It is the same as the UBR testing, but with an extra command option::
+
+ -Pabr:max_pcr=<xxx>
+
+ where:
+
+ xxx = the maximum peak cell rate, from 170 - 353207.
+
+ This option must be set on both the machines.
+
+ c. For CBR test:
+
+ It is the same as the UBR testing, but with an extra command option::
+
+ -Pcbr:max_pcr=<xxx>
+
+ where:
+
+ xxx = the maximum peak cell rate, from 170 - 353207.
+
+ This option may only be set on the transmit machine.
+
+
+Outstanding Issues
+==================
+
+
+
+Contact Information
+-------------------
+
+::
+
+ Customer Support:
+ United States: Telephone: (214) 654-5555
+ Fax: (214) 654-5500
+ E-Mail: intouch@iphase.com
+ Europe: Telephone: 33 (0)1 41 15 44 00
+ Fax: 33 (0)1 41 15 12 13
+ World Wide Web: http://www.iphase.com
+ Anonymous FTP: ftp.iphase.com
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cable/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cable/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cce3c4392
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cable/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+Cable Modem Device Drivers
+==========================
+
+Contents:
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 2
+
+ sb1000
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cable/sb1000.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cable/sb1000.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c8582ca40
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cable/sb1000.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,222 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===================
+SB100 device driver
+===================
+
+sb1000 is a module network device driver for the General Instrument (also known
+as NextLevel) SURFboard1000 internal cable modem board. This is an ISA card
+which is used by a number of cable TV companies to provide cable modem access.
+It's a one-way downstream-only cable modem, meaning that your upstream net link
+is provided by your regular phone modem.
+
+This driver was written by Franco Venturi <fventuri@mediaone.net>. He deserves
+a great deal of thanks for this wonderful piece of code!
+
+Needed tools
+============
+
+Support for this device is now a part of the standard Linux kernel. The
+driver source code file is drivers/net/sb1000.c. In addition to this
+you will need:
+
+1. The "cmconfig" program. This is a utility which supplements "ifconfig"
+ to configure the cable modem and network interface (usually called "cm0");
+
+2. Several PPP scripts which live in /etc/ppp to make connecting via your
+ cable modem easy.
+
+ These utilities can be obtained from:
+
+ http://www.jacksonville.net/~fventuri/
+
+ in Franco's original source code distribution .tar.gz file. Support for
+ the sb1000 driver can be found at:
+
+ - http://web.archive.org/web/%2E/http://home.adelphia.net/~siglercm/sb1000.html
+ - http://web.archive.org/web/%2E/http://linuxpower.cx/~cable/
+
+ along with these utilities.
+
+3. The standard isapnp tools. These are necessary to configure your SB1000
+ card at boot time (or afterwards by hand) since it's a PnP card.
+
+ If you don't have these installed as a standard part of your Linux
+ distribution, you can find them at:
+
+ http://www.roestock.demon.co.uk/isapnptools/
+
+ or check your Linux distribution binary CD or their web site. For help with
+ isapnp, pnpdump, or /etc/isapnp.conf, go to:
+
+ http://www.roestock.demon.co.uk/isapnptools/isapnpfaq.html
+
+Using the driver
+================
+
+To make the SB1000 card work, follow these steps:
+
+1. Run ``make config``, or ``make menuconfig``, or ``make xconfig``, whichever
+ you prefer, in the top kernel tree directory to set up your kernel
+ configuration. Make sure to say "Y" to "Prompt for development drivers"
+ and to say "M" to the sb1000 driver. Also say "Y" or "M" to all the standard
+ networking questions to get TCP/IP and PPP networking support.
+
+2. **BEFORE** you build the kernel, edit drivers/net/sb1000.c. Make sure
+ to redefine the value of READ_DATA_PORT to match the I/O address used
+ by isapnp to access your PnP cards. This is the value of READPORT in
+ /etc/isapnp.conf or given by the output of pnpdump.
+
+3. Build and install the kernel and modules as usual.
+
+4. Boot your new kernel following the usual procedures.
+
+5. Set up to configure the new SB1000 PnP card by capturing the output
+ of "pnpdump" to a file and editing this file to set the correct I/O ports,
+ IRQ, and DMA settings for all your PnP cards. Make sure none of the settings
+ conflict with one another. Then test this configuration by running the
+ "isapnp" command with your new config file as the input. Check for
+ errors and fix as necessary. (As an aside, I use I/O ports 0x110 and
+ 0x310 and IRQ 11 for my SB1000 card and these work well for me. YMMV.)
+ Then save the finished config file as /etc/isapnp.conf for proper
+ configuration on subsequent reboots.
+
+6. Download the original file sb1000-1.1.2.tar.gz from Franco's site or one of
+ the others referenced above. As root, unpack it into a temporary directory
+ and do a ``make cmconfig`` and then ``install -c cmconfig /usr/local/sbin``.
+ Don't do ``make install`` because it expects to find all the utilities built
+ and ready for installation, not just cmconfig.
+
+7. As root, copy all the files under the ppp/ subdirectory in Franco's
+ tar file into /etc/ppp, being careful not to overwrite any files that are
+ already in there. Then modify ppp@gi-on to set the correct login name,
+ phone number, and frequency for the cable modem. Also edit pap-secrets
+ to specify your login name and password and any site-specific information
+ you need.
+
+8. Be sure to modify /etc/ppp/firewall to use ipchains instead of
+ the older ipfwadm commands from the 2.0.x kernels. There's a neat utility to
+ convert ipfwadm commands to ipchains commands:
+
+ http://users.dhp.com/~whisper/ipfwadm2ipchains/
+
+ You may also wish to modify the firewall script to implement a different
+ firewalling scheme.
+
+9. Start the PPP connection via the script /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on. You must be
+ root to do this. It's better to use a utility like sudo to execute
+ frequently used commands like this with root permissions if possible. If you
+ connect successfully the cable modem interface will come up and you'll see a
+ driver message like this at the console::
+
+ cm0: sb1000 at (0x110,0x310), csn 1, S/N 0x2a0d16d8, IRQ 11.
+ sb1000.c:v1.1.2 6/01/98 (fventuri@mediaone.net)
+
+ The "ifconfig" command should show two new interfaces, ppp0 and cm0.
+
+ The command "cmconfig cm0" will give you information about the cable modem
+ interface.
+
+10. Try pinging a site via ``ping -c 5 www.yahoo.com``, for example. You should
+ see packets received.
+
+11. If you can't get site names (like www.yahoo.com) to resolve into
+ IP addresses (like 204.71.200.67), be sure your /etc/resolv.conf file
+ has no syntax errors and has the right nameserver IP addresses in it.
+ If this doesn't help, try something like ``ping -c 5 204.71.200.67`` to
+ see if the networking is running but the DNS resolution is where the
+ problem lies.
+
+12. If you still have problems, go to the support web sites mentioned above
+ and read the information and documentation there.
+
+Common problems
+===============
+
+1. Packets go out on the ppp0 interface but don't come back on the cm0
+ interface. It looks like I'm connected but I can't even ping any
+ numerical IP addresses. (This happens predominantly on Debian systems due
+ to a default boot-time configuration script.)
+
+Solution
+ As root ``echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/cm0/rp_filter`` so it
+ can share the same IP address as the ppp0 interface. Note that this
+ command should probably be added to the /etc/ppp/cablemodem script
+ *right*between* the "/sbin/ifconfig" and "/sbin/cmconfig" commands.
+ You may need to do this to /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/ppp0/rp_filter as well.
+ If you do this to /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/default/rp_filter on each reboot
+ (in rc.local or some such) then any interfaces can share the same IP
+ addresses.
+
+2. I get "unresolved symbol" error messages on executing ``insmod sb1000.o``.
+
+Solution
+ You probably have a non-matching kernel source tree and
+ /usr/include/linux and /usr/include/asm header files. Make sure you
+ install the correct versions of the header files in these two directories.
+ Then rebuild and reinstall the kernel.
+
+3. When isapnp runs it reports an error, and my SB1000 card isn't working.
+
+Solution
+ There's a problem with later versions of isapnp using the "(CHECK)"
+ option in the lines that allocate the two I/O addresses for the SB1000 card.
+ This first popped up on RH 6.0. Delete "(CHECK)" for the SB1000 I/O addresses.
+ Make sure they don't conflict with any other pieces of hardware first! Then
+ rerun isapnp and go from there.
+
+4. I can't execute the /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on file.
+
+Solution
+ As root do ``chmod ug+x /etc/ppp/ppp@gi-on``.
+
+5. The firewall script isn't working (with 2.2.x and higher kernels).
+
+Solution
+ Use the ipfwadm2ipchains script referenced above to convert the
+ /etc/ppp/firewall script from the deprecated ipfwadm commands to ipchains.
+
+6. I'm getting *tons* of firewall deny messages in the /var/kern.log,
+ /var/messages, and/or /var/syslog files, and they're filling up my /var
+ partition!!!
+
+Solution
+ First, tell your ISP that you're receiving DoS (Denial of Service)
+ and/or portscanning (UDP connection attempts) attacks! Look over the deny
+ messages to figure out what the attack is and where it's coming from. Next,
+ edit /etc/ppp/cablemodem and make sure the ",nobroadcast" option is turned on
+ to the "cmconfig" command (uncomment that line). If you're not receiving these
+ denied packets on your broadcast interface (IP address xxx.yyy.zzz.255
+ typically), then someone is attacking your machine in particular. Be careful
+ out there....
+
+7. Everything seems to work fine but my computer locks up after a while
+ (and typically during a lengthy download through the cable modem)!
+
+Solution
+ You may need to add a short delay in the driver to 'slow down' the
+ SURFboard because your PC might not be able to keep up with the transfer rate
+ of the SB1000. To do this, it's probably best to download Franco's
+ sb1000-1.1.2.tar.gz archive and build and install sb1000.o manually. You'll
+ want to edit the 'Makefile' and look for the 'SB1000_DELAY'
+ define. Uncomment those 'CFLAGS' lines (and comment out the default ones)
+ and try setting the delay to something like 60 microseconds with:
+ '-DSB1000_DELAY=60'. Then do ``make`` and as root ``make install`` and try
+ it out. If it still doesn't work or you like playing with the driver, you may
+ try other numbers. Remember though that the higher the delay, the slower the
+ driver (which slows down the rest of the PC too when it is actively
+ used). Thanks to Ed Daiga for this tip!
+
+Credits
+=======
+
+This README came from Franco Venturi's original README file which is
+still supplied with his driver .tar.gz archive. I and all other sb1000 users
+owe Franco a tremendous "Thank you!" Additional thanks goes to Carl Patten
+and Ralph Bonnell who are now managing the Linux SB1000 web site, and to
+the SB1000 users who reported and helped debug the common problems listed
+above.
+
+
+ Clemmitt Sigler
+ csigler@vt.edu
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cellular/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cellular/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fc1812d3f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cellular/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+Cellular Modem Device Drivers
+=============================
+
+Contents:
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 2
+
+ qualcomm/rmnet
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cellular/qualcomm/rmnet.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cellular/qualcomm/rmnet.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..70643b58d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/cellular/qualcomm/rmnet.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,95 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============
+Rmnet Driver
+============
+
+1. Introduction
+===============
+
+rmnet driver is used for supporting the Multiplexing and aggregation
+Protocol (MAP). This protocol is used by all recent chipsets using Qualcomm
+Technologies, Inc. modems.
+
+This driver can be used to register onto any physical network device in
+IP mode. Physical transports include USB, HSIC, PCIe and IP accelerator.
+
+Multiplexing allows for creation of logical netdevices (rmnet devices) to
+handle multiple private data networks (PDN) like a default internet, tethering,
+multimedia messaging service (MMS) or IP media subsystem (IMS). Hardware sends
+packets with MAP headers to rmnet. Based on the multiplexer id, rmnet
+routes to the appropriate PDN after removing the MAP header.
+
+Aggregation is required to achieve high data rates. This involves hardware
+sending aggregated bunch of MAP frames. rmnet driver will de-aggregate
+these MAP frames and send them to appropriate PDN's.
+
+2. Packet format
+================
+
+a. MAP packet (data / control)
+
+MAP header has the same endianness of the IP packet.
+
+Packet format::
+
+ Bit 0 1 2-7 8 - 15 16 - 31
+ Function Command / Data Reserved Pad Multiplexer ID Payload length
+ Bit 32 - x
+ Function Raw Bytes
+
+Command (1)/ Data (0) bit value is to indicate if the packet is a MAP command
+or data packet. Control packet is used for transport level flow control. Data
+packets are standard IP packets.
+
+Reserved bits are usually zeroed out and to be ignored by receiver.
+
+Padding is number of bytes to be added for 4 byte alignment if required by
+hardware.
+
+Multiplexer ID is to indicate the PDN on which data has to be sent.
+
+Payload length includes the padding length but does not include MAP header
+length.
+
+b. MAP packet (command specific)::
+
+ Bit 0 1 2-7 8 - 15 16 - 31
+ Function Command Reserved Pad Multiplexer ID Payload length
+ Bit 32 - 39 40 - 45 46 - 47 48 - 63
+ Function Command name Reserved Command Type Reserved
+ Bit 64 - 95
+ Function Transaction ID
+ Bit 96 - 127
+ Function Command data
+
+Command 1 indicates disabling flow while 2 is enabling flow
+
+Command types
+
+= ==========================================
+0 for MAP command request
+1 is to acknowledge the receipt of a command
+2 is for unsupported commands
+3 is for error during processing of commands
+= ==========================================
+
+c. Aggregation
+
+Aggregation is multiple MAP packets (can be data or command) delivered to
+rmnet in a single linear skb. rmnet will process the individual
+packets and either ACK the MAP command or deliver the IP packet to the
+network stack as needed
+
+MAP header|IP Packet|Optional padding|MAP header|IP Packet|Optional padding....
+
+MAP header|IP Packet|Optional padding|MAP header|Command Packet|Optional pad...
+
+3. Userspace configuration
+==========================
+
+rmnet userspace configuration is done through netlink library librmnetctl
+and command line utility rmnetcli. Utility is hosted in codeaurora forum git.
+The driver uses rtnl_link_ops for communication.
+
+https://source.codeaurora.org/quic/la/platform/vendor/qcom-opensource/dataservices/tree/rmnetctl
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/3c509.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/3c509.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..47f706bac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/3c509.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,249 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=============================================================================
+Linux and the 3Com EtherLink III Series Ethercards (driver v1.18c and higher)
+=============================================================================
+
+This file contains the instructions and caveats for v1.18c and higher versions
+of the 3c509 driver. You should not use the driver without reading this file.
+
+release 1.0
+
+28 February 2002
+
+Current maintainer (corrections to):
+ David Ruggiero <jdr@farfalle.com>
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+The following are notes and information on using the 3Com EtherLink III series
+ethercards in Linux. These cards are commonly known by the most widely-used
+card's 3Com model number, 3c509. They are all 10mb/s ISA-bus cards and shouldn't
+be (but sometimes are) confused with the similarly-numbered PCI-bus "3c905"
+(aka "Vortex" or "Boomerang") series. Kernel support for the 3c509 family is
+provided by the module 3c509.c, which has code to support all of the following
+models:
+
+ - 3c509 (original ISA card)
+ - 3c509B (later revision of the ISA card; supports full-duplex)
+ - 3c589 (PCMCIA)
+ - 3c589B (later revision of the 3c589; supports full-duplex)
+ - 3c579 (EISA)
+
+Large portions of this documentation were heavily borrowed from the guide
+written the original author of the 3c509 driver, Donald Becker. The master
+copy of that document, which contains notes on older versions of the driver,
+currently resides on Scyld web server: http://www.scyld.com/.
+
+
+Special Driver Features
+=======================
+
+Overriding card settings
+
+The driver allows boot- or load-time overriding of the card's detected IOADDR,
+IRQ, and transceiver settings, although this capability shouldn't generally be
+needed except to enable full-duplex mode (see below). An example of the syntax
+for LILO parameters for doing this::
+
+ ether=10,0x310,3,0x3c509,eth0
+
+This configures the first found 3c509 card for IRQ 10, base I/O 0x310, and
+transceiver type 3 (10base2). The flag "0x3c509" must be set to avoid conflicts
+with other card types when overriding the I/O address. When the driver is
+loaded as a module, only the IRQ may be overridden. For example,
+setting two cards to IRQ10 and IRQ11 is done by using the irq module
+option::
+
+ options 3c509 irq=10,11
+
+
+Full-duplex mode
+================
+
+The v1.18c driver added support for the 3c509B's full-duplex capabilities.
+In order to enable and successfully use full-duplex mode, three conditions
+must be met:
+
+(a) You must have a Etherlink III card model whose hardware supports full-
+duplex operations. Currently, the only members of the 3c509 family that are
+positively known to support full-duplex are the 3c509B (ISA bus) and 3c589B
+(PCMCIA) cards. Cards without the "B" model designation do *not* support
+full-duplex mode; these include the original 3c509 (no "B"), the original
+3c589, the 3c529 (MCA bus), and the 3c579 (EISA bus).
+
+(b) You must be using your card's 10baseT transceiver (i.e., the RJ-45
+connector), not its AUI (thick-net) or 10base2 (thin-net/coax) interfaces.
+AUI and 10base2 network cabling is physically incapable of full-duplex
+operation.
+
+(c) Most importantly, your 3c509B must be connected to a link partner that is
+itself full-duplex capable. This is almost certainly one of two things: a full-
+duplex-capable Ethernet switch (*not* a hub), or a full-duplex-capable NIC on
+another system that's connected directly to the 3c509B via a crossover cable.
+
+Full-duplex mode can be enabled using 'ethtool'.
+
+.. warning::
+
+ Extremely important caution concerning full-duplex mode
+
+ Understand that the 3c509B's hardware's full-duplex support is much more
+ limited than that provide by more modern network interface cards. Although
+ at the physical layer of the network it fully supports full-duplex operation,
+ the card was designed before the current Ethernet auto-negotiation (N-way)
+ spec was written. This means that the 3c509B family ***cannot and will not
+ auto-negotiate a full-duplex connection with its link partner under any
+ circumstances, no matter how it is initialized***. If the full-duplex mode
+ of the 3c509B is enabled, its link partner will very likely need to be
+ independently _forced_ into full-duplex mode as well; otherwise various nasty
+ failures will occur - at the very least, you'll see massive numbers of packet
+ collisions. This is one of very rare circumstances where disabling auto-
+ negotiation and forcing the duplex mode of a network interface card or switch
+ would ever be necessary or desirable.
+
+
+Available Transceiver Types
+===========================
+
+For versions of the driver v1.18c and above, the available transceiver types are:
+
+== =========================================================================
+0 transceiver type from EEPROM config (normally 10baseT); force half-duplex
+1 AUI (thick-net / DB15 connector)
+2 (undefined)
+3 10base2 (thin-net == coax / BNC connector)
+4 10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force half-duplex mode
+8 transceiver type and duplex mode taken from card's EEPROM config settings
+12 10baseT (RJ-45 connector); force full-duplex mode
+== =========================================================================
+
+Prior to driver version 1.18c, only transceiver codes 0-4 were supported. Note
+that the new transceiver codes 8 and 12 are the *only* ones that will enable
+full-duplex mode, no matter what the card's detected EEPROM settings might be.
+This insured that merely upgrading the driver from an earlier version would
+never automatically enable full-duplex mode in an existing installation;
+it must always be explicitly enabled via one of these code in order to be
+activated.
+
+The transceiver type can be changed using 'ethtool'.
+
+
+Interpretation of error messages and common problems
+----------------------------------------------------
+
+Error Messages
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+eth0: Infinite loop in interrupt, status 2011.
+These are "mostly harmless" message indicating that the driver had too much
+work during that interrupt cycle. With a status of 0x2011 you are receiving
+packets faster than they can be removed from the card. This should be rare
+or impossible in normal operation. Possible causes of this error report are:
+
+ - a "green" mode enabled that slows the processor down when there is no
+ keyboard activity.
+
+ - some other device or device driver hogging the bus or disabling interrupts.
+ Check /proc/interrupts for excessive interrupt counts. The timer tick
+ interrupt should always be incrementing faster than the others.
+
+No received packets
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+If a 3c509, 3c562 or 3c589 can successfully transmit packets, but never
+receives packets (as reported by /proc/net/dev or 'ifconfig') you likely
+have an interrupt line problem. Check /proc/interrupts to verify that the
+card is actually generating interrupts. If the interrupt count is not
+increasing you likely have a physical conflict with two devices trying to
+use the same ISA IRQ line. The common conflict is with a sound card on IRQ10
+or IRQ5, and the easiest solution is to move the 3c509 to a different
+interrupt line. If the device is receiving packets but 'ping' doesn't work,
+you have a routing problem.
+
+Tx Carrier Errors Reported in /proc/net/dev
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+
+If an EtherLink III appears to transmit packets, but the "Tx carrier errors"
+field in /proc/net/dev increments as quickly as the Tx packet count, you
+likely have an unterminated network or the incorrect media transceiver selected.
+
+3c509B card is not detected on machines with an ISA PnP BIOS.
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+While the updated driver works with most PnP BIOS programs, it does not work
+with all. This can be fixed by disabling PnP support using the 3Com-supplied
+setup program.
+
+3c509 card is not detected on overclocked machines
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+Increase the delay time in id_read_eeprom() from the current value, 500,
+to an absurdly high value, such as 5000.
+
+
+Decoding Status and Error Messages
+----------------------------------
+
+
+The bits in the main status register are:
+
+===== ======================================
+value description
+===== ======================================
+0x01 Interrupt latch
+0x02 Tx overrun, or Rx underrun
+0x04 Tx complete
+0x08 Tx FIFO room available
+0x10 A complete Rx packet has arrived
+0x20 A Rx packet has started to arrive
+0x40 The driver has requested an interrupt
+0x80 Statistics counter nearly full
+===== ======================================
+
+The bits in the transmit (Tx) status word are:
+
+===== ============================================
+value description
+===== ============================================
+0x02 Out-of-window collision.
+0x04 Status stack overflow (normally impossible).
+0x08 16 collisions.
+0x10 Tx underrun (not enough PCI bus bandwidth).
+0x20 Tx jabber.
+0x40 Tx interrupt requested.
+0x80 Status is valid (this should always be set).
+===== ============================================
+
+
+When a transmit error occurs the driver produces a status message such as::
+
+ eth0: Transmit error, Tx status register 82
+
+The two values typically seen here are:
+
+0x82
+^^^^
+
+Out of window collision. This typically occurs when some other Ethernet
+host is incorrectly set to full duplex on a half duplex network.
+
+0x88
+^^^^
+
+16 collisions. This typically occurs when the network is exceptionally busy
+or when another host doesn't correctly back off after a collision. If this
+error is mixed with 0x82 errors it is the result of a host incorrectly set
+to full duplex (see above).
+
+Both of these errors are the result of network problems that should be
+corrected. They do not represent driver malfunction.
+
+
+Revision history (this file)
+============================
+
+28Feb02 v1.0 DR New; major portions based on Becker original 3c509 docs
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/vortex.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/vortex.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..eab10fc6d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/3com/vortex.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,459 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=========================
+3Com Vortex device driver
+=========================
+
+Andrew Morton
+
+30 April 2000
+
+
+This document describes the usage and errata of the 3Com "Vortex" device
+driver for Linux, 3c59x.c.
+
+The driver was written by Donald Becker <becker@scyld.com>
+
+Don is no longer the prime maintainer of this version of the driver.
+Please report problems to one or more of:
+
+- Andrew Morton
+- Netdev mailing list <netdev@vger.kernel.org>
+- Linux kernel mailing list <linux-kernel@vger.kernel.org>
+
+Please note the 'Reporting and Diagnosing Problems' section at the end
+of this file.
+
+
+Since kernel 2.3.99-pre6, this driver incorporates the support for the
+3c575-series Cardbus cards which used to be handled by 3c575_cb.c.
+
+This driver supports the following hardware:
+
+ - 3c590 Vortex 10Mbps
+ - 3c592 EISA 10Mbps Demon/Vortex
+ - 3c597 EISA Fast Demon/Vortex
+ - 3c595 Vortex 100baseTx
+ - 3c595 Vortex 100baseT4
+ - 3c595 Vortex 100base-MII
+ - 3c900 Boomerang 10baseT
+ - 3c900 Boomerang 10Mbps Combo
+ - 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps TPO
+ - 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps Combo
+ - 3c900 Cyclone 10Mbps TPC
+ - 3c900B-FL Cyclone 10base-FL
+ - 3c905 Boomerang 100baseTx
+ - 3c905 Boomerang 100baseT4
+ - 3c905B Cyclone 100baseTx
+ - 3c905B Cyclone 10/100/BNC
+ - 3c905B-FX Cyclone 100baseFx
+ - 3c905C Tornado
+ - 3c920B-EMB-WNM (ATI Radeon 9100 IGP)
+ - 3c980 Cyclone
+ - 3c980C Python-T
+ - 3cSOHO100-TX Hurricane
+ - 3c555 Laptop Hurricane
+ - 3c556 Laptop Tornado
+ - 3c556B Laptop Hurricane
+ - 3c575 [Megahertz] 10/100 LAN CardBus
+ - 3c575 Boomerang CardBus
+ - 3CCFE575BT Cyclone CardBus
+ - 3CCFE575CT Tornado CardBus
+ - 3CCFE656 Cyclone CardBus
+ - 3CCFEM656B Cyclone+Winmodem CardBus
+ - 3CXFEM656C Tornado+Winmodem CardBus
+ - 3c450 HomePNA Tornado
+ - 3c920 Tornado
+ - 3c982 Hydra Dual Port A
+ - 3c982 Hydra Dual Port B
+ - 3c905B-T4
+ - 3c920B-EMB-WNM Tornado
+
+Module parameters
+=================
+
+There are several parameters which may be provided to the driver when
+its module is loaded. These are usually placed in ``/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf``
+configuration files. Example::
+
+ options 3c59x debug=3 rx_copybreak=300
+
+If you are using the PCMCIA tools (cardmgr) then the options may be
+placed in /etc/pcmcia/config.opts::
+
+ module "3c59x" opts "debug=3 rx_copybreak=300"
+
+
+The supported parameters are:
+
+debug=N
+
+ Where N is a number from 0 to 7. Anything above 3 produces a lot
+ of output in your system logs. debug=1 is default.
+
+options=N1,N2,N3,...
+
+ Each number in the list provides an option to the corresponding
+ network card. So if you have two 3c905's and you wish to provide
+ them with option 0x204 you would use::
+
+ options=0x204,0x204
+
+ The individual options are composed of a number of bitfields which
+ have the following meanings:
+
+ Possible media type settings
+
+ == =================================
+ 0 10baseT
+ 1 10Mbs AUI
+ 2 undefined
+ 3 10base2 (BNC)
+ 4 100base-TX
+ 5 100base-FX
+ 6 MII (Media Independent Interface)
+ 7 Use default setting from EEPROM
+ 8 Autonegotiate
+ 9 External MII
+ 10 Use default setting from EEPROM
+ == =================================
+
+ When generating a value for the 'options' setting, the above media
+ selection values may be OR'ed (or added to) the following:
+
+ ====== =============================================
+ 0x8000 Set driver debugging level to 7
+ 0x4000 Set driver debugging level to 2
+ 0x0400 Enable Wake-on-LAN
+ 0x0200 Force full duplex mode.
+ 0x0010 Bus-master enable bit (Old Vortex cards only)
+ ====== =============================================
+
+ For example::
+
+ insmod 3c59x options=0x204
+
+ will force full-duplex 100base-TX, rather than allowing the usual
+ autonegotiation.
+
+global_options=N
+
+ Sets the ``options`` parameter for all 3c59x NICs in the machine.
+ Entries in the ``options`` array above will override any setting of
+ this.
+
+full_duplex=N1,N2,N3...
+
+ Similar to bit 9 of 'options'. Forces the corresponding card into
+ full-duplex mode. Please use this in preference to the ``options``
+ parameter.
+
+ In fact, please don't use this at all! You're better off getting
+ autonegotiation working properly.
+
+global_full_duplex=N1
+
+ Sets full duplex mode for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. Entries
+ in the ``full_duplex`` array above will override any setting of this.
+
+flow_ctrl=N1,N2,N3...
+
+ Use 802.3x MAC-layer flow control. The 3com cards only support the
+ PAUSE command, which means that they will stop sending packets for a
+ short period if they receive a PAUSE frame from the link partner.
+
+ The driver only allows flow control on a link which is operating in
+ full duplex mode.
+
+ This feature does not appear to work on the 3c905 - only 3c905B and
+ 3c905C have been tested.
+
+ The 3com cards appear to only respond to PAUSE frames which are
+ sent to the reserved destination address of 01:80:c2:00:00:01. They
+ do not honour PAUSE frames which are sent to the station MAC address.
+
+rx_copybreak=M
+
+ The driver preallocates 32 full-sized (1536 byte) network buffers
+ for receiving. When a packet arrives, the driver has to decide
+ whether to leave the packet in its full-sized buffer, or to allocate
+ a smaller buffer and copy the packet across into it.
+
+ This is a speed/space tradeoff.
+
+ The value of rx_copybreak is used to decide when to make the copy.
+ If the packet size is less than rx_copybreak, the packet is copied.
+ The default value for rx_copybreak is 200 bytes.
+
+max_interrupt_work=N
+
+ The driver's interrupt service routine can handle many receive and
+ transmit packets in a single invocation. It does this in a loop.
+ The value of max_interrupt_work governs how many times the interrupt
+ service routine will loop. The default value is 32 loops. If this
+ is exceeded the interrupt service routine gives up and generates a
+ warning message "eth0: Too much work in interrupt".
+
+hw_checksums=N1,N2,N3,...
+
+ Recent 3com NICs are able to generate IPv4, TCP and UDP checksums
+ in hardware. Linux has used the Rx checksumming for a long time.
+ The "zero copy" patch which is planned for the 2.4 kernel series
+ allows you to make use of the NIC's DMA scatter/gather and transmit
+ checksumming as well.
+
+ The driver is set up so that, when the zerocopy patch is applied,
+ all Tornado and Cyclone devices will use S/G and Tx checksums.
+
+ This module parameter has been provided so you can override this
+ decision. If you think that Tx checksums are causing a problem, you
+ may disable the feature with ``hw_checksums=0``.
+
+ If you think your NIC should be performing Tx checksumming and the
+ driver isn't enabling it, you can force the use of hardware Tx
+ checksumming with ``hw_checksums=1``.
+
+ The driver drops a message in the logfiles to indicate whether or
+ not it is using hardware scatter/gather and hardware Tx checksums.
+
+ Scatter/gather and hardware checksums provide considerable
+ performance improvement for the sendfile() system call, but a small
+ decrease in throughput for send(). There is no effect upon receive
+ efficiency.
+
+compaq_ioaddr=N,
+compaq_irq=N,
+compaq_device_id=N
+
+ "Variables to work-around the Compaq PCI BIOS32 problem"....
+
+watchdog=N
+
+ Sets the time duration (in milliseconds) after which the kernel
+ decides that the transmitter has become stuck and needs to be reset.
+ This is mainly for debugging purposes, although it may be advantageous
+ to increase this value on LANs which have very high collision rates.
+ The default value is 5000 (5.0 seconds).
+
+enable_wol=N1,N2,N3,...
+
+ Enable Wake-on-LAN support for the relevant interface. Donald
+ Becker's ``ether-wake`` application may be used to wake suspended
+ machines.
+
+ Also enables the NIC's power management support.
+
+global_enable_wol=N
+
+ Sets enable_wol mode for all 3c59x NICs in the machine. Entries in
+ the ``enable_wol`` array above will override any setting of this.
+
+Media selection
+---------------
+
+A number of the older NICs such as the 3c590 and 3c900 series have
+10base2 and AUI interfaces.
+
+Prior to January, 2001 this driver would autoeselect the 10base2 or AUI
+port if it didn't detect activity on the 10baseT port. It would then
+get stuck on the 10base2 port and a driver reload was necessary to
+switch back to 10baseT. This behaviour could not be prevented with a
+module option override.
+
+Later (current) versions of the driver _do_ support locking of the
+media type. So if you load the driver module with
+
+ modprobe 3c59x options=0
+
+it will permanently select the 10baseT port. Automatic selection of
+other media types does not occur.
+
+
+Transmit error, Tx status register 82
+-------------------------------------
+
+This is a common error which is almost always caused by another host on
+the same network being in full-duplex mode, while this host is in
+half-duplex mode. You need to find that other host and make it run in
+half-duplex mode or fix this host to run in full-duplex mode.
+
+As a last resort, you can force the 3c59x driver into full-duplex mode
+with
+
+ options 3c59x full_duplex=1
+
+but this has to be viewed as a workaround for broken network gear and
+should only really be used for equipment which cannot autonegotiate.
+
+
+Additional resources
+--------------------
+
+Details of the device driver implementation are at the top of the source file.
+
+Additional documentation is available at Don Becker's Linux Drivers site:
+
+ http://www.scyld.com/vortex.html
+
+Donald Becker's driver development site:
+
+ http://www.scyld.com/network.html
+
+Donald's vortex-diag program is useful for inspecting the NIC's state:
+
+ http://www.scyld.com/ethercard_diag.html
+
+Donald's mii-diag program may be used for inspecting and manipulating
+the NIC's Media Independent Interface subsystem:
+
+ http://www.scyld.com/ethercard_diag.html#mii-diag
+
+Donald's wake-on-LAN page:
+
+ http://www.scyld.com/wakeonlan.html
+
+3Com's DOS-based application for setting up the NICs EEPROMs:
+
+ ftp://ftp.3com.com/pub/nic/3c90x/3c90xx2.exe
+
+
+Autonegotiation notes
+---------------------
+
+ The driver uses a one-minute heartbeat for adapting to changes in
+ the external LAN environment if link is up and 5 seconds if link is down.
+ This means that when, for example, a machine is unplugged from a hubbed
+ 10baseT LAN plugged into a switched 100baseT LAN, the throughput
+ will be quite dreadful for up to sixty seconds. Be patient.
+
+ Cisco interoperability note from Walter Wong <wcw+@CMU.EDU>:
+
+ On a side note, adding HAS_NWAY seems to share a problem with the
+ Cisco 6509 switch. Specifically, you need to change the spanning
+ tree parameter for the port the machine is plugged into to 'portfast'
+ mode. Otherwise, the negotiation fails. This has been an issue
+ we've noticed for a while but haven't had the time to track down.
+
+ Cisco switches (Jeff Busch <jbusch@deja.com>)
+
+ My "standard config" for ports to which PC's/servers connect directly::
+
+ interface FastEthernet0/N
+ description machinename
+ load-interval 30
+ spanning-tree portfast
+
+ If autonegotiation is a problem, you may need to specify "speed
+ 100" and "duplex full" as well (or "speed 10" and "duplex half").
+
+ WARNING: DO NOT hook up hubs/switches/bridges to these
+ specially-configured ports! The switch will become very confused.
+
+
+Reporting and diagnosing problems
+---------------------------------
+
+Maintainers find that accurate and complete problem reports are
+invaluable in resolving driver problems. We are frequently not able to
+reproduce problems and must rely on your patience and efforts to get to
+the bottom of the problem.
+
+If you believe you have a driver problem here are some of the
+steps you should take:
+
+- Is it really a driver problem?
+
+ Eliminate some variables: try different cards, different
+ computers, different cables, different ports on the switch/hub,
+ different versions of the kernel or of the driver, etc.
+
+- OK, it's a driver problem.
+
+ You need to generate a report. Typically this is an email to the
+ maintainer and/or netdev@vger.kernel.org. The maintainer's
+ email address will be in the driver source or in the MAINTAINERS file.
+
+- The contents of your report will vary a lot depending upon the
+ problem. If it's a kernel crash then you should refer to the
+ admin-guide/reporting-bugs.rst file.
+
+ But for most problems it is useful to provide the following:
+
+ - Kernel version, driver version
+
+ - A copy of the banner message which the driver generates when
+ it is initialised. For example:
+
+ eth0: 3Com PCI 3c905C Tornado at 0xa400, 00:50:da:6a:88:f0, IRQ 19
+ 8K byte-wide RAM 5:3 Rx:Tx split, autoselect/Autonegotiate interface.
+ MII transceiver found at address 24, status 782d.
+ Enabling bus-master transmits and whole-frame receives.
+
+ NOTE: You must provide the ``debug=2`` modprobe option to generate
+ a full detection message. Please do this::
+
+ modprobe 3c59x debug=2
+
+ - If it is a PCI device, the relevant output from 'lspci -vx', eg::
+
+ 00:09.0 Ethernet controller: 3Com Corporation 3c905C-TX [Fast Etherlink] (rev 74)
+ Subsystem: 3Com Corporation: Unknown device 9200
+ Flags: bus master, medium devsel, latency 32, IRQ 19
+ I/O ports at a400 [size=128]
+ Memory at db000000 (32-bit, non-prefetchable) [size=128]
+ Expansion ROM at <unassigned> [disabled] [size=128K]
+ Capabilities: [dc] Power Management version 2
+ 00: b7 10 00 92 07 00 10 02 74 00 00 02 08 20 00 00
+ 10: 01 a4 00 00 00 00 00 db 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
+ 20: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 b7 10 00 10
+ 30: 00 00 00 00 dc 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 01 0a 0a
+
+ - A description of the environment: 10baseT? 100baseT?
+ full/half duplex? switched or hubbed?
+
+ - Any additional module parameters which you may be providing to the driver.
+
+ - Any kernel logs which are produced. The more the merrier.
+ If this is a large file and you are sending your report to a
+ mailing list, mention that you have the logfile, but don't send
+ it. If you're reporting direct to the maintainer then just send
+ it.
+
+ To ensure that all kernel logs are available, add the
+ following line to /etc/syslog.conf::
+
+ kern.* /var/log/messages
+
+ Then restart syslogd with::
+
+ /etc/rc.d/init.d/syslog restart
+
+ (The above may vary, depending upon which Linux distribution you use).
+
+ - If your problem is reproducible then that's great. Try the
+ following:
+
+ 1) Increase the debug level. Usually this is done via:
+
+ a) modprobe driver debug=7
+ b) In /etc/modprobe.d/driver.conf:
+ options driver debug=7
+
+ 2) Recreate the problem with the higher debug level,
+ send all logs to the maintainer.
+
+ 3) Download you card's diagnostic tool from Donald
+ Becker's website <http://www.scyld.com/ethercard_diag.html>.
+ Download mii-diag.c as well. Build these.
+
+ a) Run 'vortex-diag -aaee' and 'mii-diag -v' when the card is
+ working correctly. Save the output.
+
+ b) Run the above commands when the card is malfunctioning. Send
+ both sets of output.
+
+Finally, please be patient and be prepared to do some work. You may
+end up working on this problem for a week or more as the maintainer
+asks more questions, asks for more tests, asks for patches to be
+applied, etc. At the end of it all, the problem may even remain
+unresolved.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/altera/altera_tse.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/altera/altera_tse.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7a7040072
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/altera/altera_tse.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,286 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+=======================================
+Altera Triple-Speed Ethernet MAC driver
+=======================================
+
+Copyright |copy| 2008-2014 Altera Corporation
+
+This is the driver for the Altera Triple-Speed Ethernet (TSE) controllers
+using the SGDMA and MSGDMA soft DMA IP components. The driver uses the
+platform bus to obtain component resources. The designs used to test this
+driver were built for a Cyclone(R) V SOC FPGA board, a Cyclone(R) V FPGA board,
+and tested with ARM and NIOS processor hosts separately. The anticipated use
+cases are simple communications between an embedded system and an external peer
+for status and simple configuration of the embedded system.
+
+For more information visit www.altera.com and www.rocketboards.org. Support
+forums for the driver may be found on www.rocketboards.org, and a design used
+to test this driver may be found there as well. Support is also available from
+the maintainer of this driver, found in MAINTAINERS.
+
+The Triple-Speed Ethernet, SGDMA, and MSGDMA components are all soft IP
+components that can be assembled and built into an FPGA using the Altera
+Quartus toolchain. Quartus 13.1 and 14.0 were used to build the design that
+this driver was tested against. The sopc2dts tool is used to create the
+device tree for the driver, and may be found at rocketboards.org.
+
+The driver probe function examines the device tree and determines if the
+Triple-Speed Ethernet instance is using an SGDMA or MSGDMA component. The
+probe function then installs the appropriate set of DMA routines to
+initialize, setup transmits, receives, and interrupt handling primitives for
+the respective configurations.
+
+The SGDMA component is to be deprecated in the near future (over the next 1-2
+years as of this writing in early 2014) in favor of the MSGDMA component.
+SGDMA support is included for existing designs and reference in case a
+developer wishes to support their own soft DMA logic and driver support. Any
+new designs should not use the SGDMA.
+
+The SGDMA supports only a single transmit or receive operation at a time, and
+therefore will not perform as well compared to the MSGDMA soft IP. Please
+visit www.altera.com for known, documented SGDMA errata.
+
+Scatter-gather DMA is not supported by the SGDMA or MSGDMA at this time.
+Scatter-gather DMA will be added to a future maintenance update to this
+driver.
+
+Jumbo frames are not supported at this time.
+
+The driver limits PHY operations to 10/100Mbps, and has not yet been fully
+tested for 1Gbps. This support will be added in a future maintenance update.
+
+1. Kernel Configuration
+=======================
+
+The kernel configuration option is ALTERA_TSE:
+
+ Device Drivers ---> Network device support ---> Ethernet driver support --->
+ Altera Triple-Speed Ethernet MAC support (ALTERA_TSE)
+
+2. Driver parameters list
+=========================
+
+ - debug: message level (0: no output, 16: all);
+ - dma_rx_num: Number of descriptors in the RX list (default is 64);
+ - dma_tx_num: Number of descriptors in the TX list (default is 64).
+
+3. Command line options
+=======================
+
+Driver parameters can be also passed in command line by using::
+
+ altera_tse=dma_rx_num:128,dma_tx_num:512
+
+4. Driver information and notes
+===============================
+
+4.1. Transmit process
+---------------------
+When the driver's transmit routine is called by the kernel, it sets up a
+transmit descriptor by calling the underlying DMA transmit routine (SGDMA or
+MSGDMA), and initiates a transmit operation. Once the transmit is complete, an
+interrupt is driven by the transmit DMA logic. The driver handles the transmit
+completion in the context of the interrupt handling chain by recycling
+resource required to send and track the requested transmit operation.
+
+4.2. Receive process
+--------------------
+The driver will post receive buffers to the receive DMA logic during driver
+initialization. Receive buffers may or may not be queued depending upon the
+underlying DMA logic (MSGDMA is able queue receive buffers, SGDMA is not able
+to queue receive buffers to the SGDMA receive logic). When a packet is
+received, the DMA logic generates an interrupt. The driver handles a receive
+interrupt by obtaining the DMA receive logic status, reaping receive
+completions until no more receive completions are available.
+
+4.3. Interrupt Mitigation
+-------------------------
+The driver is able to mitigate the number of its DMA interrupts
+using NAPI for receive operations. Interrupt mitigation is not yet supported
+for transmit operations, but will be added in a future maintenance release.
+
+4.4) Ethtool support
+--------------------
+Ethtool is supported. Driver statistics and internal errors can be taken using:
+ethtool -S ethX command. It is possible to dump registers etc.
+
+4.5) PHY Support
+----------------
+The driver is compatible with PAL to work with PHY and GPHY devices.
+
+4.7) List of source files:
+--------------------------
+ - Kconfig
+ - Makefile
+ - altera_tse_main.c: main network device driver
+ - altera_tse_ethtool.c: ethtool support
+ - altera_tse.h: private driver structure and common definitions
+ - altera_msgdma.h: MSGDMA implementation function definitions
+ - altera_sgdma.h: SGDMA implementation function definitions
+ - altera_msgdma.c: MSGDMA implementation
+ - altera_sgdma.c: SGDMA implementation
+ - altera_sgdmahw.h: SGDMA register and descriptor definitions
+ - altera_msgdmahw.h: MSGDMA register and descriptor definitions
+ - altera_utils.c: Driver utility functions
+ - altera_utils.h: Driver utility function definitions
+
+5. Debug Information
+====================
+
+The driver exports debug information such as internal statistics,
+debug information, MAC and DMA registers etc.
+
+A user may use the ethtool support to get statistics:
+e.g. using: ethtool -S ethX (that shows the statistics counters)
+or sees the MAC registers: e.g. using: ethtool -d ethX
+
+The developer can also use the "debug" module parameter to get
+further debug information.
+
+6. Statistics Support
+=====================
+
+The controller and driver support a mix of IEEE standard defined statistics,
+RFC defined statistics, and driver or Altera defined statistics. The four
+specifications containing the standard definitions for these statistics are
+as follows:
+
+ - IEEE 802.3-2012 - IEEE Standard for Ethernet.
+ - RFC 2863 found at http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2863.txt.
+ - RFC 2819 found at http://www.rfc-editor.org/rfc/rfc2819.txt.
+ - Altera Triple Speed Ethernet User Guide, found at http://www.altera.com
+
+The statistics supported by the TSE and the device driver are as follows:
+
+"tx_packets" is equivalent to aFramesTransmittedOK defined in IEEE 802.3-2012,
+Section 5.2.2.1.2. This statistics is the count of frames that are successfully
+transmitted.
+
+"rx_packets" is equivalent to aFramesReceivedOK defined in IEEE 802.3-2012,
+Section 5.2.2.1.5. This statistic is the count of frames that are successfully
+received. This count does not include any error packets such as CRC errors,
+length errors, or alignment errors.
+
+"rx_crc_errors" is equivalent to aFrameCheckSequenceErrors defined in IEEE
+802.3-2012, Section 5.2.2.1.6. This statistic is the count of frames that are
+an integral number of bytes in length and do not pass the CRC test as the frame
+is received.
+
+"rx_align_errors" is equivalent to aAlignmentErrors defined in IEEE 802.3-2012,
+Section 5.2.2.1.7. This statistic is the count of frames that are not an
+integral number of bytes in length and do not pass the CRC test as the frame is
+received.
+
+"tx_bytes" is equivalent to aOctetsTransmittedOK defined in IEEE 802.3-2012,
+Section 5.2.2.1.8. This statistic is the count of data and pad bytes
+successfully transmitted from the interface.
+
+"rx_bytes" is equivalent to aOctetsReceivedOK defined in IEEE 802.3-2012,
+Section 5.2.2.1.14. This statistic is the count of data and pad bytes
+successfully received by the controller.
+
+"tx_pause" is equivalent to aPAUSEMACCtrlFramesTransmitted defined in IEEE
+802.3-2012, Section 30.3.4.2. This statistic is a count of PAUSE frames
+transmitted from the network controller.
+
+"rx_pause" is equivalent to aPAUSEMACCtrlFramesReceived defined in IEEE
+802.3-2012, Section 30.3.4.3. This statistic is a count of PAUSE frames
+received by the network controller.
+
+"rx_errors" is equivalent to ifInErrors defined in RFC 2863. This statistic is
+a count of the number of packets received containing errors that prevented the
+packet from being delivered to a higher level protocol.
+
+"tx_errors" is equivalent to ifOutErrors defined in RFC 2863. This statistic
+is a count of the number of packets that could not be transmitted due to errors.
+
+"rx_unicast" is equivalent to ifInUcastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This
+statistic is a count of the number of packets received that were not addressed
+to the broadcast address or a multicast group.
+
+"rx_multicast" is equivalent to ifInMulticastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This
+statistic is a count of the number of packets received that were addressed to
+a multicast address group.
+
+"rx_broadcast" is equivalent to ifInBroadcastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This
+statistic is a count of the number of packets received that were addressed to
+the broadcast address.
+
+"tx_discards" is equivalent to ifOutDiscards defined in RFC 2863. This
+statistic is the number of outbound packets not transmitted even though an
+error was not detected. An example of a reason this might occur is to free up
+internal buffer space.
+
+"tx_unicast" is equivalent to ifOutUcastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This
+statistic counts the number of packets transmitted that were not addressed to
+a multicast group or broadcast address.
+
+"tx_multicast" is equivalent to ifOutMulticastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This
+statistic counts the number of packets transmitted that were addressed to a
+multicast group.
+
+"tx_broadcast" is equivalent to ifOutBroadcastPkts defined in RFC 2863. This
+statistic counts the number of packets transmitted that were addressed to a
+broadcast address.
+
+"ether_drops" is equivalent to etherStatsDropEvents defined in RFC 2819.
+This statistic counts the number of packets dropped due to lack of internal
+controller resources.
+
+"rx_total_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsOctets defined in RFC 2819.
+This statistic counts the total number of bytes received by the controller,
+including error and discarded packets.
+
+"rx_total_packets" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts defined in RFC 2819.
+This statistic counts the total number of packets received by the controller,
+including error, discarded, unicast, multicast, and broadcast packets.
+
+"rx_undersize" is equivalent to etherStatsUndersizePkts defined in RFC 2819.
+This statistic counts the number of correctly formed packets received less
+than 64 bytes long.
+
+"rx_oversize" is equivalent to etherStatsOversizePkts defined in RFC 2819.
+This statistic counts the number of correctly formed packets greater than 1518
+bytes long.
+
+"rx_64_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts64Octets defined in RFC 2819.
+This statistic counts the total number of packets received that were 64 octets
+in length.
+
+"rx_65_127_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts65to127Octets defined in RFC
+2819. This statistic counts the total number of packets received that were
+between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive.
+
+"rx_128_255_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts128to255Octets defined in
+RFC 2819. This statistic is the total number of packets received that were
+between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive.
+
+"rx_256_511_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts256to511Octets defined in
+RFC 2819. This statistic is the total number of packets received that were
+between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive.
+
+"rx_512_1023_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts512to1023Octets defined in
+RFC 2819. This statistic is the total number of packets received that were
+between 512 and 1023 octets in length inclusive.
+
+"rx_1024_1518_bytes" is equivalent to etherStatsPkts1024to1518Octets define
+in RFC 2819. This statistic is the total number of packets received that were
+between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive.
+
+"rx_gte_1519_bytes" is a statistic defined specific to the behavior of the
+Altera TSE. This statistics counts the number of received good and errored
+frames between the length of 1519 and the maximum frame length configured
+in the frm_length register. See the Altera TSE User Guide for More details.
+
+"rx_jabbers" is equivalent to etherStatsJabbers defined in RFC 2819. This
+statistic is the total number of packets received that were longer than 1518
+octets, and had either a bad CRC with an integral number of octets (CRC Error)
+or a bad CRC with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
+
+"rx_runts" is equivalent to etherStatsFragments defined in RFC 2819. This
+statistic is the total number of packets received that were less than 64 octets
+in length and had either a bad CRC with an integral number of octets (CRC
+error) or a bad CRC with a non-integral number of octets (Alignment Error).
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/amazon/ena.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/amazon/ena.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3561a8a29
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/amazon/ena.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,325 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============================================================
+Linux kernel driver for Elastic Network Adapter (ENA) family
+============================================================
+
+Overview
+========
+
+ENA is a networking interface designed to make good use of modern CPU
+features and system architectures.
+
+The ENA device exposes a lightweight management interface with a
+minimal set of memory mapped registers and extendable command set
+through an Admin Queue.
+
+The driver supports a range of ENA devices, is link-speed independent
+(i.e., the same driver is used for 10GbE, 25GbE, 40GbE, etc.), and has
+a negotiated and extendable feature set.
+
+Some ENA devices support SR-IOV. This driver is used for both the
+SR-IOV Physical Function (PF) and Virtual Function (VF) devices.
+
+ENA devices enable high speed and low overhead network traffic
+processing by providing multiple Tx/Rx queue pairs (the maximum number
+is advertised by the device via the Admin Queue), a dedicated MSI-X
+interrupt vector per Tx/Rx queue pair, adaptive interrupt moderation,
+and CPU cacheline optimized data placement.
+
+The ENA driver supports industry standard TCP/IP offload features such
+as checksum offload and TCP transmit segmentation offload (TSO).
+Receive-side scaling (RSS) is supported for multi-core scaling.
+
+The ENA driver and its corresponding devices implement health
+monitoring mechanisms such as watchdog, enabling the device and driver
+to recover in a manner transparent to the application, as well as
+debug logs.
+
+Some of the ENA devices support a working mode called Low-latency
+Queue (LLQ), which saves several more microseconds.
+
+ENA Source Code Directory Structure
+===================================
+
+================= ======================================================
+ena_com.[ch] Management communication layer. This layer is
+ responsible for the handling all the management
+ (admin) communication between the device and the
+ driver.
+ena_eth_com.[ch] Tx/Rx data path.
+ena_admin_defs.h Definition of ENA management interface.
+ena_eth_io_defs.h Definition of ENA data path interface.
+ena_common_defs.h Common definitions for ena_com layer.
+ena_regs_defs.h Definition of ENA PCI memory-mapped (MMIO) registers.
+ena_netdev.[ch] Main Linux kernel driver.
+ena_syfsfs.[ch] Sysfs files.
+ena_ethtool.c ethtool callbacks.
+ena_pci_id_tbl.h Supported device IDs.
+================= ======================================================
+
+Management Interface:
+=====================
+
+ENA management interface is exposed by means of:
+
+- PCIe Configuration Space
+- Device Registers
+- Admin Queue (AQ) and Admin Completion Queue (ACQ)
+- Asynchronous Event Notification Queue (AENQ)
+
+ENA device MMIO Registers are accessed only during driver
+initialization and are not involved in further normal device
+operation.
+
+AQ is used for submitting management commands, and the
+results/responses are reported asynchronously through ACQ.
+
+ENA introduces a small set of management commands with room for
+vendor-specific extensions. Most of the management operations are
+framed in a generic Get/Set feature command.
+
+The following admin queue commands are supported:
+
+- Create I/O submission queue
+- Create I/O completion queue
+- Destroy I/O submission queue
+- Destroy I/O completion queue
+- Get feature
+- Set feature
+- Configure AENQ
+- Get statistics
+
+Refer to ena_admin_defs.h for the list of supported Get/Set Feature
+properties.
+
+The Asynchronous Event Notification Queue (AENQ) is a uni-directional
+queue used by the ENA device to send to the driver events that cannot
+be reported using ACQ. AENQ events are subdivided into groups. Each
+group may have multiple syndromes, as shown below
+
+The events are:
+
+ ==================== ===============
+ Group Syndrome
+ ==================== ===============
+ Link state change **X**
+ Fatal error **X**
+ Notification Suspend traffic
+ Notification Resume traffic
+ Keep-Alive **X**
+ ==================== ===============
+
+ACQ and AENQ share the same MSI-X vector.
+
+Keep-Alive is a special mechanism that allows monitoring of the
+device's health. The driver maintains a watchdog (WD) handler which,
+if fired, logs the current state and statistics then resets and
+restarts the ENA device and driver. A Keep-Alive event is delivered by
+the device every second. The driver re-arms the WD upon reception of a
+Keep-Alive event. A missed Keep-Alive event causes the WD handler to
+fire.
+
+Data Path Interface
+===================
+I/O operations are based on Tx and Rx Submission Queues (Tx SQ and Rx
+SQ correspondingly). Each SQ has a completion queue (CQ) associated
+with it.
+
+The SQs and CQs are implemented as descriptor rings in contiguous
+physical memory.
+
+The ENA driver supports two Queue Operation modes for Tx SQs:
+
+- Regular mode
+
+ * In this mode the Tx SQs reside in the host's memory. The ENA
+ device fetches the ENA Tx descriptors and packet data from host
+ memory.
+
+- Low Latency Queue (LLQ) mode or "push-mode".
+
+ * In this mode the driver pushes the transmit descriptors and the
+ first 128 bytes of the packet directly to the ENA device memory
+ space. The rest of the packet payload is fetched by the
+ device. For this operation mode, the driver uses a dedicated PCI
+ device memory BAR, which is mapped with write-combine capability.
+
+The Rx SQs support only the regular mode.
+
+Note: Not all ENA devices support LLQ, and this feature is negotiated
+ with the device upon initialization. If the ENA device does not
+ support LLQ mode, the driver falls back to the regular mode.
+
+The driver supports multi-queue for both Tx and Rx. This has various
+benefits:
+
+- Reduced CPU/thread/process contention on a given Ethernet interface.
+- Cache miss rate on completion is reduced, particularly for data
+ cache lines that hold the sk_buff structures.
+- Increased process-level parallelism when handling received packets.
+- Increased data cache hit rate, by steering kernel processing of
+ packets to the CPU, where the application thread consuming the
+ packet is running.
+- In hardware interrupt re-direction.
+
+Interrupt Modes
+===============
+The driver assigns a single MSI-X vector per queue pair (for both Tx
+and Rx directions). The driver assigns an additional dedicated MSI-X vector
+for management (for ACQ and AENQ).
+
+Management interrupt registration is performed when the Linux kernel
+probes the adapter, and it is de-registered when the adapter is
+removed. I/O queue interrupt registration is performed when the Linux
+interface of the adapter is opened, and it is de-registered when the
+interface is closed.
+
+The management interrupt is named::
+
+ ena-mgmnt@pci:<PCI domain:bus:slot.function>
+
+and for each queue pair, an interrupt is named::
+
+ <interface name>-Tx-Rx-<queue index>
+
+The ENA device operates in auto-mask and auto-clear interrupt
+modes. That is, once MSI-X is delivered to the host, its Cause bit is
+automatically cleared and the interrupt is masked. The interrupt is
+unmasked by the driver after NAPI processing is complete.
+
+Interrupt Moderation
+====================
+ENA driver and device can operate in conventional or adaptive interrupt
+moderation mode.
+
+In conventional mode the driver instructs device to postpone interrupt
+posting according to static interrupt delay value. The interrupt delay
+value can be configured through ethtool(8). The following ethtool
+parameters are supported by the driver: tx-usecs, rx-usecs
+
+In adaptive interrupt moderation mode the interrupt delay value is
+updated by the driver dynamically and adjusted every NAPI cycle
+according to the traffic nature.
+
+Adaptive coalescing can be switched on/off through ethtool(8)
+adaptive_rx on|off parameter.
+
+More information about Adaptive Interrupt Moderation (DIM) can be found in
+Documentation/networking/net_dim.rst
+
+RX copybreak
+============
+The rx_copybreak is initialized by default to ENA_DEFAULT_RX_COPYBREAK
+and can be configured by the ETHTOOL_STUNABLE command of the
+SIOCETHTOOL ioctl.
+
+SKB
+===
+The driver-allocated SKB for frames received from Rx handling using
+NAPI context. The allocation method depends on the size of the packet.
+If the frame length is larger than rx_copybreak, napi_get_frags()
+is used, otherwise netdev_alloc_skb_ip_align() is used, the buffer
+content is copied (by CPU) to the SKB, and the buffer is recycled.
+
+Statistics
+==========
+The user can obtain ENA device and driver statistics using ethtool.
+The driver can collect regular or extended statistics (including
+per-queue stats) from the device.
+
+In addition the driver logs the stats to syslog upon device reset.
+
+MTU
+===
+The driver supports an arbitrarily large MTU with a maximum that is
+negotiated with the device. The driver configures MTU using the
+SetFeature command (ENA_ADMIN_MTU property). The user can change MTU
+via ip(8) and similar legacy tools.
+
+Stateless Offloads
+==================
+The ENA driver supports:
+
+- TSO over IPv4/IPv6
+- TSO with ECN
+- IPv4 header checksum offload
+- TCP/UDP over IPv4/IPv6 checksum offloads
+
+RSS
+===
+- The ENA device supports RSS that allows flexible Rx traffic
+ steering.
+- Toeplitz and CRC32 hash functions are supported.
+- Different combinations of L2/L3/L4 fields can be configured as
+ inputs for hash functions.
+- The driver configures RSS settings using the AQ SetFeature command
+ (ENA_ADMIN_RSS_HASH_FUNCTION, ENA_ADMIN_RSS_HASH_INPUT and
+ ENA_ADMIN_RSS_INDIRECTION_TABLE_CONFIG properties).
+- If the NETIF_F_RXHASH flag is set, the 32-bit result of the hash
+ function delivered in the Rx CQ descriptor is set in the received
+ SKB.
+- The user can provide a hash key, hash function, and configure the
+ indirection table through ethtool(8).
+
+DATA PATH
+=========
+Tx
+--
+
+end_start_xmit() is called by the stack. This function does the following:
+
+- Maps data buffers (skb->data and frags).
+- Populates ena_buf for the push buffer (if the driver and device are
+ in push mode.)
+- Prepares ENA bufs for the remaining frags.
+- Allocates a new request ID from the empty req_id ring. The request
+ ID is the index of the packet in the Tx info. This is used for
+ out-of-order TX completions.
+- Adds the packet to the proper place in the Tx ring.
+- Calls ena_com_prepare_tx(), an ENA communication layer that converts
+ the ena_bufs to ENA descriptors (and adds meta ENA descriptors as
+ needed.)
+
+ * This function also copies the ENA descriptors and the push buffer
+ to the Device memory space (if in push mode.)
+
+- Writes doorbell to the ENA device.
+- When the ENA device finishes sending the packet, a completion
+ interrupt is raised.
+- The interrupt handler schedules NAPI.
+- The ena_clean_tx_irq() function is called. This function handles the
+ completion descriptors generated by the ENA, with a single
+ completion descriptor per completed packet.
+
+ * req_id is retrieved from the completion descriptor. The tx_info of
+ the packet is retrieved via the req_id. The data buffers are
+ unmapped and req_id is returned to the empty req_id ring.
+ * The function stops when the completion descriptors are completed or
+ the budget is reached.
+
+Rx
+--
+
+- When a packet is received from the ENA device.
+- The interrupt handler schedules NAPI.
+- The ena_clean_rx_irq() function is called. This function calls
+ ena_rx_pkt(), an ENA communication layer function, which returns the
+ number of descriptors used for a new unhandled packet, and zero if
+ no new packet is found.
+- Then it calls the ena_clean_rx_irq() function.
+- ena_eth_rx_skb() checks packet length:
+
+ * If the packet is small (len < rx_copybreak), the driver allocates
+ a SKB for the new packet, and copies the packet payload into the
+ SKB data buffer.
+
+ - In this way the original data buffer is not passed to the stack
+ and is reused for future Rx packets.
+
+ * Otherwise the function unmaps the Rx buffer, then allocates the
+ new SKB structure and hooks the Rx buffer to the SKB frags.
+
+- The new SKB is updated with the necessary information (protocol,
+ checksum hw verify result, etc.), and then passed to the network
+ stack, using the NAPI interface function napi_gro_receive().
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/aquantia/atlantic.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/aquantia/atlantic.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..595ddef1c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/aquantia/atlantic.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,556 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+===============================
+Marvell(Aquantia) AQtion Driver
+===============================
+
+For the aQuantia Multi-Gigabit PCI Express Family of Ethernet Adapters
+
+.. Contents
+
+ - Identifying Your Adapter
+ - Configuration
+ - Supported ethtool options
+ - Command Line Parameters
+ - Config file parameters
+ - Support
+ - License
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+
+The driver in this release is compatible with AQC-100, AQC-107, AQC-108
+based ethernet adapters.
+
+
+SFP+ Devices (for AQC-100 based adapters)
+-----------------------------------------
+
+This release tested with passive Direct Attach Cables (DAC) and SFP+/LC
+Optical Transceiver.
+
+Configuration
+=============
+
+Viewing Link Messages
+---------------------
+ Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is
+ restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on
+ your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following::
+
+ dmesg -n 8
+
+ .. note::
+
+ This setting is not saved across reboots.
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+ The driver supports Jumbo Frames for all adapters. Jumbo Frames support is
+ enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than the default of 1500.
+ The maximum value for the MTU is 16000. Use the `ip` command to
+ increase the MTU size. For example::
+
+ ip link set mtu 16000 dev enp1s0
+
+ethtool
+-------
+ The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+ diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest
+ ethtool version is required for this functionality.
+
+NAPI
+----
+ NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the atlantic driver.
+
+Supported ethtool options
+=========================
+
+Viewing adapter settings
+------------------------
+
+ ::
+
+ ethtool <ethX>
+
+ Output example::
+
+ Settings for enp1s0:
+ Supported ports: [ TP ]
+ Supported link modes: 100baseT/Full
+ 1000baseT/Full
+ 10000baseT/Full
+ 2500baseT/Full
+ 5000baseT/Full
+ Supported pause frame use: Symmetric
+ Supports auto-negotiation: Yes
+ Supported FEC modes: Not reported
+ Advertised link modes: 100baseT/Full
+ 1000baseT/Full
+ 10000baseT/Full
+ 2500baseT/Full
+ 5000baseT/Full
+ Advertised pause frame use: Symmetric
+ Advertised auto-negotiation: Yes
+ Advertised FEC modes: Not reported
+ Speed: 10000Mb/s
+ Duplex: Full
+ Port: Twisted Pair
+ PHYAD: 0
+ Transceiver: internal
+ Auto-negotiation: on
+ MDI-X: Unknown
+ Supports Wake-on: g
+ Wake-on: d
+ Link detected: yes
+
+
+ .. note::
+
+ AQrate speeds (2.5/5 Gb/s) will be displayed only with linux kernels > 4.10.
+ But you can still use these speeds::
+
+ ethtool -s eth0 autoneg off speed 2500
+
+Viewing adapter information
+---------------------------
+
+ ::
+
+ ethtool -i <ethX>
+
+ Output example::
+
+ driver: atlantic
+ version: 5.2.0-050200rc5-generic-kern
+ firmware-version: 3.1.78
+ expansion-rom-version:
+ bus-info: 0000:01:00.0
+ supports-statistics: yes
+ supports-test: no
+ supports-eeprom-access: no
+ supports-register-dump: yes
+ supports-priv-flags: no
+
+
+Viewing Ethernet adapter statistics
+-----------------------------------
+
+ ::
+
+ ethtool -S <ethX>
+
+ Output example::
+
+ NIC statistics:
+ InPackets: 13238607
+ InUCast: 13293852
+ InMCast: 52
+ InBCast: 3
+ InErrors: 0
+ OutPackets: 23703019
+ OutUCast: 23704941
+ OutMCast: 67
+ OutBCast: 11
+ InUCastOctects: 213182760
+ OutUCastOctects: 22698443
+ InMCastOctects: 6600
+ OutMCastOctects: 8776
+ InBCastOctects: 192
+ OutBCastOctects: 704
+ InOctects: 2131839552
+ OutOctects: 226938073
+ InPacketsDma: 95532300
+ OutPacketsDma: 59503397
+ InOctetsDma: 1137102462
+ OutOctetsDma: 2394339518
+ InDroppedDma: 0
+ Queue[0] InPackets: 23567131
+ Queue[0] OutPackets: 20070028
+ Queue[0] InJumboPackets: 0
+ Queue[0] InLroPackets: 0
+ Queue[0] InErrors: 0
+ Queue[1] InPackets: 45428967
+ Queue[1] OutPackets: 11306178
+ Queue[1] InJumboPackets: 0
+ Queue[1] InLroPackets: 0
+ Queue[1] InErrors: 0
+ Queue[2] InPackets: 3187011
+ Queue[2] OutPackets: 13080381
+ Queue[2] InJumboPackets: 0
+ Queue[2] InLroPackets: 0
+ Queue[2] InErrors: 0
+ Queue[3] InPackets: 23349136
+ Queue[3] OutPackets: 15046810
+ Queue[3] InJumboPackets: 0
+ Queue[3] InLroPackets: 0
+ Queue[3] InErrors: 0
+
+Interrupt coalescing support
+----------------------------
+
+ ITR mode, TX/RX coalescing timings could be viewed with::
+
+ ethtool -c <ethX>
+
+ and changed with::
+
+ ethtool -C <ethX> tx-usecs <usecs> rx-usecs <usecs>
+
+ To disable coalescing::
+
+ ethtool -C <ethX> tx-usecs 0 rx-usecs 0 tx-max-frames 1 tx-max-frames 1
+
+Wake on LAN support
+-------------------
+
+ WOL support by magic packet::
+
+ ethtool -s <ethX> wol g
+
+ To disable WOL::
+
+ ethtool -s <ethX> wol d
+
+Set and check the driver message level
+--------------------------------------
+
+ Set message level
+
+ ::
+
+ ethtool -s <ethX> msglvl <level>
+
+ Level values:
+
+ ====== =============================
+ 0x0001 general driver status.
+ 0x0002 hardware probing.
+ 0x0004 link state.
+ 0x0008 periodic status check.
+ 0x0010 interface being brought down.
+ 0x0020 interface being brought up.
+ 0x0040 receive error.
+ 0x0080 transmit error.
+ 0x0200 interrupt handling.
+ 0x0400 transmit completion.
+ 0x0800 receive completion.
+ 0x1000 packet contents.
+ 0x2000 hardware status.
+ 0x4000 Wake-on-LAN status.
+ ====== =============================
+
+ By default, the level of debugging messages is set 0x0001(general driver status).
+
+ Check message level
+
+ ::
+
+ ethtool <ethX> | grep "Current message level"
+
+ If you want to disable the output of messages::
+
+ ethtool -s <ethX> msglvl 0
+
+RX flow rules (ntuple filters)
+------------------------------
+
+ There are separate rules supported, that applies in that order:
+
+ 1. 16 VLAN ID rules
+ 2. 16 L2 EtherType rules
+ 3. 8 L3/L4 5-Tuple rules
+
+
+ The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for configuring ntuple filters,
+ via ``ethtool -N <device> <filter>``.
+
+ To enable or disable the RX flow rules::
+
+ ethtool -K ethX ntuple <on|off>
+
+ When disabling ntuple filters, all the user programed filters are
+ flushed from the driver cache and hardware. All needed filters must
+ be re-added when ntuple is re-enabled.
+
+ Because of the fixed order of the rules, the location of filters is also fixed:
+
+ - Locations 0 - 15 for VLAN ID filters
+ - Locations 16 - 31 for L2 EtherType filters
+ - Locations 32 - 39 for L3/L4 5-tuple filters (locations 32, 36 for IPv6)
+
+ The L3/L4 5-tuple (protocol, source and destination IP address, source and
+ destination TCP/UDP/SCTP port) is compared against 8 filters. For IPv4, up to
+ 8 source and destination addresses can be matched. For IPv6, up to 2 pairs of
+ addresses can be supported. Source and destination ports are only compared for
+ TCP/UDP/SCTP packets.
+
+ To add a filter that directs packet to queue 5, use
+ ``<-N|-U|--config-nfc|--config-ntuple>`` switch::
+
+ ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type udp4 src-ip 10.0.0.1 dst-ip 10.0.0.2 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 action 5 <loc 32>
+
+ - action is the queue number.
+ - loc is the rule number.
+
+ For ``flow-type ip4|udp4|tcp4|sctp4|ip6|udp6|tcp6|sctp6`` you must set the loc
+ number within 32 - 39.
+ For ``flow-type ip4|udp4|tcp4|sctp4|ip6|udp6|tcp6|sctp6`` you can set 8 rules
+ for traffic IPv4 or you can set 2 rules for traffic IPv6. Loc number traffic
+ IPv6 is 32 and 36.
+ At the moment you can not use IPv4 and IPv6 filters at the same time.
+
+ Example filter for IPv6 filter traffic::
+
+ sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type tcp6 src-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::1 dst-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::2 action 1 loc 32
+ sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ip6 src-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::2 dst-ip 2001:db8:0:f101::5 action -1 loc 36
+
+ Example filter for IPv4 filter traffic::
+
+ sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type udp4 src-ip 10.0.0.4 dst-ip 10.0.0.7 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 loc 32
+ sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type tcp4 src-ip 10.0.0.3 dst-ip 10.0.0.9 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 loc 33
+ sudo ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ip4 src-ip 10.0.0.6 dst-ip 10.0.0.4 loc 34
+
+ If you set action -1, then all traffic corresponding to the filter will be discarded.
+
+ The maximum value action is 31.
+
+
+ The VLAN filter (VLAN id) is compared against 16 filters.
+ VLAN id must be accompanied by mask 0xF000. That is to distinguish VLAN filter
+ from L2 Ethertype filter with UserPriority since both User Priority and VLAN ID
+ are passed in the same 'vlan' parameter.
+
+ To add a filter that directs packets from VLAN 2001 to queue 5::
+
+ ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ip4 vlan 2001 m 0xF000 action 1 loc 0
+
+
+ L2 EtherType filters allows filter packet by EtherType field or both EtherType
+ and User Priority (PCP) field of 802.1Q.
+ UserPriority (vlan) parameter must be accompanied by mask 0x1FFF. That is to
+ distinguish VLAN filter from L2 Ethertype filter with UserPriority since both
+ User Priority and VLAN ID are passed in the same 'vlan' parameter.
+
+ To add a filter that directs IP4 packess of priority 3 to queue 3::
+
+ ethtool -N <ethX> flow-type ether proto 0x800 vlan 0x600 m 0x1FFF action 3 loc 16
+
+ To see the list of filters currently present::
+
+ ethtool <-u|-n|--show-nfc|--show-ntuple> <ethX>
+
+ Rules may be deleted from the table itself. This is done using::
+
+ sudo ethtool <-N|-U|--config-nfc|--config-ntuple> <ethX> delete <loc>
+
+ - loc is the rule number to be deleted.
+
+ Rx filters is an interface to load the filter table that funnels all flow
+ into queue 0 unless an alternative queue is specified using "action". In that
+ case, any flow that matches the filter criteria will be directed to the
+ appropriate queue. RX filters is supported on all kernels 2.6.30 and later.
+
+RSS for UDP
+-----------
+
+ Currently, NIC does not support RSS for fragmented IP packets, which leads to
+ incorrect working of RSS for fragmented UDP traffic. To disable RSS for UDP the
+ RX Flow L3/L4 rule may be used.
+
+ Example::
+
+ ethtool -N eth0 flow-type udp4 action 0 loc 32
+
+UDP GSO hardware offload
+------------------------
+
+ UDP GSO allows to boost UDP tx rates by offloading UDP headers allocation
+ into hardware. A special userspace socket option is required for this,
+ could be validated with /kernel/tools/testing/selftests/net/::
+
+ udpgso_bench_tx -u -4 -D 10.0.1.1 -s 6300 -S 100
+
+ Will cause sending out of 100 byte sized UDP packets formed from single
+ 6300 bytes user buffer.
+
+ UDP GSO is configured by::
+
+ ethtool -K eth0 tx-udp-segmentation on
+
+Private flags (testing)
+-----------------------
+
+ Atlantic driver supports private flags for hardware custom features::
+
+ $ ethtool --show-priv-flags ethX
+
+ Private flags for ethX:
+ DMASystemLoopback : off
+ PKTSystemLoopback : off
+ DMANetworkLoopback : off
+ PHYInternalLoopback: off
+ PHYExternalLoopback: off
+
+ Example::
+
+ $ ethtool --set-priv-flags ethX DMASystemLoopback on
+
+ DMASystemLoopback: DMA Host loopback.
+ PKTSystemLoopback: Packet buffer host loopback.
+ DMANetworkLoopback: Network side loopback on DMA block.
+ PHYInternalLoopback: Internal loopback on Phy.
+ PHYExternalLoopback: External loopback on Phy (with loopback ethernet cable).
+
+
+Command Line Parameters
+=======================
+The following command line parameters are available on atlantic driver:
+
+aq_itr -Interrupt throttling mode
+---------------------------------
+Accepted values: 0, 1, 0xFFFF
+
+Default value: 0xFFFF
+
+====== ==============================================================
+0 Disable interrupt throttling.
+1 Enable interrupt throttling and use specified tx and rx rates.
+0xFFFF Auto throttling mode. Driver will choose the best RX and TX
+ interrupt throtting settings based on link speed.
+====== ==============================================================
+
+aq_itr_tx - TX interrupt throttle rate
+--------------------------------------
+
+Accepted values: 0 - 0x1FF
+
+Default value: 0
+
+TX side throttling in microseconds. Adapter will setup maximum interrupt delay
+to this value. Minimum interrupt delay will be a half of this value
+
+aq_itr_rx - RX interrupt throttle rate
+--------------------------------------
+
+Accepted values: 0 - 0x1FF
+
+Default value: 0
+
+RX side throttling in microseconds. Adapter will setup maximum interrupt delay
+to this value. Minimum interrupt delay will be a half of this value
+
+.. note::
+
+ ITR settings could be changed in runtime by ethtool -c means (see below)
+
+Config file parameters
+======================
+
+For some fine tuning and performance optimizations,
+some parameters can be changed in the {source_dir}/aq_cfg.h file.
+
+AQ_CFG_RX_PAGEORDER
+-------------------
+
+Default value: 0
+
+RX page order override. Thats a power of 2 number of RX pages allocated for
+each descriptor. Received descriptor size is still limited by
+AQ_CFG_RX_FRAME_MAX.
+
+Increasing pageorder makes page reuse better (actual on iommu enabled systems).
+
+AQ_CFG_RX_REFILL_THRES
+----------------------
+
+Default value: 32
+
+RX refill threshold. RX path will not refill freed descriptors until the
+specified number of free descriptors is observed. Larger values may help
+better page reuse but may lead to packet drops as well.
+
+AQ_CFG_VECS_DEF
+---------------
+
+Number of queues
+
+Valid Range: 0 - 8 (up to AQ_CFG_VECS_MAX)
+
+Default value: 8
+
+Notice this value will be capped by the number of cores available on the system.
+
+AQ_CFG_IS_RSS_DEF
+-----------------
+
+Enable/disable Receive Side Scaling
+
+This feature allows the adapter to distribute receive processing
+across multiple CPU-cores and to prevent from overloading a single CPU core.
+
+Valid values
+
+== ========
+0 disabled
+1 enabled
+== ========
+
+Default value: 1
+
+AQ_CFG_NUM_RSS_QUEUES_DEF
+-------------------------
+
+Number of queues for Receive Side Scaling
+
+Valid Range: 0 - 8 (up to AQ_CFG_VECS_DEF)
+
+Default value: AQ_CFG_VECS_DEF
+
+AQ_CFG_IS_LRO_DEF
+-----------------
+
+Enable/disable Large Receive Offload
+
+This offload enables the adapter to coalesce multiple TCP segments and indicate
+them as a single coalesced unit to the OS networking subsystem.
+
+The system consumes less energy but it also introduces more latency in packets
+processing.
+
+Valid values
+
+== ========
+0 disabled
+1 enabled
+== ========
+
+Default value: 1
+
+AQ_CFG_TX_CLEAN_BUDGET
+----------------------
+
+Maximum descriptors to cleanup on TX at once.
+
+Default value: 256
+
+After the aq_cfg.h file changed the driver must be rebuilt to take effect.
+
+Support
+=======
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported
+kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related
+to the issue to aqn_support@marvell.com
+
+License
+=======
+
+aQuantia Corporation Network Driver
+
+Copyright |copy| 2014 - 2019 aQuantia Corporation.
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+under the terms and conditions of the GNU General Public License,
+version 2, as published by the Free Software Foundation.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/chelsio/cxgb.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/chelsio/cxgb.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..435dce5fa
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/chelsio/cxgb.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,393 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+=============================================
+Chelsio N210 10Gb Ethernet Network Controller
+=============================================
+
+Driver Release Notes for Linux
+
+Version 2.1.1
+
+June 20, 2005
+
+.. Contents
+
+ INTRODUCTION
+ FEATURES
+ PERFORMANCE
+ DRIVER MESSAGES
+ KNOWN ISSUES
+ SUPPORT
+
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+ This document describes the Linux driver for Chelsio 10Gb Ethernet Network
+ Controller. This driver supports the Chelsio N210 NIC and is backward
+ compatible with the Chelsio N110 model 10Gb NICs.
+
+
+Features
+========
+
+Adaptive Interrupts (adaptive-rx)
+---------------------------------
+
+ This feature provides an adaptive algorithm that adjusts the interrupt
+ coalescing parameters, allowing the driver to dynamically adapt the latency
+ settings to achieve the highest performance during various types of network
+ load.
+
+ The interface used to control this feature is ethtool. Please see the
+ ethtool manpage for additional usage information.
+
+ By default, adaptive-rx is disabled.
+ To enable adaptive-rx::
+
+ ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx on
+
+ To disable adaptive-rx, use ethtool::
+
+ ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off
+
+ After disabling adaptive-rx, the timer latency value will be set to 50us.
+ You may set the timer latency after disabling adaptive-rx::
+
+ ethtool -C <interface> rx-usecs <microseconds>
+
+ An example to set the timer latency value to 100us on eth0::
+
+ ethtool -C eth0 rx-usecs 100
+
+ You may also provide a timer latency value while disabling adaptive-rx::
+
+ ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off rx-usecs <microseconds>
+
+ If adaptive-rx is disabled and a timer latency value is specified, the timer
+ will be set to the specified value until changed by the user or until
+ adaptive-rx is enabled.
+
+ To view the status of the adaptive-rx and timer latency values::
+
+ ethtool -c <interface>
+
+
+TCP Segmentation Offloading (TSO) Support
+-----------------------------------------
+
+ This feature, also known as "large send", enables a system's protocol stack
+ to offload portions of outbound TCP processing to a network interface card
+ thereby reducing system CPU utilization and enhancing performance.
+
+ The interface used to control this feature is ethtool version 1.8 or higher.
+ Please see the ethtool manpage for additional usage information.
+
+ By default, TSO is enabled.
+ To disable TSO::
+
+ ethtool -K <interface> tso off
+
+ To enable TSO::
+
+ ethtool -K <interface> tso on
+
+ To view the status of TSO::
+
+ ethtool -k <interface>
+
+
+Performance
+===========
+
+ The following information is provided as an example of how to change system
+ parameters for "performance tuning" an what value to use. You may or may not
+ want to change these system parameters, depending on your server/workstation
+ application. Doing so is not warranted in any way by Chelsio Communications,
+ and is done at "YOUR OWN RISK". Chelsio will not be held responsible for loss
+ of data or damage to equipment.
+
+ Your distribution may have a different way of doing things, or you may prefer
+ a different method. These commands are shown only to provide an example of
+ what to do and are by no means definitive.
+
+ Making any of the following system changes will only last until you reboot
+ your system. You may want to write a script that runs at boot-up which
+ includes the optimal settings for your system.
+
+ Setting PCI Latency Timer::
+
+ setpci -d 1425::
+
+* 0x0c.l=0x0000F800
+
+ Disabling TCP timestamp::
+
+ sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_timestamps=0
+
+ Disabling SACK::
+
+ sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_sack=0
+
+ Setting large number of incoming connection requests::
+
+ sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_max_syn_backlog=3000
+
+ Setting maximum receive socket buffer size::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.rmem_max=1024000
+
+ Setting maximum send socket buffer size::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.wmem_max=1024000
+
+ Set smp_affinity (on a multiprocessor system) to a single CPU::
+
+ echo 1 > /proc/irq/<interrupt_number>/smp_affinity
+
+ Setting default receive socket buffer size::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.rmem_default=524287
+
+ Setting default send socket buffer size::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.wmem_default=524287
+
+ Setting maximum option memory buffers::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.optmem_max=524287
+
+ Setting maximum backlog (# of unprocessed packets before kernel drops)::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.netdev_max_backlog=300000
+
+ Setting TCP read buffers (min/default/max)::
+
+ sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="10000000 10000000 10000000"
+
+ Setting TCP write buffers (min/pressure/max)::
+
+ sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="10000000 10000000 10000000"
+
+ Setting TCP buffer space (min/pressure/max)::
+
+ sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_mem="10000000 10000000 10000000"
+
+ TCP window size for single connections:
+
+ The receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size must be at least as large as the
+ Bandwidth-Delay Product of the communication link between the sender and
+ receiver. Due to the variations of RTT, you may want to increase the buffer
+ size up to 2 times the Bandwidth-Delay Product. Reference page 289 of
+ "TCP/IP Illustrated, Volume 1, The Protocols" by W. Richard Stevens.
+
+ At 10Gb speeds, use the following formula::
+
+ RX_WINDOW >= 1.25MBytes * RTT(in milliseconds)
+ Example for RTT with 100us: RX_WINDOW = (1,250,000 * 0.1) = 125,000
+
+ RX_WINDOW sizes of 256KB - 512KB should be sufficient.
+
+ Setting the min, max, and default receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size::
+
+ sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="<min> <default> <max>"
+
+ TCP window size for multiple connections:
+ The receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size may be calculated the same as single
+ connections, but should be divided by the number of connections. The
+ smaller window prevents congestion and facilitates better pacing,
+ especially if/when MAC level flow control does not work well or when it is
+ not supported on the machine. Experimentation may be necessary to attain
+ the correct value. This method is provided as a starting point for the
+ correct receive buffer size.
+
+ Setting the min, max, and default receive buffer (RX_WINDOW) size is
+ performed in the same manner as single connection.
+
+
+Driver Messages
+===============
+
+ The following messages are the most common messages logged by syslog. These
+ may be found in /var/log/messages.
+
+ Driver up::
+
+ Chelsio Network Driver - version 2.1.1
+
+ NIC detected::
+
+ eth#: Chelsio N210 1x10GBaseX NIC (rev #), PCIX 133MHz/64-bit
+
+ Link up::
+
+ eth#: link is up at 10 Gbps, full duplex
+
+ Link down::
+
+ eth#: link is down
+
+
+Known Issues
+============
+
+ These issues have been identified during testing. The following information
+ is provided as a workaround to the problem. In some cases, this problem is
+ inherent to Linux or to a particular Linux Distribution and/or hardware
+ platform.
+
+ 1. Large number of TCP retransmits on a multiprocessor (SMP) system.
+
+ On a system with multiple CPUs, the interrupt (IRQ) for the network
+ controller may be bound to more than one CPU. This will cause TCP
+ retransmits if the packet data were to be split across different CPUs
+ and re-assembled in a different order than expected.
+
+ To eliminate the TCP retransmits, set smp_affinity on the particular
+ interrupt to a single CPU. You can locate the interrupt (IRQ) used on
+ the N110/N210 by using ifconfig::
+
+ ifconfig <dev_name> | grep Interrupt
+
+ Set the smp_affinity to a single CPU::
+
+ echo 1 > /proc/irq/<interrupt_number>/smp_affinity
+
+ It is highly suggested that you do not run the irqbalance daemon on your
+ system, as this will change any smp_affinity setting you have applied.
+ The irqbalance daemon runs on a 10 second interval and binds interrupts
+ to the least loaded CPU determined by the daemon. To disable this daemon::
+
+ chkconfig --level 2345 irqbalance off
+
+ By default, some Linux distributions enable the kernel feature,
+ irqbalance, which performs the same function as the daemon. To disable
+ this feature, add the following line to your bootloader::
+
+ noirqbalance
+
+ Example using the Grub bootloader::
+
+ title Red Hat Enterprise Linux AS (2.4.21-27.ELsmp)
+ root (hd0,0)
+ kernel /vmlinuz-2.4.21-27.ELsmp ro root=/dev/hda3 noirqbalance
+ initrd /initrd-2.4.21-27.ELsmp.img
+
+ 2. After running insmod, the driver is loaded and the incorrect network
+ interface is brought up without running ifup.
+
+ When using 2.4.x kernels, including RHEL kernels, the Linux kernel
+ invokes a script named "hotplug". This script is primarily used to
+ automatically bring up USB devices when they are plugged in, however,
+ the script also attempts to automatically bring up a network interface
+ after loading the kernel module. The hotplug script does this by scanning
+ the ifcfg-eth# config files in /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts, looking
+ for HWADDR=<mac_address>.
+
+ If the hotplug script does not find the HWADDRR within any of the
+ ifcfg-eth# files, it will bring up the device with the next available
+ interface name. If this interface is already configured for a different
+ network card, your new interface will have incorrect IP address and
+ network settings.
+
+ To solve this issue, you can add the HWADDR=<mac_address> key to the
+ interface config file of your network controller.
+
+ To disable this "hotplug" feature, you may add the driver (module name)
+ to the "blacklist" file located in /etc/hotplug. It has been noted that
+ this does not work for network devices because the net.agent script
+ does not use the blacklist file. Simply remove, or rename, the net.agent
+ script located in /etc/hotplug to disable this feature.
+
+ 3. Transport Protocol (TP) hangs when running heavy multi-connection traffic
+ on an AMD Opteron system with HyperTransport PCI-X Tunnel chipset.
+
+ If your AMD Opteron system uses the AMD-8131 HyperTransport PCI-X Tunnel
+ chipset, you may experience the "133-Mhz Mode Split Completion Data
+ Corruption" bug identified by AMD while using a 133Mhz PCI-X card on the
+ bus PCI-X bus.
+
+ AMD states, "Under highly specific conditions, the AMD-8131 PCI-X Tunnel
+ can provide stale data via split completion cycles to a PCI-X card that
+ is operating at 133 Mhz", causing data corruption.
+
+ AMD's provides three workarounds for this problem, however, Chelsio
+ recommends the first option for best performance with this bug:
+
+ For 133Mhz secondary bus operation, limit the transaction length and
+ the number of outstanding transactions, via BIOS configuration
+ programming of the PCI-X card, to the following:
+
+ Data Length (bytes): 1k
+
+ Total allowed outstanding transactions: 2
+
+ Please refer to AMD 8131-HT/PCI-X Errata 26310 Rev 3.08 August 2004,
+ section 56, "133-MHz Mode Split Completion Data Corruption" for more
+ details with this bug and workarounds suggested by AMD.
+
+ It may be possible to work outside AMD's recommended PCI-X settings, try
+ increasing the Data Length to 2k bytes for increased performance. If you
+ have issues with these settings, please revert to the "safe" settings
+ and duplicate the problem before submitting a bug or asking for support.
+
+ .. note::
+
+ The default setting on most systems is 8 outstanding transactions
+ and 2k bytes data length.
+
+ 4. On multiprocessor systems, it has been noted that an application which
+ is handling 10Gb networking can switch between CPUs causing degraded
+ and/or unstable performance.
+
+ If running on an SMP system and taking performance measurements, it
+ is suggested you either run the latest netperf-2.4.0+ or use a binding
+ tool such as Tim Hockin's procstate utilities (runon)
+ <http://www.hockin.org/~thockin/procstate/>.
+
+ Binding netserver and netperf (or other applications) to particular
+ CPUs will have a significant difference in performance measurements.
+ You may need to experiment which CPU to bind the application to in
+ order to achieve the best performance for your system.
+
+ If you are developing an application designed for 10Gb networking,
+ please keep in mind you may want to look at kernel functions
+ sched_setaffinity & sched_getaffinity to bind your application.
+
+ If you are just running user-space applications such as ftp, telnet,
+ etc., you may want to try the runon tool provided by Tim Hockin's
+ procstate utility. You could also try binding the interface to a
+ particular CPU: runon 0 ifup eth0
+
+
+Support
+=======
+
+ If you have problems with the software or hardware, please contact our
+ customer support team via email at support@chelsio.com or check our website
+ at http://www.chelsio.com
+
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+::
+
+ Chelsio Communications
+ 370 San Aleso Ave.
+ Suite 100
+ Sunnyvale, CA 94085
+ http://www.chelsio.com
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+it under the terms of the GNU General Public License, version 2, as
+published by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along
+with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc.,
+59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED ``AS IS`` AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
+WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
+MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+Copyright |copy| 2003-2005 Chelsio Communications. All rights reserved.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/cirrus/cs89x0.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/cirrus/cs89x0.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e5c283940
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/cirrus/cs89x0.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,647 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+================================================
+Cirrus Logic LAN CS8900/CS8920 Ethernet Adapters
+================================================
+
+.. note::
+
+ This document was contributed by Cirrus Logic for kernel 2.2.5. This version
+ has been updated for 2.3.48 by Andrew Morton.
+
+ Still, this is too outdated! A major cleanup is needed here.
+
+Cirrus make a copy of this driver available at their website, as
+described below. In general, you should use the driver version which
+comes with your Linux distribution.
+
+
+Linux Network Interface Driver ver. 2.00 <kernel 2.3.48>
+
+
+.. TABLE OF CONTENTS
+
+ 1.0 CIRRUS LOGIC LAN CS8900/CS8920 ETHERNET ADAPTERS
+ 1.1 Product Overview
+ 1.2 Driver Description
+ 1.2.1 Driver Name
+ 1.2.2 File in the Driver Package
+ 1.3 System Requirements
+ 1.4 Licensing Information
+
+ 2.0 ADAPTER INSTALLATION and CONFIGURATION
+ 2.1 CS8900-based Adapter Configuration
+ 2.2 CS8920-based Adapter Configuration
+
+ 3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE
+
+ 4.0 COMPILING THE DRIVER
+ 4.1 Compiling the Driver as a Loadable Module
+ 4.2 Compiling the driver to support memory mode
+ 4.3 Compiling the driver to support Rx DMA
+
+ 5.0 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
+ 5.1 Known Defects and Limitations
+ 5.2 Testing the Adapter
+ 5.2.1 Diagnostic Self-Test
+ 5.2.2 Diagnostic Network Test
+ 5.3 Using the Adapter's LEDs
+ 5.4 Resolving I/O Conflicts
+
+ 6.0 TECHNICAL SUPPORT
+ 6.1 Contacting Cirrus Logic's Technical Support
+ 6.2 Information Required Before Contacting Technical Support
+ 6.3 Obtaining the Latest Driver Version
+ 6.4 Current maintainer
+ 6.5 Kernel boot parameters
+
+
+1. Cirrus Logic LAN CS8900/CS8920 Ethernet Adapters
+===================================================
+
+
+1.1. Product Overview
+=====================
+
+The CS8900-based ISA Ethernet Adapters from Cirrus Logic follow
+IEEE 802.3 standards and support half or full-duplex operation in ISA bus
+computers on 10 Mbps Ethernet networks. The adapters are designed for operation
+in 16-bit ISA or EISA bus expansion slots and are available in
+10BaseT-only or 3-media configurations (10BaseT, 10Base2, and AUI for 10Base-5
+or fiber networks).
+
+CS8920-based adapters are similar to the CS8900-based adapter with additional
+features for Plug and Play (PnP) support and Wakeup Frame recognition. As
+such, the configuration procedures differ somewhat between the two types of
+adapters. Refer to the "Adapter Configuration" section for details on
+configuring both types of adapters.
+
+
+1.2. Driver Description
+=======================
+
+The CS8900/CS8920 Ethernet Adapter driver for Linux supports the Linux
+v2.3.48 or greater kernel. It can be compiled directly into the kernel
+or loaded at run-time as a device driver module.
+
+1.2.1 Driver Name: cs89x0
+
+1.2.2 Files in the Driver Archive:
+
+The files in the driver at Cirrus' website include:
+
+ =================== ====================================================
+ readme.txt this file
+ build batch file to compile cs89x0.c.
+ cs89x0.c driver C code
+ cs89x0.h driver header file
+ cs89x0.o pre-compiled module (for v2.2.5 kernel)
+ config/Config.in sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel.
+ config/Makefile sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel.
+ config/Space.c sample file to include cs89x0 driver in the kernel.
+ =================== ====================================================
+
+
+
+1.3. System Requirements
+------------------------
+
+The following hardware is required:
+
+ * Cirrus Logic LAN (CS8900/20-based) Ethernet ISA Adapter
+
+ * IBM or IBM-compatible PC with:
+ * An 80386 or higher processor
+ * 16 bytes of contiguous IO space available between 210h - 370h
+ * One available IRQ (5,10,11,or 12 for the CS8900, 3-7,9-15 for CS8920).
+
+ * Appropriate cable (and connector for AUI, 10BASE-2) for your network
+ topology.
+
+The following software is required:
+
+* LINUX kernel version 2.3.48 or higher
+
+ * CS8900/20 Setup Utility (DOS-based)
+
+ * LINUX kernel sources for your kernel (if compiling into kernel)
+
+ * GNU Toolkit (gcc and make) v2.6 or above (if compiling into kernel
+ or a module)
+
+
+
+1.4. Licensing Information
+--------------------------
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under
+the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
+Foundation, version 1.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
+ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for
+more details.
+
+For a full copy of the GNU General Public License, write to the Free Software
+Foundation, Inc., 675 Mass Ave, Cambridge, MA 02139, USA.
+
+
+
+2. Adapter Installation and Configuration
+=========================================
+
+Both the CS8900 and CS8920-based adapters can be configured using parameters
+stored in an on-board EEPROM. You must use the DOS-based CS8900/20 Setup
+Utility if you want to change the adapter's configuration in EEPROM.
+
+When loading the driver as a module, you can specify many of the adapter's
+configuration parameters on the command-line to override the EEPROM's settings
+or for interface configuration when an EEPROM is not used. (CS8920-based
+adapters must use an EEPROM.) See Section 3.0 LOADING THE DRIVER AS A MODULE.
+
+Since the CS8900/20 Setup Utility is a DOS-based application, you must install
+and configure the adapter in a DOS-based system using the CS8900/20 Setup
+Utility before installation in the target LINUX system. (Not required if
+installing a CS8900-based adapter and the default configuration is acceptable.)
+
+
+2.1. CS8900-based Adapter Configuration
+---------------------------------------
+
+CS8900-based adapters shipped from Cirrus Logic have been configured
+with the following "default" settings::
+
+ Operation Mode: Memory Mode
+ IRQ: 10
+ Base I/O Address: 300
+ Memory Base Address: D0000
+ Optimization: DOS Client
+ Transmission Mode: Half-duplex
+ BootProm: None
+ Media Type: Autodetect (3-media cards) or
+ 10BASE-T (10BASE-T only adapter)
+
+You should only change the default configuration settings if conflicts with
+another adapter exists. To change the adapter's configuration, run the
+CS8900/20 Setup Utility.
+
+
+2.2. CS8920-based Adapter Configuration
+---------------------------------------
+
+CS8920-based adapters are shipped from Cirrus Logic configured as Plug
+and Play (PnP) enabled. However, since the cs89x0 driver does NOT
+support PnP, you must install the CS8920 adapter in a DOS-based PC and
+run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility to disable PnP and configure the
+adapter before installation in the target Linux system. Failure to do
+this will leave the adapter inactive and the driver will be unable to
+communicate with the adapter.
+
+::
+
+ ****************************************************************
+ * CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS: *
+ * *
+ * CS8920-BASED ADAPTERS ARE PLUG and PLAY ENABLED BY DEFAULT. *
+ * THE CS89X0 DRIVER DOES NOT SUPPORT PnP. THEREFORE, YOU MUST *
+ * RUN THE CS8900/20 SETUP UTILITY TO DISABLE PnP SUPPORT AND *
+ * TO ACTIVATE THE ADAPTER. *
+ ****************************************************************
+
+
+
+
+3. Loading the Driver as a Module
+=================================
+
+If the driver is compiled as a loadable module, you can load the driver module
+with the 'modprobe' command. Many of the adapter's configuration parameters can
+be specified as command-line arguments to the load command. This facility
+provides a means to override the EEPROM's settings or for interface
+configuration when an EEPROM is not used.
+
+Example::
+
+ insmod cs89x0.o io=0x200 irq=0xA media=aui
+
+This example loads the module and configures the adapter to use an IO port base
+address of 200h, interrupt 10, and use the AUI media connection. The following
+configuration options are available on the command line::
+
+ io=### - specify IO address (200h-360h)
+ irq=## - specify interrupt level
+ use_dma=1 - Enable DMA
+ dma=# - specify dma channel (Driver is compiled to support
+ Rx DMA only)
+ dmasize=# (16 or 64) - DMA size 16K or 64K. Default value is set to 16.
+ media=rj45 - specify media type
+ or media=bnc
+ or media=aui
+ or media=auto
+ duplex=full - specify forced half/full/autonegotiate duplex
+ or duplex=half
+ or duplex=auto
+ debug=# - debug level (only available if the driver was compiled
+ for debugging)
+
+**Notes:**
+
+a) If an EEPROM is present, any specified command-line parameter
+ will override the corresponding configuration value stored in
+ EEPROM.
+
+b) The "io" parameter must be specified on the command-line.
+
+c) The driver's hardware probe routine is designed to avoid
+ writing to I/O space until it knows that there is a cs89x0
+ card at the written addresses. This could cause problems
+ with device probing. To avoid this behaviour, add one
+ to the ``io=`` module parameter. This doesn't actually change
+ the I/O address, but it is a flag to tell the driver
+ to partially initialise the hardware before trying to
+ identify the card. This could be dangerous if you are
+ not sure that there is a cs89x0 card at the provided address.
+
+ For example, to scan for an adapter located at IO base 0x300,
+ specify an IO address of 0x301.
+
+d) The "duplex=auto" parameter is only supported for the CS8920.
+
+e) The minimum command-line configuration required if an EEPROM is
+ not present is:
+
+ io
+ irq
+ media type (no autodetect)
+
+f) The following additional parameters are CS89XX defaults (values
+ used with no EEPROM or command-line argument).
+
+ * DMA Burst = enabled
+ * IOCHRDY Enabled = enabled
+ * UseSA = enabled
+ * CS8900 defaults to half-duplex if not specified on command-line
+ * CS8920 defaults to autoneg if not specified on command-line
+ * Use reset defaults for other config parameters
+ * dma_mode = 0
+
+g) You can use ifconfig to set the adapter's Ethernet address.
+
+h) Many Linux distributions use the 'modprobe' command to load
+ modules. This program uses the '/etc/conf.modules' file to
+ determine configuration information which is passed to a driver
+ module when it is loaded. All the configuration options which are
+ described above may be placed within /etc/conf.modules.
+
+ For example::
+
+ > cat /etc/conf.modules
+ ...
+ alias eth0 cs89x0
+ options cs89x0 io=0x0200 dma=5 use_dma=1
+ ...
+
+ In this example we are telling the module system that the
+ ethernet driver for this machine should use the cs89x0 driver. We
+ are asking 'modprobe' to pass the 'io', 'dma' and 'use_dma'
+ arguments to the driver when it is loaded.
+
+i) Cirrus recommend that the cs89x0 use the ISA DMA channels 5, 6 or
+ 7. You will probably find that other DMA channels will not work.
+
+j) The cs89x0 supports DMA for receiving only. DMA mode is
+ significantly more efficient. Flooding a 400 MHz Celeron machine
+ with large ping packets consumes 82% of its CPU capacity in non-DMA
+ mode. With DMA this is reduced to 45%.
+
+k) If your Linux kernel was compiled with inbuilt plug-and-play
+ support you will be able to find information about the cs89x0 card
+ with the command::
+
+ cat /proc/isapnp
+
+l) If during DMA operation you find erratic behavior or network data
+ corruption you should use your PC's BIOS to slow the EISA bus clock.
+
+m) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel
+ (non-modular) then its I/O address is automatically determined by
+ ISA bus probing. The IRQ number, media options, etc are determined
+ from the card's EEPROM.
+
+n) If the cs89x0 driver is compiled directly into the kernel, DMA
+ mode may be selected by providing the kernel with a boot option
+ 'cs89x0_dma=N' where 'N' is the desired DMA channel number (5, 6 or 7).
+
+ Kernel boot options may be provided on the LILO command line::
+
+ LILO boot: linux cs89x0_dma=5
+
+ or they may be placed in /etc/lilo.conf::
+
+ image=/boot/bzImage-2.3.48
+ append="cs89x0_dma=5"
+ label=linux
+ root=/dev/hda5
+ read-only
+
+ The DMA Rx buffer size is hardwired to 16 kbytes in this mode.
+ (64k mode is not available).
+
+
+4. Compiling the Driver
+=======================
+
+The cs89x0 driver can be compiled directly into the kernel or compiled into
+a loadable device driver module.
+
+Just use the standard way to configure the driver and compile the Kernel.
+
+
+4.1. Compiling the Driver to Support Rx DMA
+-------------------------------------------
+
+The compile-time optionality for DMA was removed in the 2.3 kernel
+series. DMA support is now unconditionally part of the driver. It is
+enabled by the 'use_dma=1' module option.
+
+
+5. Testing and Troubleshooting
+==============================
+
+5.1. Known Defects and Limitations
+----------------------------------
+
+Refer to the RELEASE.TXT file distributed as part of this archive for a list of
+known defects, driver limitations, and work arounds.
+
+
+5.2. Testing the Adapter
+------------------------
+
+Once the adapter has been installed and configured, the diagnostic option of
+the CS8900/20 Setup Utility can be used to test the functionality of the
+adapter and its network connection. Use the diagnostics 'Self Test' option to
+test the functionality of the adapter with the hardware configuration you have
+assigned. You can use the diagnostics 'Network Test' to test the ability of the
+adapter to communicate across the Ethernet with another PC equipped with a
+CS8900/20-based adapter card (it must also be running the CS8900/20 Setup
+Utility).
+
+.. note::
+
+ The Setup Utility's diagnostics are designed to run in a
+ DOS-only operating system environment. DO NOT run the diagnostics
+ from a DOS or command prompt session under Windows 95, Windows NT,
+ OS/2, or other operating system.
+
+To run the diagnostics tests on the CS8900/20 adapter:
+
+ 1. Boot DOS on the PC and start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility.
+
+ 2. The adapter's current configuration is displayed. Hit the ENTER key to
+ get to the main menu.
+
+ 4. Select 'Diagnostics' (ALT-G) from the main menu.
+ * Select 'Self-Test' to test the adapter's basic functionality.
+ * Select 'Network Test' to test the network connection and cabling.
+
+
+5.2.1. Diagnostic Self-test
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+The diagnostic self-test checks the adapter's basic functionality as well as
+its ability to communicate across the ISA bus based on the system resources
+assigned during hardware configuration. The following tests are performed:
+
+ * IO Register Read/Write Test
+
+ The IO Register Read/Write test insures that the CS8900/20 can be
+ accessed in IO mode, and that the IO base address is correct.
+
+ * Shared Memory Test
+
+ The Shared Memory test insures the CS8900/20 can be accessed in memory
+ mode and that the range of memory addresses assigned does not conflict
+ with other devices in the system.
+
+ * Interrupt Test
+
+ The Interrupt test insures there are no conflicts with the assigned IRQ
+ signal.
+
+ * EEPROM Test
+
+ The EEPROM test insures the EEPROM can be read.
+
+ * Chip RAM Test
+
+ The Chip RAM test insures the 4K of memory internal to the CS8900/20 is
+ working properly.
+
+ * Internal Loop-back Test
+
+ The Internal Loop Back test insures the adapter's transmitter and
+ receiver are operating properly. If this test fails, make sure the
+ adapter's cable is connected to the network (check for LED activity for
+ example).
+
+ * Boot PROM Test
+
+ The Boot PROM test insures the Boot PROM is present, and can be read.
+ Failure indicates the Boot PROM was not successfully read due to a
+ hardware problem or due to a conflicts on the Boot PROM address
+ assignment. (Test only applies if the adapter is configured to use the
+ Boot PROM option.)
+
+Failure of a test item indicates a possible system resource conflict with
+another device on the ISA bus. In this case, you should use the Manual Setup
+option to reconfigure the adapter by selecting a different value for the system
+resource that failed.
+
+
+5.2.2. Diagnostic Network Test
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+The Diagnostic Network Test verifies a working network connection by
+transferring data between two CS8900/20 adapters installed in different PCs
+on the same network. (Note: the diagnostic network test should not be run
+between two nodes across a router.)
+
+This test requires that each of the two PCs have a CS8900/20-based adapter
+installed and have the CS8900/20 Setup Utility running. The first PC is
+configured as a Responder and the other PC is configured as an Initiator.
+Once the Initiator is started, it sends data frames to the Responder which
+returns the frames to the Initiator.
+
+The total number of frames received and transmitted are displayed on the
+Initiator's display, along with a count of the number of frames received and
+transmitted OK or in error. The test can be terminated anytime by the user at
+either PC.
+
+To setup the Diagnostic Network Test:
+
+ 1. Select a PC with a CS8900/20-based adapter and a known working network
+ connection to act as the Responder. Run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility
+ and select 'Diagnostics -> Network Test -> Responder' from the main
+ menu. Hit ENTER to start the Responder.
+
+ 2. Return to the PC with the CS8900/20-based adapter you want to test and
+ start the CS8900/20 Setup Utility.
+
+ 3. From the main menu, Select 'Diagnostic -> Network Test -> Initiator'.
+ Hit ENTER to start the test.
+
+You may stop the test on the Initiator at any time while allowing the Responder
+to continue running. In this manner, you can move to additional PCs and test
+them by starting the Initiator on another PC without having to stop/start the
+Responder.
+
+
+
+5.3. Using the Adapter's LEDs
+-----------------------------
+
+The 2 and 3-media adapters have two LEDs visible on the back end of the board
+located near the 10Base-T connector.
+
+Link Integrity LED: A "steady" ON of the green LED indicates a valid 10Base-T
+connection. (Only applies to 10Base-T. The green LED has no significance for
+a 10Base-2 or AUI connection.)
+
+TX/RX LED: The yellow LED lights briefly each time the adapter transmits or
+receives data. (The yellow LED will appear to "flicker" on a typical network.)
+
+
+5.4. Resolving I/O Conflicts
+----------------------------
+
+An IO conflict occurs when two or more adapter use the same ISA resource (IO
+address, memory address or IRQ). You can usually detect an IO conflict in one
+of four ways after installing and or configuring the CS8900/20-based adapter:
+
+ 1. The system does not boot properly (or at all).
+
+ 2. The driver cannot communicate with the adapter, reporting an "Adapter
+ not found" error message.
+
+ 3. You cannot connect to the network or the driver will not load.
+
+ 4. If you have configured the adapter to run in memory mode but the driver
+ reports it is using IO mode when loading, this is an indication of a
+ memory address conflict.
+
+If an IO conflict occurs, run the CS8900/20 Setup Utility and perform a
+diagnostic self-test. Normally, the ISA resource in conflict will fail the
+self-test. If so, reconfigure the adapter selecting another choice for the
+resource in conflict. Run the diagnostics again to check for further IO
+conflicts.
+
+In some cases, such as when the PC will not boot, it may be necessary to remove
+the adapter and reconfigure it by installing it in another PC to run the
+CS8900/20 Setup Utility. Once reinstalled in the target system, run the
+diagnostics self-test to ensure the new configuration is free of conflicts
+before loading the driver again.
+
+When manually configuring the adapter, keep in mind the typical ISA system
+resource usage as indicated in the tables below.
+
+::
+
+ I/O Address Device IRQ Device
+ ----------- -------- --- --------
+ 200-20F Game I/O adapter 3 COM2, Bus Mouse
+ 230-23F Bus Mouse 4 COM1
+ 270-27F LPT3: third parallel port 5 LPT2
+ 2F0-2FF COM2: second serial port 6 Floppy Disk controller
+ 320-32F Fixed disk controller 7 LPT1
+ 8 Real-time Clock
+ 9 EGA/VGA display adapter
+ 12 Mouse (PS/2)
+ Memory Address Device 13 Math Coprocessor
+ -------------- --------------------- 14 Hard Disk controller
+ A000-BFFF EGA Graphics Adapter
+ A000-C7FF VGA Graphics Adapter
+ B000-BFFF Mono Graphics Adapter
+ B800-BFFF Color Graphics Adapter
+ E000-FFFF AT BIOS
+
+
+
+
+6. Technical Support
+====================
+
+6.1. Contacting Cirrus Logic's Technical Support
+------------------------------------------------
+
+Cirrus Logic's CS89XX Technical Application Support can be reached at::
+
+ Telephone :(800) 888-5016 (from inside U.S. and Canada)
+ :(512) 442-7555 (from outside the U.S. and Canada)
+ Fax :(512) 912-3871
+ Email :ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com
+ WWW :http://www.cirrus.com
+
+
+6.2. Information Required before Contacting Technical Support
+-------------------------------------------------------------
+
+Before contacting Cirrus Logic for technical support, be prepared to provide as
+Much of the following information as possible.
+
+1.) Adapter type (CRD8900, CDB8900, CDB8920, etc.)
+
+2.) Adapter configuration
+
+ * IO Base, Memory Base, IO or memory mode enabled, IRQ, DMA channel
+ * Plug and Play enabled/disabled (CS8920-based adapters only)
+ * Configured for media auto-detect or specific media type (which type).
+
+3.) PC System's Configuration
+
+ * Plug and Play system (yes/no)
+ * BIOS (make and version)
+ * System make and model
+ * CPU (type and speed)
+ * System RAM
+ * SCSI Adapter
+
+4.) Software
+
+ * CS89XX driver and version
+ * Your network operating system and version
+ * Your system's OS version
+ * Version of all protocol support files
+
+5.) Any Error Message displayed.
+
+
+
+6.3 Obtaining the Latest Driver Version
+---------------------------------------
+
+You can obtain the latest CS89XX drivers and support software from Cirrus Logic's
+Web site. You can also contact Cirrus Logic's Technical Support (email:
+ethernet@crystal.cirrus.com) and request that you be registered for automatic
+software-update notification.
+
+Cirrus Logic maintains a web page at http://www.cirrus.com with the
+latest drivers and technical publications.
+
+
+6.4. Current maintainer
+-----------------------
+
+In February 2000 the maintenance of this driver was assumed by Andrew
+Morton.
+
+6.5 Kernel module parameters
+----------------------------
+
+For use in embedded environments with no cs89x0 EEPROM, the kernel boot
+parameter ``cs89x0_media=`` has been implemented. Usage is::
+
+ cs89x0_media=rj45 or
+ cs89x0_media=aui or
+ cs89x0_media=bnc
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/davicom/dm9000.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/davicom/dm9000.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d5458da01
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/davicom/dm9000.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====================
+DM9000 Network driver
+=====================
+
+Copyright 2008 Simtec Electronics,
+
+ Ben Dooks <ben@simtec.co.uk> <ben-linux@fluff.org>
+
+
+Introduction
+------------
+
+This file describes how to use the DM9000 platform-device based network driver
+that is contained in the files drivers/net/dm9000.c and drivers/net/dm9000.h.
+
+The driver supports three DM9000 variants, the DM9000E which is the first chip
+supported as well as the newer DM9000A and DM9000B devices. It is currently
+maintained and tested by Ben Dooks, who should be CC: to any patches for this
+driver.
+
+
+Defining the platform device
+----------------------------
+
+The minimum set of resources attached to the platform device are as follows:
+
+ 1) The physical address of the address register
+ 2) The physical address of the data register
+ 3) The IRQ line the device's interrupt pin is connected to.
+
+These resources should be specified in that order, as the ordering of the
+two address regions is important (the driver expects these to be address
+and then data).
+
+An example from arch/arm/mach-s3c2410/mach-bast.c is::
+
+ static struct resource bast_dm9k_resource[] = {
+ [0] = {
+ .start = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000,
+ .end = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 3,
+ .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM,
+ },
+ [1] = {
+ .start = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 0x40,
+ .end = S3C2410_CS5 + BAST_PA_DM9000 + 0x40 + 0x3f,
+ .flags = IORESOURCE_MEM,
+ },
+ [2] = {
+ .start = IRQ_DM9000,
+ .end = IRQ_DM9000,
+ .flags = IORESOURCE_IRQ | IORESOURCE_IRQ_HIGHLEVEL,
+ }
+ };
+
+ static struct platform_device bast_device_dm9k = {
+ .name = "dm9000",
+ .id = 0,
+ .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(bast_dm9k_resource),
+ .resource = bast_dm9k_resource,
+ };
+
+Note the setting of the IRQ trigger flag in bast_dm9k_resource[2].flags,
+as this will generate a warning if it is not present. The trigger from
+the flags field will be passed to request_irq() when registering the IRQ
+handler to ensure that the IRQ is setup correctly.
+
+This shows a typical platform device, without the optional configuration
+platform data supplied. The next example uses the same resources, but adds
+the optional platform data to pass extra configuration data::
+
+ static struct dm9000_plat_data bast_dm9k_platdata = {
+ .flags = DM9000_PLATF_16BITONLY,
+ };
+
+ static struct platform_device bast_device_dm9k = {
+ .name = "dm9000",
+ .id = 0,
+ .num_resources = ARRAY_SIZE(bast_dm9k_resource),
+ .resource = bast_dm9k_resource,
+ .dev = {
+ .platform_data = &bast_dm9k_platdata,
+ }
+ };
+
+The platform data is defined in include/linux/dm9000.h and described below.
+
+
+Platform data
+-------------
+
+Extra platform data for the DM9000 can describe the IO bus width to the
+device, whether or not an external PHY is attached to the device and
+the availability of an external configuration EEPROM.
+
+The flags for the platform data .flags field are as follows:
+
+DM9000_PLATF_8BITONLY
+
+ The IO should be done with 8bit operations.
+
+DM9000_PLATF_16BITONLY
+
+ The IO should be done with 16bit operations.
+
+DM9000_PLATF_32BITONLY
+
+ The IO should be done with 32bit operations.
+
+DM9000_PLATF_EXT_PHY
+
+ The chip is connected to an external PHY.
+
+DM9000_PLATF_NO_EEPROM
+
+ This can be used to signify that the board does not have an
+ EEPROM, or that the EEPROM should be hidden from the user.
+
+DM9000_PLATF_SIMPLE_PHY
+
+ Switch to using the simpler PHY polling method which does not
+ try and read the MII PHY state regularly. This is only available
+ when using the internal PHY. See the section on link state polling
+ for more information.
+
+ The config symbol DM9000_FORCE_SIMPLE_PHY_POLL, Kconfig entry
+ "Force simple NSR based PHY polling" allows this flag to be
+ forced on at build time.
+
+
+PHY Link state polling
+----------------------
+
+The driver keeps track of the link state and informs the network core
+about link (carrier) availability. This is managed by several methods
+depending on the version of the chip and on which PHY is being used.
+
+For the internal PHY, the original (and currently default) method is
+to read the MII state, either when the status changes if we have the
+necessary interrupt support in the chip or every two seconds via a
+periodic timer.
+
+To reduce the overhead for the internal PHY, there is now the option
+of using the DM9000_FORCE_SIMPLE_PHY_POLL config, or DM9000_PLATF_SIMPLE_PHY
+platform data option to read the summary information without the
+expensive MII accesses. This method is faster, but does not print
+as much information.
+
+When using an external PHY, the driver currently has to poll the MII
+link status as there is no method for getting an interrupt on link change.
+
+
+DM9000A / DM9000B
+-----------------
+
+These chips are functionally similar to the DM9000E and are supported easily
+by the same driver. The features are:
+
+ 1) Interrupt on internal PHY state change. This means that the periodic
+ polling of the PHY status may be disabled on these devices when using
+ the internal PHY.
+
+ 2) TCP/UDP checksum offloading, which the driver does not currently support.
+
+
+ethtool
+-------
+
+The driver supports the ethtool interface for access to the driver
+state information, the PHY state and the EEPROM.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dec/de4x5.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dec/de4x5.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e03e9c631
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dec/de4x5.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,189 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===================================
+DEC EtherWORKS Ethernet De4x5 cards
+===================================
+
+ Originally, this driver was written for the Digital Equipment
+ Corporation series of EtherWORKS Ethernet cards:
+
+ - DE425 TP/COAX EISA
+ - DE434 TP PCI
+ - DE435 TP/COAX/AUI PCI
+ - DE450 TP/COAX/AUI PCI
+ - DE500 10/100 PCI Fasternet
+
+ but it will now attempt to support all cards which conform to the
+ Digital Semiconductor SROM Specification. The driver currently
+ recognises the following chips:
+
+ - DC21040 (no SROM)
+ - DC21041[A]
+ - DC21140[A]
+ - DC21142
+ - DC21143
+
+ So far the driver is known to work with the following cards:
+
+ - KINGSTON
+ - Linksys
+ - ZNYX342
+ - SMC8432
+ - SMC9332 (w/new SROM)
+ - ZNYX31[45]
+ - ZNYX346 10/100 4 port (can act as a 10/100 bridge!)
+
+ The driver has been tested on a relatively busy network using the DE425,
+ DE434, DE435 and DE500 cards and benchmarked with 'ttcp': it transferred
+ 16M of data to a DECstation 5000/200 as follows::
+
+ TCP UDP
+ TX RX TX RX
+ DE425 1030k 997k 1170k 1128k
+ DE434 1063k 995k 1170k 1125k
+ DE435 1063k 995k 1170k 1125k
+ DE500 1063k 998k 1170k 1125k in 10Mb/s mode
+
+ All values are typical (in kBytes/sec) from a sample of 4 for each
+ measurement. Their error is +/-20k on a quiet (private) network and also
+ depend on what load the CPU has.
+
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+ The ability to load this driver as a loadable module has been included
+ and used extensively during the driver development (to save those long
+ reboot sequences). Loadable module support under PCI and EISA has been
+ achieved by letting the driver autoprobe as if it were compiled into the
+ kernel. Do make sure you're not sharing interrupts with anything that
+ cannot accommodate interrupt sharing!
+
+ To utilise this ability, you have to do 8 things:
+
+ 0) have a copy of the loadable modules code installed on your system.
+ 1) copy de4x5.c from the /linux/drivers/net directory to your favourite
+ temporary directory.
+ 2) for fixed autoprobes (not recommended), edit the source code near
+ line 5594 to reflect the I/O address you're using, or assign these when
+ loading by::
+
+ insmod de4x5 io=0xghh where g = bus number
+ hh = device number
+
+ .. note::
+
+ autoprobing for modules is now supported by default. You may just
+ use::
+
+ insmod de4x5
+
+ to load all available boards. For a specific board, still use
+ the 'io=?' above.
+ 3) compile de4x5.c, but include -DMODULE in the command line to ensure
+ that the correct bits are compiled (see end of source code).
+ 4) if you are wanting to add a new card, goto 5. Otherwise, recompile a
+ kernel with the de4x5 configuration turned off and reboot.
+ 5) insmod de4x5 [io=0xghh]
+ 6) run the net startup bits for your new eth?? interface(s) manually
+ (usually /etc/rc.inet[12] at boot time).
+ 7) enjoy!
+
+ To unload a module, turn off the associated interface(s)
+ 'ifconfig eth?? down' then 'rmmod de4x5'.
+
+ Automedia detection is included so that in principle you can disconnect
+ from, e.g. TP, reconnect to BNC and things will still work (after a
+ pause while the driver figures out where its media went). My tests
+ using ping showed that it appears to work....
+
+ By default, the driver will now autodetect any DECchip based card.
+ Should you have a need to restrict the driver to DIGITAL only cards, you
+ can compile with a DEC_ONLY define, or if loading as a module, use the
+ 'dec_only=1' parameter.
+
+ I've changed the timing routines to use the kernel timer and scheduling
+ functions so that the hangs and other assorted problems that occurred
+ while autosensing the media should be gone. A bonus for the DC21040
+ auto media sense algorithm is that it can now use one that is more in
+ line with the rest (the DC21040 chip doesn't have a hardware timer).
+ The downside is the 1 'jiffies' (10ms) resolution.
+
+ IEEE 802.3u MII interface code has been added in anticipation that some
+ products may use it in the future.
+
+ The SMC9332 card has a non-compliant SROM which needs fixing - I have
+ patched this driver to detect it because the SROM format used complies
+ to a previous DEC-STD format.
+
+ I have removed the buffer copies needed for receive on Intels. I cannot
+ remove them for Alphas since the Tulip hardware only does longword
+ aligned DMA transfers and the Alphas get alignment traps with non
+ longword aligned data copies (which makes them really slow). No comment.
+
+ I have added SROM decoding routines to make this driver work with any
+ card that supports the Digital Semiconductor SROM spec. This will help
+ all cards running the dc2114x series chips in particular. Cards using
+ the dc2104x chips should run correctly with the basic driver. I'm in
+ debt to <mjacob@feral.com> for the testing and feedback that helped get
+ this feature working. So far we have tested KINGSTON, SMC8432, SMC9332
+ (with the latest SROM complying with the SROM spec V3: their first was
+ broken), ZNYX342 and LinkSys. ZNYX314 (dual 21041 MAC) and ZNYX 315
+ (quad 21041 MAC) cards also appear to work despite their incorrectly
+ wired IRQs.
+
+ I have added a temporary fix for interrupt problems when some SCSI cards
+ share the same interrupt as the DECchip based cards. The problem occurs
+ because the SCSI card wants to grab the interrupt as a fast interrupt
+ (runs the service routine with interrupts turned off) vs. this card
+ which really needs to run the service routine with interrupts turned on.
+ This driver will now add the interrupt service routine as a fast
+ interrupt if it is bounced from the slow interrupt. THIS IS NOT A
+ RECOMMENDED WAY TO RUN THE DRIVER and has been done for a limited time
+ until people sort out their compatibility issues and the kernel
+ interrupt service code is fixed. YOU SHOULD SEPARATE OUT THE FAST
+ INTERRUPT CARDS FROM THE SLOW INTERRUPT CARDS to ensure that they do not
+ run on the same interrupt. PCMCIA/CardBus is another can of worms...
+
+ Finally, I think I have really fixed the module loading problem with
+ more than one DECchip based card. As a side effect, I don't mess with
+ the device structure any more which means that if more than 1 card in
+ 2.0.x is installed (4 in 2.1.x), the user will have to edit
+ linux/drivers/net/Space.c to make room for them. Hence, module loading
+ is the preferred way to use this driver, since it doesn't have this
+ limitation.
+
+ Where SROM media detection is used and full duplex is specified in the
+ SROM, the feature is ignored unless lp->params.fdx is set at compile
+ time OR during a module load (insmod de4x5 args='eth??:fdx' [see
+ below]). This is because there is no way to automatically detect full
+ duplex links except through autonegotiation. When I include the
+ autonegotiation feature in the SROM autoconf code, this detection will
+ occur automatically for that case.
+
+ Command line arguments are now allowed, similar to passing arguments
+ through LILO. This will allow a per adapter board set up of full duplex
+ and media. The only lexical constraints are: the board name (dev->name)
+ appears in the list before its parameters. The list of parameters ends
+ either at the end of the parameter list or with another board name. The
+ following parameters are allowed:
+
+ ========= ===============================================
+ fdx for full duplex
+ autosense to set the media/speed; with the following
+ sub-parameters:
+ TP, TP_NW, BNC, AUI, BNC_AUI, 100Mb, 10Mb, AUTO
+ ========= ===============================================
+
+ Case sensitivity is important for the sub-parameters. They *must* be
+ upper case. Examples::
+
+ insmod de4x5 args='eth1:fdx autosense=BNC eth0:autosense=100Mb'.
+
+ For a compiled in driver, in linux/drivers/net/CONFIG, place e.g.::
+
+ DE4X5_OPTS = -DDE4X5_PARM='"eth0:fdx autosense=AUI eth2:autosense=TP"'
+
+ Yes, I know full duplex isn't permissible on BNC or AUI; they're just
+ examples. By default, full duplex is turned off and AUTO is the default
+ autosense setting. In reality, I expect only the full duplex option to
+ be used. Note the use of single quotes in the two examples above and the
+ lack of commas to separate items.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dec/dmfe.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dec/dmfe.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c4cf809ca
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dec/dmfe.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,71 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==============================================================
+Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 fast ethernet driver for Linux
+==============================================================
+
+Note: This driver doesn't have a maintainer.
+
+
+This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License
+as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2
+of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+
+This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the
+GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+
+This driver provides kernel support for Davicom DM9102(A)/DM9132/DM9801 ethernet cards ( CNET
+10/100 ethernet cards uses Davicom chipset too, so this driver supports CNET cards too ).If you
+didn't compile this driver as a module, it will automatically load itself on boot and print a
+line similar to::
+
+ dmfe: Davicom DM9xxx net driver, version 1.36.4 (2002-01-17)
+
+If you compiled this driver as a module, you have to load it on boot.You can load it with command::
+
+ insmod dmfe
+
+This way it will autodetect the device mode.This is the suggested way to load the module.Or you can pass
+a mode= setting to module while loading, like::
+
+ insmod dmfe mode=0 # Force 10M Half Duplex
+ insmod dmfe mode=1 # Force 100M Half Duplex
+ insmod dmfe mode=4 # Force 10M Full Duplex
+ insmod dmfe mode=5 # Force 100M Full Duplex
+
+Next you should configure your network interface with a command similar to::
+
+ ifconfig eth0 172.22.3.18
+ ^^^^^^^^^^^
+ Your IP Address
+
+Then you may have to modify the default routing table with command::
+
+ route add default eth0
+
+
+Now your ethernet card should be up and running.
+
+
+TODO:
+
+- Implement pci_driver::suspend() and pci_driver::resume() power management methods.
+- Check on 64 bit boxes.
+- Check and fix on big endian boxes.
+- Test and make sure PCI latency is now correct for all cases.
+
+
+Authors:
+
+Sten Wang <sten_wang@davicom.com.tw > : Original Author
+
+Contributors:
+
+- Marcelo Tosatti <marcelo@conectiva.com.br>
+- Alan Cox <alan@lxorguk.ukuu.org.uk>
+- Jeff Garzik <jgarzik@pobox.com>
+- Vojtech Pavlik <vojtech@suse.cz>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dlink/dl2k.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dlink/dl2k.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ccdb5d0d7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/dlink/dl2k.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,314 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=========================================================
+D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter Installation
+=========================================================
+
+May 23, 2002
+
+.. Contents
+
+ - Compatibility List
+ - Quick Install
+ - Compiling the Driver
+ - Installing the Driver
+ - Option parameter
+ - Configuration Script Sample
+ - Troubleshooting
+
+
+Compatibility List
+==================
+
+Adapter Support:
+
+- D-Link DGE-550T Gigabit Ethernet Adapter.
+- D-Link DGE-550SX Gigabit Ethernet Adapter.
+- D-Link DL2000-based Gigabit Ethernet Adapter.
+
+
+The driver support Linux kernel 2.4.7 later. We had tested it
+on the environments below.
+
+ . Red Hat v6.2 (update kernel to 2.4.7)
+ . Red Hat v7.0 (update kernel to 2.4.7)
+ . Red Hat v7.1 (kernel 2.4.7)
+ . Red Hat v7.2 (kernel 2.4.7-10)
+
+
+Quick Install
+=============
+Install linux driver as following command::
+
+ 1. make all
+ 2. insmod dl2k.ko
+ 3. ifconfig eth0 up 10.xxx.xxx.xxx netmask 255.0.0.0
+ ^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^\ ^^^^^^^^\
+ IP NETMASK
+
+Now eth0 should active, you can test it by "ping" or get more information by
+"ifconfig". If tested ok, continue the next step.
+
+4. ``cp dl2k.ko /lib/modules/`uname -r`/kernel/drivers/net``
+5. Add the following line to /etc/modprobe.d/dl2k.conf::
+
+ alias eth0 dl2k
+
+6. Run ``depmod`` to updated module indexes.
+7. Run ``netconfig`` or ``netconf`` to create configuration script ifcfg-eth0
+ located at /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts or create it manually.
+
+ [see - Configuration Script Sample]
+8. Driver will automatically load and configure at next boot time.
+
+Compiling the Driver
+====================
+In Linux, NIC drivers are most commonly configured as loadable modules.
+The approach of building a monolithic kernel has become obsolete. The driver
+can be compiled as part of a monolithic kernel, but is strongly discouraged.
+The remainder of this section assumes the driver is built as a loadable module.
+In the Linux environment, it is a good idea to rebuild the driver from the
+source instead of relying on a precompiled version. This approach provides
+better reliability since a precompiled driver might depend on libraries or
+kernel features that are not present in a given Linux installation.
+
+The 3 files necessary to build Linux device driver are dl2k.c, dl2k.h and
+Makefile. To compile, the Linux installation must include the gcc compiler,
+the kernel source, and the kernel headers. The Linux driver supports Linux
+Kernels 2.4.7. Copy the files to a directory and enter the following command
+to compile and link the driver:
+
+CD-ROM drive
+------------
+
+::
+
+ [root@XXX /] mkdir cdrom
+ [root@XXX /] mount -r -t iso9660 -o conv=auto /dev/cdrom /cdrom
+ [root@XXX /] cd root
+ [root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k
+ [root@XXX /root] cd dl2k
+ [root@XXX dl2k] cp /cdrom/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k
+ [root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz
+ [root@XXX dl2k] make all
+
+Floppy disc drive
+-----------------
+
+::
+
+ [root@XXX /] cd root
+ [root@XXX /root] mkdir dl2k
+ [root@XXX /root] cd dl2k
+ [root@XXX dl2k] mcopy a:/linux/dl2k.tgz /root/dl2k
+ [root@XXX dl2k] tar xfvz dl2k.tgz
+ [root@XXX dl2k] make all
+
+Installing the Driver
+=====================
+
+Manual Installation
+-------------------
+
+ Once the driver has been compiled, it must be loaded, enabled, and bound
+ to a protocol stack in order to establish network connectivity. To load a
+ module enter the command::
+
+ insmod dl2k.o
+
+ or::
+
+ insmod dl2k.o <optional parameter> ; add parameter
+
+---------------------------------------------------------
+
+ example::
+
+ insmod dl2k.o media=100mbps_hd
+
+ or::
+
+ insmod dl2k.o media=3
+
+ or::
+
+ insmod dl2k.o media=3,2 ; for 2 cards
+
+---------------------------------------------------------
+
+ Please reference the list of the command line parameters supported by
+ the Linux device driver below.
+
+ The insmod command only loads the driver and gives it a name of the form
+ eth0, eth1, etc. To bring the NIC into an operational state,
+ it is necessary to issue the following command::
+
+ ifconfig eth0 up
+
+ Finally, to bind the driver to the active protocol (e.g., TCP/IP with
+ Linux), enter the following command::
+
+ ifup eth0
+
+ Note that this is meaningful only if the system can find a configuration
+ script that contains the necessary network information. A sample will be
+ given in the next paragraph.
+
+ The commands to unload a driver are as follows::
+
+ ifdown eth0
+ ifconfig eth0 down
+ rmmod dl2k.o
+
+ The following are the commands to list the currently loaded modules and
+ to see the current network configuration::
+
+ lsmod
+ ifconfig
+
+
+Automated Installation
+----------------------
+ This section describes how to install the driver such that it is
+ automatically loaded and configured at boot time. The following description
+ is based on a Red Hat 6.0/7.0 distribution, but it can easily be ported to
+ other distributions as well.
+
+Red Hat v6.x/v7.x
+-----------------
+ 1. Copy dl2k.o to the network modules directory, typically
+ /lib/modules/2.x.x-xx/net or /lib/modules/2.x.x/kernel/drivers/net.
+ 2. Locate the boot module configuration file, most commonly in the
+ /etc/modprobe.d/ directory. Add the following lines::
+
+ alias ethx dl2k
+ options dl2k <optional parameters>
+
+ where ethx will be eth0 if the NIC is the only ethernet adapter, eth1 if
+ one other ethernet adapter is installed, etc. Refer to the table in the
+ previous section for the list of optional parameters.
+ 3. Locate the network configuration scripts, normally the
+ /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts directory, and create a configuration
+ script named ifcfg-ethx that contains network information.
+ 4. Note that for most Linux distributions, Red Hat included, a configuration
+ utility with a graphical user interface is provided to perform steps 2
+ and 3 above.
+
+
+Parameter Description
+=====================
+You can install this driver without any additional parameter. However, if you
+are going to have extensive functions then it is necessary to set extra
+parameter. Below is a list of the command line parameters supported by the
+Linux device
+driver.
+
+
+=============================== ==============================================
+mtu=packet_size Specifies the maximum packet size. default
+ is 1500.
+
+media=media_type Specifies the media type the NIC operates at.
+ autosense Autosensing active media.
+
+ =========== =========================
+ 10mbps_hd 10Mbps half duplex.
+ 10mbps_fd 10Mbps full duplex.
+ 100mbps_hd 100Mbps half duplex.
+ 100mbps_fd 100Mbps full duplex.
+ 1000mbps_fd 1000Mbps full duplex.
+ 1000mbps_hd 1000Mbps half duplex.
+ 0 Autosensing active media.
+ 1 10Mbps half duplex.
+ 2 10Mbps full duplex.
+ 3 100Mbps half duplex.
+ 4 100Mbps full duplex.
+ 5 1000Mbps half duplex.
+ 6 1000Mbps full duplex.
+ =========== =========================
+
+ By default, the NIC operates at autosense.
+ 1000mbps_fd and 1000mbps_hd types are only
+ available for fiber adapter.
+
+vlan=n Specifies the VLAN ID. If vlan=0, the
+ Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) function is
+ disable.
+
+jumbo=[0|1] Specifies the jumbo frame support. If jumbo=1,
+ the NIC accept jumbo frames. By default, this
+ function is disabled.
+ Jumbo frame usually improve the performance
+ int gigabit.
+ This feature need jumbo frame compatible
+ remote.
+
+rx_coalesce=m Number of rx frame handled each interrupt.
+rx_timeout=n Rx DMA wait time for an interrupt.
+ If set rx_coalesce > 0, hardware only assert
+ an interrupt for m frames. Hardware won't
+ assert rx interrupt until m frames received or
+ reach timeout of n * 640 nano seconds.
+ Set proper rx_coalesce and rx_timeout can
+ reduce congestion collapse and overload which
+ has been a bottleneck for high speed network.
+
+ For example, rx_coalesce=10 rx_timeout=800.
+ that is, hardware assert only 1 interrupt
+ for 10 frames received or timeout of 512 us.
+
+tx_coalesce=n Number of tx frame handled each interrupt.
+ Set n > 1 can reduce the interrupts
+ congestion usually lower performance of
+ high speed network card. Default is 16.
+
+tx_flow=[1|0] Specifies the Tx flow control. If tx_flow=0,
+ the Tx flow control disable else driver
+ autodetect.
+rx_flow=[1|0] Specifies the Rx flow control. If rx_flow=0,
+ the Rx flow control enable else driver
+ autodetect.
+=============================== ==============================================
+
+
+Configuration Script Sample
+===========================
+Here is a sample of a simple configuration script::
+
+ DEVICE=eth0
+ USERCTL=no
+ ONBOOT=yes
+ POOTPROTO=none
+ BROADCAST=207.200.5.255
+ NETWORK=207.200.5.0
+ NETMASK=255.255.255.0
+ IPADDR=207.200.5.2
+
+
+Troubleshooting
+===============
+Q1. Source files contain ^ M behind every line.
+
+ Make sure all files are Unix file format (no LF). Try the following
+ shell command to convert files::
+
+ cat dl2k.c | col -b > dl2k.tmp
+ mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c
+
+ OR::
+
+ cat dl2k.c | tr -d "\r" > dl2k.tmp
+ mv dl2k.tmp dl2k.c
+
+Q2: Could not find header files (``*.h``)?
+
+ To compile the driver, you need kernel header files. After
+ installing the kernel source, the header files are usually located in
+ /usr/src/linux/include, which is the default include directory configured
+ in Makefile. For some distributions, there is a copy of header files in
+ /usr/src/include/linux and /usr/src/include/asm, that you can change the
+ INCLUDEDIR in Makefile to /usr/include without installing kernel source.
+
+ Note that RH 7.0 didn't provide correct header files in /usr/include,
+ including those files will make a wrong version driver.
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..241c6c6f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,269 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==============================
+The QorIQ DPAA Ethernet Driver
+==============================
+
+Authors:
+- Madalin Bucur <madalin.bucur@nxp.com>
+- Camelia Groza <camelia.groza@nxp.com>
+
+.. Contents
+
+ - DPAA Ethernet Overview
+ - DPAA Ethernet Supported SoCs
+ - Configuring DPAA Ethernet in your kernel
+ - DPAA Ethernet Frame Processing
+ - DPAA Ethernet Features
+ - DPAA IRQ Affinity and Receive Side Scaling
+ - Debugging
+
+DPAA Ethernet Overview
+======================
+
+DPAA stands for Data Path Acceleration Architecture and it is a
+set of networking acceleration IPs that are available on several
+generations of SoCs, both on PowerPC and ARM64.
+
+The Freescale DPAA architecture consists of a series of hardware blocks
+that support Ethernet connectivity. The Ethernet driver depends upon the
+following drivers in the Linux kernel:
+
+ - Peripheral Access Memory Unit (PAMU) (* needed only for PPC platforms)
+ drivers/iommu/fsl_*
+ - Frame Manager (FMan)
+ drivers/net/ethernet/freescale/fman
+ - Queue Manager (QMan), Buffer Manager (BMan)
+ drivers/soc/fsl/qbman
+
+A simplified view of the dpaa_eth interfaces mapped to FMan MACs::
+
+ dpaa_eth /eth0\ ... /ethN\
+ driver | | | |
+ ------------- ---- ----------- ---- -------------
+ -Ports / Tx Rx \ ... / Tx Rx \
+ FMan | | | |
+ -MACs | MAC0 | | MACN |
+ / dtsec0 \ ... / dtsecN \ (or tgec)
+ / \ / \(or memac)
+ --------- -------------- --- -------------- ---------
+ FMan, FMan Port, FMan SP, FMan MURAM drivers
+ ---------------------------------------------------------
+ FMan HW blocks: MURAM, MACs, Ports, SP
+ ---------------------------------------------------------
+
+The dpaa_eth relation to the QMan, BMan and FMan::
+
+ ________________________________
+ dpaa_eth / eth0 \
+ driver / \
+ --------- -^- -^- -^- --- ---------
+ QMan driver / \ / \ / \ \ / | BMan |
+ |Rx | |Rx | |Tx | |Tx | | driver |
+ --------- |Dfl| |Err| |Cnf| |FQs| | |
+ QMan HW |FQ | |FQ | |FQs| | | | |
+ / \ / \ / \ \ / | |
+ --------- --- --- --- -v- ---------
+ | FMan QMI | |
+ | FMan HW FMan BMI | BMan HW |
+ ----------------------- --------
+
+where the acronyms used above (and in the code) are:
+
+=============== ===========================================================
+DPAA Data Path Acceleration Architecture
+FMan DPAA Frame Manager
+QMan DPAA Queue Manager
+BMan DPAA Buffers Manager
+QMI QMan interface in FMan
+BMI BMan interface in FMan
+FMan SP FMan Storage Profiles
+MURAM Multi-user RAM in FMan
+FQ QMan Frame Queue
+Rx Dfl FQ default reception FQ
+Rx Err FQ Rx error frames FQ
+Tx Cnf FQ Tx confirmation FQs
+Tx FQs transmission frame queues
+dtsec datapath three speed Ethernet controller (10/100/1000 Mbps)
+tgec ten gigabit Ethernet controller (10 Gbps)
+memac multirate Ethernet MAC (10/100/1000/10000)
+=============== ===========================================================
+
+DPAA Ethernet Supported SoCs
+============================
+
+The DPAA drivers enable the Ethernet controllers present on the following SoCs:
+
+PPC
+- P1023
+- P2041
+- P3041
+- P4080
+- P5020
+- P5040
+- T1023
+- T1024
+- T1040
+- T1042
+- T2080
+- T4240
+- B4860
+
+ARM
+- LS1043A
+- LS1046A
+
+Configuring DPAA Ethernet in your kernel
+========================================
+
+To enable the DPAA Ethernet driver, the following Kconfig options are required::
+
+ # common for arch/arm64 and arch/powerpc platforms
+ CONFIG_FSL_DPAA=y
+ CONFIG_FSL_FMAN=y
+ CONFIG_FSL_DPAA_ETH=y
+ CONFIG_FSL_XGMAC_MDIO=y
+
+ # for arch/powerpc only
+ CONFIG_FSL_PAMU=y
+
+ # common options needed for the PHYs used on the RDBs
+ CONFIG_VITESSE_PHY=y
+ CONFIG_REALTEK_PHY=y
+ CONFIG_AQUANTIA_PHY=y
+
+DPAA Ethernet Frame Processing
+==============================
+
+On Rx, buffers for the incoming frames are retrieved from the buffers found
+in the dedicated interface buffer pool. The driver initializes and seeds these
+with one page buffers.
+
+On Tx, all transmitted frames are returned to the driver through Tx
+confirmation frame queues. The driver is then responsible for freeing the
+buffers. In order to do this properly, a backpointer is added to the buffer
+before transmission that points to the skb. When the buffer returns to the
+driver on a confirmation FQ, the skb can be correctly consumed.
+
+DPAA Ethernet Features
+======================
+
+Currently the DPAA Ethernet driver enables the basic features required for
+a Linux Ethernet driver. The support for advanced features will be added
+gradually.
+
+The driver has Rx and Tx checksum offloading for UDP and TCP. Currently the Rx
+checksum offload feature is enabled by default and cannot be controlled through
+ethtool. Also, rx-flow-hash and rx-hashing was added. The addition of RSS
+provides a big performance boost for the forwarding scenarios, allowing
+different traffic flows received by one interface to be processed by different
+CPUs in parallel.
+
+The driver has support for multiple prioritized Tx traffic classes. Priorities
+range from 0 (lowest) to 3 (highest). These are mapped to HW workqueues with
+strict priority levels. Each traffic class contains NR_CPU TX queues. By
+default, only one traffic class is enabled and the lowest priority Tx queues
+are used. Higher priority traffic classes can be enabled with the mqprio
+qdisc. For example, all four traffic classes are enabled on an interface with
+the following command. Furthermore, skb priority levels are mapped to traffic
+classes as follows:
+
+ * priorities 0 to 3 - traffic class 0 (low priority)
+ * priorities 4 to 7 - traffic class 1 (medium-low priority)
+ * priorities 8 to 11 - traffic class 2 (medium-high priority)
+ * priorities 12 to 15 - traffic class 3 (high priority)
+
+::
+
+ tc qdisc add dev <int> root handle 1: \
+ mqprio num_tc 4 map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 hw 1
+
+DPAA IRQ Affinity and Receive Side Scaling
+==========================================
+
+Traffic coming on the DPAA Rx queues or on the DPAA Tx confirmation
+queues is seen by the CPU as ingress traffic on a certain portal.
+The DPAA QMan portal interrupts are affined each to a certain CPU.
+The same portal interrupt services all the QMan portal consumers.
+
+By default the DPAA Ethernet driver enables RSS, making use of the
+DPAA FMan Parser and Keygen blocks to distribute traffic on 128
+hardware frame queues using a hash on IP v4/v6 source and destination
+and L4 source and destination ports, in present in the received frame.
+When RSS is disabled, all traffic received by a certain interface is
+received on the default Rx frame queue. The default DPAA Rx frame
+queues are configured to put the received traffic into a pool channel
+that allows any available CPU portal to dequeue the ingress traffic.
+The default frame queues have the HOLDACTIVE option set, ensuring that
+traffic bursts from a certain queue are serviced by the same CPU.
+This ensures a very low rate of frame reordering. A drawback of this
+is that only one CPU at a time can service the traffic received by a
+certain interface when RSS is not enabled.
+
+To implement RSS, the DPAA Ethernet driver allocates an extra set of
+128 Rx frame queues that are configured to dedicated channels, in a
+round-robin manner. The mapping of the frame queues to CPUs is now
+hardcoded, there is no indirection table to move traffic for a certain
+FQ (hash result) to another CPU. The ingress traffic arriving on one
+of these frame queues will arrive at the same portal and will always
+be processed by the same CPU. This ensures intra-flow order preservation
+and workload distribution for multiple traffic flows.
+
+RSS can be turned off for a certain interface using ethtool, i.e.::
+
+ # ethtool -N fm1-mac9 rx-flow-hash tcp4 ""
+
+To turn it back on, one needs to set rx-flow-hash for tcp4/6 or udp4/6::
+
+ # ethtool -N fm1-mac9 rx-flow-hash udp4 sfdn
+
+There is no independent control for individual protocols, any command
+run for one of tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6 is
+going to control the rx-flow-hashing for all protocols on that interface.
+
+Besides using the FMan Keygen computed hash for spreading traffic on the
+128 Rx FQs, the DPAA Ethernet driver also sets the skb hash value when
+the NETIF_F_RXHASH feature is on (active by default). This can be turned
+on or off through ethtool, i.e.::
+
+ # ethtool -K fm1-mac9 rx-hashing off
+ # ethtool -k fm1-mac9 | grep hash
+ receive-hashing: off
+ # ethtool -K fm1-mac9 rx-hashing on
+ Actual changes:
+ receive-hashing: on
+ # ethtool -k fm1-mac9 | grep hash
+ receive-hashing: on
+
+Please note that Rx hashing depends upon the rx-flow-hashing being on
+for that interface - turning off rx-flow-hashing will also disable the
+rx-hashing (without ethtool reporting it as off as that depends on the
+NETIF_F_RXHASH feature flag).
+
+Debugging
+=========
+
+The following statistics are exported for each interface through ethtool:
+
+ - interrupt count per CPU
+ - Rx packets count per CPU
+ - Tx packets count per CPU
+ - Tx confirmed packets count per CPU
+ - Tx S/G frames count per CPU
+ - Tx error count per CPU
+ - Rx error count per CPU
+ - Rx error count per type
+ - congestion related statistics:
+
+ - congestion status
+ - time spent in congestion
+ - number of time the device entered congestion
+ - dropped packets count per cause
+
+The driver also exports the following information in sysfs:
+
+ - the FQ IDs for each FQ type
+ /sys/devices/platform/soc/<addr>.fman/<addr>.ethernet/dpaa-ethernet.<id>/net/fm<nr>-mac<nr>/fqids
+
+ - the ID of the buffer pool in use
+ /sys/devices/platform/soc/<addr>.fman/<addr>.ethernet/dpaa-ethernet.<id>/net/fm<nr>-mac<nr>/bpids
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c50fd4663
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/dpio-driver.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,160 @@
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+DPAA2 DPIO (Data Path I/O) Overview
+===================================
+
+:Copyright: |copy| 2016-2018 NXP
+
+This document provides an overview of the Freescale DPAA2 DPIO
+drivers
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+A DPAA2 DPIO (Data Path I/O) is a hardware object that provides
+interfaces to enqueue and dequeue frames to/from network interfaces
+and other accelerators. A DPIO also provides hardware buffer
+pool management for network interfaces.
+
+This document provides an overview the Linux DPIO driver, its
+subcomponents, and its APIs.
+
+See
+Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst
+for a general overview of DPAA2 and the general DPAA2 driver architecture
+in Linux.
+
+Driver Overview
+---------------
+
+The DPIO driver is bound to DPIO objects discovered on the fsl-mc bus and
+provides services that:
+
+ A. allow other drivers, such as the Ethernet driver, to enqueue and dequeue
+ frames for their respective objects
+ B. allow drivers to register callbacks for data availability notifications
+ when data becomes available on a queue or channel
+ C. allow drivers to manage hardware buffer pools
+
+The Linux DPIO driver consists of 3 primary components--
+ DPIO object driver-- fsl-mc driver that manages the DPIO object
+
+ DPIO service-- provides APIs to other Linux drivers for services
+
+ QBman portal interface-- sends portal commands, gets responses::
+
+ fsl-mc other
+ bus drivers
+ | |
+ +---+----+ +------+-----+
+ |DPIO obj| |DPIO service|
+ | driver |---| (DPIO) |
+ +--------+ +------+-----+
+ |
+ +------+-----+
+ | QBman |
+ | portal i/f |
+ +------------+
+ |
+ hardware
+
+
+The diagram below shows how the DPIO driver components fit with the other
+DPAA2 Linux driver components::
+
+ +------------+
+ | OS Network |
+ | Stack |
+ +------------+ +------------+
+ | Allocator |. . . . . . . | Ethernet |
+ |(DPMCP,DPBP)| | (DPNI) |
+ +-.----------+ +---+---+----+
+ . . ^ |
+ . . <data avail, | |<enqueue,
+ . . tx confirm> | | dequeue>
+ +-------------+ . | |
+ | DPRC driver | . +--------+ +------------+
+ | (DPRC) | . . |DPIO obj| |DPIO service|
+ +----------+--+ | driver |-| (DPIO) |
+ | +--------+ +------+-----+
+ |<dev add/remove> +------|-----+
+ | | QBman |
+ +----+--------------+ | portal i/f |
+ | MC-bus driver | +------------+
+ | | |
+ | /soc/fsl-mc | |
+ +-------------------+ |
+ |
+ =========================================|=========|========================
+ +-+--DPIO---|-----------+
+ | | |
+ | QBman Portal |
+ +-----------------------+
+
+ ============================================================================
+
+
+DPIO Object Driver (dpio-driver.c)
+----------------------------------
+
+ The dpio-driver component registers with the fsl-mc bus to handle objects of
+ type "dpio". The implementation of probe() handles basic initialization
+ of the DPIO including mapping of the DPIO regions (the QBman SW portal)
+ and initializing interrupts and registering irq handlers. The dpio-driver
+ registers the probed DPIO with dpio-service.
+
+DPIO service (dpio-service.c, dpaa2-io.h)
+------------------------------------------
+
+ The dpio service component provides queuing, notification, and buffers
+ management services to DPAA2 drivers, such as the Ethernet driver. A system
+ will typically allocate 1 DPIO object per CPU to allow queuing operations
+ to happen simultaneously across all CPUs.
+
+ Notification handling
+ dpaa2_io_service_register()
+
+ dpaa2_io_service_deregister()
+
+ dpaa2_io_service_rearm()
+
+ Queuing
+ dpaa2_io_service_pull_fq()
+
+ dpaa2_io_service_pull_channel()
+
+ dpaa2_io_service_enqueue_fq()
+
+ dpaa2_io_service_enqueue_qd()
+
+ dpaa2_io_store_create()
+
+ dpaa2_io_store_destroy()
+
+ dpaa2_io_store_next()
+
+ Buffer pool management
+ dpaa2_io_service_release()
+
+ dpaa2_io_service_acquire()
+
+QBman portal interface (qbman-portal.c)
+---------------------------------------
+
+ The qbman-portal component provides APIs to do the low level hardware
+ bit twiddling for operations such as:
+
+ - initializing Qman software portals
+ - building and sending portal commands
+ - portal interrupt configuration and processing
+
+ The qbman-portal APIs are not public to other drivers, and are
+ only used by dpio-service.
+
+Other (dpaa2-fd.h, dpaa2-global.h)
+----------------------------------
+
+ Frame descriptor and scatter-gather definitions and the APIs used to
+ manipulate them are defined in dpaa2-fd.h.
+
+ Dequeue result struct and parsing APIs are defined in dpaa2-global.h.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/ethernet-driver.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/ethernet-driver.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..682f3986c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/ethernet-driver.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,186 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+===============================
+DPAA2 Ethernet driver
+===============================
+
+:Copyright: |copy| 2017-2018 NXP
+
+This file provides documentation for the Freescale DPAA2 Ethernet driver.
+
+Supported Platforms
+===================
+This driver provides networking support for Freescale DPAA2 SoCs, e.g.
+LS2080A, LS2088A, LS1088A.
+
+
+Architecture Overview
+=====================
+Unlike regular NICs, in the DPAA2 architecture there is no single hardware block
+representing network interfaces; instead, several separate hardware resources
+concur to provide the networking functionality:
+
+- network interfaces
+- queues, channels
+- buffer pools
+- MAC/PHY
+
+All hardware resources are allocated and configured through the Management
+Complex (MC) portals. MC abstracts most of these resources as DPAA2 objects
+and exposes ABIs through which they can be configured and controlled. A few
+hardware resources, like queues, do not have a corresponding MC object and
+are treated as internal resources of other objects.
+
+For a more detailed description of the DPAA2 architecture and its object
+abstractions see
+*Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst*.
+
+Each Linux net device is built on top of a Datapath Network Interface (DPNI)
+object and uses Buffer Pools (DPBPs), I/O Portals (DPIOs) and Concentrators
+(DPCONs).
+
+Configuration interface::
+
+ -----------------------
+ | DPAA2 Ethernet Driver |
+ -----------------------
+ . . .
+ . . .
+ . . . . . . . . . . . .
+ . . .
+ . . .
+ ---------- ---------- -----------
+ | DPBP API | | DPNI API | | DPCON API |
+ ---------- ---------- -----------
+ . . . software
+ ======= . ========== . ============ . ===================
+ . . . hardware
+ ------------------------------------------
+ | MC hardware portals |
+ ------------------------------------------
+ . . .
+ . . .
+ ------ ------ -------
+ | DPBP | | DPNI | | DPCON |
+ ------ ------ -------
+
+The DPNIs are network interfaces without a direct one-on-one mapping to PHYs.
+DPBPs represent hardware buffer pools. Packet I/O is performed in the context
+of DPCON objects, using DPIO portals for managing and communicating with the
+hardware resources.
+
+Datapath (I/O) interface::
+
+ -----------------------------------------------
+ | DPAA2 Ethernet Driver |
+ -----------------------------------------------
+ | ^ ^ | |
+ | | | | |
+ enqueue| dequeue| data | dequeue| seed |
+ (Tx) | (Rx, TxC)| avail.| request| buffers|
+ | | notify| | |
+ | | | | |
+ V | | V V
+ -----------------------------------------------
+ | DPIO Driver |
+ -----------------------------------------------
+ | | | | | software
+ | | | | | ================
+ | | | | | hardware
+ -----------------------------------------------
+ | I/O hardware portals |
+ -----------------------------------------------
+ | ^ ^ | |
+ | | | | |
+ | | | V |
+ V | ================ V
+ ---------------------- | -------------
+ queues ---------------------- | | Buffer pool |
+ ---------------------- | -------------
+ =======================
+ Channel
+
+Datapath I/O (DPIO) portals provide enqueue and dequeue services, data
+availability notifications and buffer pool management. DPIOs are shared between
+all DPAA2 objects (and implicitly all DPAA2 kernel drivers) that work with data
+frames, but must be affine to the CPUs for the purpose of traffic distribution.
+
+Frames are transmitted and received through hardware frame queues, which can be
+grouped in channels for the purpose of hardware scheduling. The Ethernet driver
+enqueues TX frames on egress queues and after transmission is complete a TX
+confirmation frame is sent back to the CPU.
+
+When frames are available on ingress queues, a data availability notification
+is sent to the CPU; notifications are raised per channel, so even if multiple
+queues in the same channel have available frames, only one notification is sent.
+After a channel fires a notification, is must be explicitly rearmed.
+
+Each network interface can have multiple Rx, Tx and confirmation queues affined
+to CPUs, and one channel (DPCON) for each CPU that services at least one queue.
+DPCONs are used to distribute ingress traffic to different CPUs via the cores'
+affine DPIOs.
+
+The role of hardware buffer pools is storage of ingress frame data. Each network
+interface has a privately owned buffer pool which it seeds with kernel allocated
+buffers.
+
+
+DPNIs are decoupled from PHYs; a DPNI can be connected to a PHY through a DPMAC
+object or to another DPNI through an internal link, but the connection is
+managed by MC and completely transparent to the Ethernet driver.
+
+::
+
+ --------- --------- ---------
+ | eth if1 | | eth if2 | | eth ifn |
+ --------- --------- ---------
+ . . .
+ . . .
+ . . .
+ ---------------------------
+ | DPAA2 Ethernet Driver |
+ ---------------------------
+ . . .
+ . . .
+ . . .
+ ------ ------ ------ -------
+ | DPNI | | DPNI | | DPNI | | DPMAC |----+
+ ------ ------ ------ ------- |
+ | | | | |
+ | | | | -----
+ =========== ================== | PHY |
+ -----
+
+Creating a Network Interface
+============================
+A net device is created for each DPNI object probed on the MC bus. Each DPNI has
+a number of properties which determine the network interface configuration
+options and associated hardware resources.
+
+DPNI objects (and the other DPAA2 objects needed for a network interface) can be
+added to a container on the MC bus in one of two ways: statically, through a
+Datapath Layout Binary file (DPL) that is parsed by MC at boot time; or created
+dynamically at runtime, via the DPAA2 objects APIs.
+
+
+Features & Offloads
+===================
+Hardware checksum offloading is supported for TCP and UDP over IPv4/6 frames.
+The checksum offloads can be independently configured on RX and TX through
+ethtool.
+
+Hardware offload of unicast and multicast MAC filtering is supported on the
+ingress path and permanently enabled.
+
+Scatter-gather frames are supported on both RX and TX paths. On TX, SG support
+is configurable via ethtool; on RX it is always enabled.
+
+The DPAA2 hardware can process jumbo Ethernet frames of up to 10K bytes.
+
+The Ethernet driver defines a static flow hashing scheme that distributes
+traffic based on a 5-tuple key: src IP, dst IP, IP proto, L4 src port,
+L4 dst port. No user configuration is supported for now.
+
+Hardware specific statistics for the network interface as well as some
+non-standard driver stats can be consulted through ethtool -S option.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ee40fcc5d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,11 @@
+===================
+DPAA2 Documentation
+===================
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 1
+
+ overview
+ dpio-driver
+ ethernet-driver
+ mac-phy-support
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/mac-phy-support.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/mac-phy-support.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..51e6624fb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/mac-phy-support.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,191 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+=======================
+DPAA2 MAC / PHY support
+=======================
+
+:Copyright: |copy| 2019 NXP
+
+Overview
+--------
+
+The DPAA2 MAC / PHY support consists of a set of APIs that help DPAA2 network
+drivers (dpaa2-eth, dpaa2-ethsw) interract with the PHY library.
+
+DPAA2 Software Architecture
+---------------------------
+
+Among other DPAA2 objects, the fsl-mc bus exports DPNI objects (abstracting a
+network interface) and DPMAC objects (abstracting a MAC). The dpaa2-eth driver
+probes on the DPNI object and connects to and configures a DPMAC object with
+the help of phylink.
+
+Data connections may be established between a DPNI and a DPMAC, or between two
+DPNIs. Depending on the connection type, the netif_carrier_[on/off] is handled
+directly by the dpaa2-eth driver or by phylink.
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+ Sources of abstracted link state information presented by the MC firmware
+
+ +--------------------------------------+
+ +------------+ +---------+ | xgmac_mdio |
+ | net_device | | phylink |--| +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ |
+ +------------+ +---------+ | | PHY | | PHY | | PHY | | PHY | |
+ | | | +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ |
+ +------------------------------------+ | External MDIO bus |
+ | dpaa2-eth | +--------------------------------------+
+ +------------------------------------+
+ | | Linux
+ ~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+ | | MC firmware
+ | /| V
+ +----------+ / | +----------+
+ | | / | | |
+ | | | | | |
+ | DPNI |<------| |<------| DPMAC |
+ | | | | | |
+ | | \ |<---+ | |
+ +----------+ \ | | +----------+
+ \| |
+ |
+ +--------------------------------------+
+ | MC firmware polling MAC PCS for link |
+ | +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ |
+ | | PCS | | PCS | | PCS | | PCS | |
+ | +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ +-----+ |
+ | Internal MDIO bus |
+ +--------------------------------------+
+
+
+Depending on an MC firmware configuration setting, each MAC may be in one of two modes:
+
+- DPMAC_LINK_TYPE_FIXED: the link state management is handled exclusively by
+ the MC firmware by polling the MAC PCS. Without the need to register a
+ phylink instance, the dpaa2-eth driver will not bind to the connected dpmac
+ object at all.
+
+- DPMAC_LINK_TYPE_PHY: The MC firmware is left waiting for link state update
+ events, but those are in fact passed strictly between the dpaa2-mac (based on
+ phylink) and its attached net_device driver (dpaa2-eth, dpaa2-ethsw),
+ effectively bypassing the firmware.
+
+Implementation
+--------------
+
+At probe time or when a DPNI's endpoint is dynamically changed, the dpaa2-eth
+is responsible to find out if the peer object is a DPMAC and if this is the
+case, to integrate it with PHYLINK using the dpaa2_mac_connect() API, which
+will do the following:
+
+ - look up the device tree for PHYLINK-compatible of binding (phy-handle)
+ - will create a PHYLINK instance associated with the received net_device
+ - connect to the PHY using phylink_of_phy_connect()
+
+The following phylink_mac_ops callback are implemented:
+
+ - .validate() will populate the supported linkmodes with the MAC capabilities
+ only when the phy_interface_t is RGMII_* (at the moment, this is the only
+ link type supported by the driver).
+
+ - .mac_config() will configure the MAC in the new configuration using the
+ dpmac_set_link_state() MC firmware API.
+
+ - .mac_link_up() / .mac_link_down() will update the MAC link using the same
+ API described above.
+
+At driver unbind() or when the DPNI object is disconnected from the DPMAC, the
+dpaa2-eth driver calls dpaa2_mac_disconnect() which will, in turn, disconnect
+from the PHY and destroy the PHYLINK instance.
+
+In case of a DPNI-DPMAC connection, an 'ip link set dev eth0 up' would start
+the following sequence of operations:
+
+(1) phylink_start() called from .dev_open().
+(2) The .mac_config() and .mac_link_up() callbacks are called by PHYLINK.
+(3) In order to configure the HW MAC, the MC Firmware API
+ dpmac_set_link_state() is called.
+(4) The firmware will eventually setup the HW MAC in the new configuration.
+(5) A netif_carrier_on() call is made directly from PHYLINK on the associated
+ net_device.
+(6) The dpaa2-eth driver handles the LINK_STATE_CHANGE irq in order to
+ enable/disable Rx taildrop based on the pause frame settings.
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+ +---------+ +---------+
+ | PHYLINK |-------------->| eth0 |
+ +---------+ (5) +---------+
+ (1) ^ |
+ | |
+ | v (2)
+ +-----------------------------------+
+ | dpaa2-eth |
+ +-----------------------------------+
+ | ^ (6)
+ | |
+ v (3) |
+ +---------+---------------+---------+
+ | DPMAC | | DPNI |
+ +---------+ +---------+
+ | MC Firmware |
+ +-----------------------------------+
+ |
+ |
+ v (4)
+ +-----------------------------------+
+ | HW MAC |
+ +-----------------------------------+
+
+In case of a DPNI-DPNI connection, a usual sequence of operations looks like
+the following:
+
+(1) ip link set dev eth0 up
+(2) The dpni_enable() MC API called on the associated fsl_mc_device.
+(3) ip link set dev eth1 up
+(4) The dpni_enable() MC API called on the associated fsl_mc_device.
+(5) The LINK_STATE_CHANGED irq is received by both instances of the dpaa2-eth
+ driver because now the operational link state is up.
+(6) The netif_carrier_on() is called on the exported net_device from
+ link_state_update().
+
+.. code-block:: none
+
+ +---------+ +---------+
+ | eth0 | | eth1 |
+ +---------+ +---------+
+ | ^ ^ |
+ | | | |
+ (1) v | (6) (6) | v (3)
+ +---------+ +---------+
+ |dpaa2-eth| |dpaa2-eth|
+ +---------+ +---------+
+ | ^ ^ |
+ | | | |
+ (2) v | (5) (5) | v (4)
+ +---------+---------------+---------+
+ | DPNI | | DPNI |
+ +---------+ +---------+
+ | MC Firmware |
+ +-----------------------------------+
+
+
+Exported API
+------------
+
+Any DPAA2 driver that drivers endpoints of DPMAC objects should service its
+_EVENT_ENDPOINT_CHANGED irq and connect/disconnect from the associated DPMAC
+when necessary using the below listed API::
+
+ - int dpaa2_mac_connect(struct dpaa2_mac *mac);
+ - void dpaa2_mac_disconnect(struct dpaa2_mac *mac);
+
+A phylink integration is necessary only when the partner DPMAC is not of TYPE_FIXED.
+One can check for this condition using the below API::
+
+ - bool dpaa2_mac_is_type_fixed(struct fsl_mc_device *dpmac_dev,struct fsl_mc_io *mc_io);
+
+Before connection to a MAC, the caller must allocate and populate the
+dpaa2_mac structure with the associated net_device, a pointer to the MC portal
+to be used and the actual fsl_mc_device structure of the DPMAC.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d638b5a8a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/dpaa2/overview.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,405 @@
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+=========================================================
+DPAA2 (Data Path Acceleration Architecture Gen2) Overview
+=========================================================
+
+:Copyright: |copy| 2015 Freescale Semiconductor Inc.
+:Copyright: |copy| 2018 NXP
+
+This document provides an overview of the Freescale DPAA2 architecture
+and how it is integrated into the Linux kernel.
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+DPAA2 is a hardware architecture designed for high-speeed network
+packet processing. DPAA2 consists of sophisticated mechanisms for
+processing Ethernet packets, queue management, buffer management,
+autonomous L2 switching, virtual Ethernet bridging, and accelerator
+(e.g. crypto) sharing.
+
+A DPAA2 hardware component called the Management Complex (or MC) manages the
+DPAA2 hardware resources. The MC provides an object-based abstraction for
+software drivers to use the DPAA2 hardware.
+The MC uses DPAA2 hardware resources such as queues, buffer pools, and
+network ports to create functional objects/devices such as network
+interfaces, an L2 switch, or accelerator instances.
+The MC provides memory-mapped I/O command interfaces (MC portals)
+which DPAA2 software drivers use to operate on DPAA2 objects.
+
+The diagram below shows an overview of the DPAA2 resource management
+architecture::
+
+ +--------------------------------------+
+ | OS |
+ | DPAA2 drivers |
+ | | |
+ +-----------------------------|--------+
+ |
+ | (create,discover,connect
+ | config,use,destroy)
+ |
+ DPAA2 |
+ +------------------------| mc portal |-+
+ | | |
+ | +- - - - - - - - - - - - -V- - -+ |
+ | | | |
+ | | Management Complex (MC) | |
+ | | | |
+ | +- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -+ |
+ | |
+ | Hardware Hardware |
+ | Resources Objects |
+ | --------- ------- |
+ | -queues -DPRC |
+ | -buffer pools -DPMCP |
+ | -Eth MACs/ports -DPIO |
+ | -network interface -DPNI |
+ | profiles -DPMAC |
+ | -queue portals -DPBP |
+ | -MC portals ... |
+ | ... |
+ | |
+ +--------------------------------------+
+
+
+The MC mediates operations such as create, discover,
+connect, configuration, and destroy. Fast-path operations
+on data, such as packet transmit/receive, are not mediated by
+the MC and are done directly using memory mapped regions in
+DPIO objects.
+
+Overview of DPAA2 Objects
+=========================
+
+The section provides a brief overview of some key DPAA2 objects.
+A simple scenario is described illustrating the objects involved
+in creating a network interfaces.
+
+DPRC (Datapath Resource Container)
+----------------------------------
+
+A DPRC is a container object that holds all the other
+types of DPAA2 objects. In the example diagram below there
+are 8 objects of 5 types (DPMCP, DPIO, DPBP, DPNI, and DPMAC)
+in the container.
+
+::
+
+ +---------------------------------------------------------+
+ | DPRC |
+ | |
+ | +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ |
+ | | DPMCP | | DPIO | | DPBP | | DPNI | | DPMAC | |
+ | +-------+ +-------+ +-------+ +---+---+ +---+---+ |
+ | | DPMCP | | DPIO | |
+ | +-------+ +-------+ |
+ | | DPMCP | |
+ | +-------+ |
+ | |
+ +---------------------------------------------------------+
+
+From the point of view of an OS, a DPRC behaves similar to a plug and
+play bus, like PCI. DPRC commands can be used to enumerate the contents
+of the DPRC, discover the hardware objects present (including mappable
+regions and interrupts).
+
+::
+
+ DPRC.1 (bus)
+ |
+ +--+--------+-------+-------+-------+
+ | | | | |
+ DPMCP.1 DPIO.1 DPBP.1 DPNI.1 DPMAC.1
+ DPMCP.2 DPIO.2
+ DPMCP.3
+
+Hardware objects can be created and destroyed dynamically, providing
+the ability to hot plug/unplug objects in and out of the DPRC.
+
+A DPRC has a mappable MMIO region (an MC portal) that can be used
+to send MC commands. It has an interrupt for status events (like
+hotplug).
+All objects in a container share the same hardware "isolation context".
+This means that with respect to an IOMMU the isolation granularity
+is at the DPRC (container) level, not at the individual object
+level.
+
+DPRCs can be defined statically and populated with objects
+via a config file passed to the MC when firmware starts it.
+
+DPAA2 Objects for an Ethernet Network Interface
+-----------------------------------------------
+
+A typical Ethernet NIC is monolithic-- the NIC device contains TX/RX
+queuing mechanisms, configuration mechanisms, buffer management,
+physical ports, and interrupts. DPAA2 uses a more granular approach
+utilizing multiple hardware objects. Each object provides specialized
+functions. Groups of these objects are used by software to provide
+Ethernet network interface functionality. This approach provides
+efficient use of finite hardware resources, flexibility, and
+performance advantages.
+
+The diagram below shows the objects needed for a simple
+network interface configuration on a system with 2 CPUs.
+
+::
+
+ +---+---+ +---+---+
+ CPU0 CPU1
+ +---+---+ +---+---+
+ | |
+ +---+---+ +---+---+
+ DPIO DPIO
+ +---+---+ +---+---+
+ \ /
+ \ /
+ \ /
+ +---+---+
+ DPNI --- DPBP,DPMCP
+ +---+---+
+ |
+ |
+ +---+---+
+ DPMAC
+ +---+---+
+ |
+ port/PHY
+
+Below the objects are described. For each object a brief description
+is provided along with a summary of the kinds of operations the object
+supports and a summary of key resources of the object (MMIO regions
+and IRQs).
+
+DPMAC (Datapath Ethernet MAC)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Represents an Ethernet MAC, a hardware device that connects to an Ethernet
+PHY and allows physical transmission and reception of Ethernet frames.
+
+- MMIO regions: none
+- IRQs: DPNI link change
+- commands: set link up/down, link config, get stats,
+ IRQ config, enable, reset
+
+DPNI (Datapath Network Interface)
+Contains TX/RX queues, network interface configuration, and RX buffer pool
+configuration mechanisms. The TX/RX queues are in memory and are identified
+by queue number.
+
+- MMIO regions: none
+- IRQs: link state
+- commands: port config, offload config, queue config,
+ parse/classify config, IRQ config, enable, reset
+
+DPIO (Datapath I/O)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Provides interfaces to enqueue and dequeue
+packets and do hardware buffer pool management operations. The DPAA2
+architecture separates the mechanism to access queues (the DPIO object)
+from the queues themselves. The DPIO provides an MMIO interface to
+enqueue/dequeue packets. To enqueue something a descriptor is written
+to the DPIO MMIO region, which includes the target queue number.
+There will typically be one DPIO assigned to each CPU. This allows all
+CPUs to simultaneously perform enqueue/dequeued operations. DPIOs are
+expected to be shared by different DPAA2 drivers.
+
+- MMIO regions: queue operations, buffer management
+- IRQs: data availability, congestion notification, buffer
+ pool depletion
+- commands: IRQ config, enable, reset
+
+DPBP (Datapath Buffer Pool)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Represents a hardware buffer pool.
+
+- MMIO regions: none
+- IRQs: none
+- commands: enable, reset
+
+DPMCP (Datapath MC Portal)
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+Provides an MC command portal.
+Used by drivers to send commands to the MC to manage
+objects.
+
+- MMIO regions: MC command portal
+- IRQs: command completion
+- commands: IRQ config, enable, reset
+
+Object Connections
+==================
+Some objects have explicit relationships that must
+be configured:
+
+- DPNI <--> DPMAC
+- DPNI <--> DPNI
+- DPNI <--> L2-switch-port
+
+ A DPNI must be connected to something such as a DPMAC,
+ another DPNI, or L2 switch port. The DPNI connection
+ is made via a DPRC command.
+
+::
+
+ +-------+ +-------+
+ | DPNI | | DPMAC |
+ +---+---+ +---+---+
+ | |
+ +==========+
+
+- DPNI <--> DPBP
+
+ A network interface requires a 'buffer pool' (DPBP
+ object) which provides a list of pointers to memory
+ where received Ethernet data is to be copied. The
+ Ethernet driver configures the DPBPs associated with
+ the network interface.
+
+Interrupts
+==========
+All interrupts generated by DPAA2 objects are message
+interrupts. At the hardware level message interrupts
+generated by devices will normally have 3 components--
+1) a non-spoofable 'device-id' expressed on the hardware
+bus, 2) an address, 3) a data value.
+
+In the case of DPAA2 devices/objects, all objects in the
+same container/DPRC share the same 'device-id'.
+For ARM-based SoC this is the same as the stream ID.
+
+
+DPAA2 Linux Drivers Overview
+============================
+
+This section provides an overview of the Linux kernel drivers for
+DPAA2-- 1) the bus driver and associated "DPAA2 infrastructure"
+drivers and 2) functional object drivers (such as Ethernet).
+
+As described previously, a DPRC is a container that holds the other
+types of DPAA2 objects. It is functionally similar to a plug-and-play
+bus controller.
+Each object in the DPRC is a Linux "device" and is bound to a driver.
+The diagram below shows the Linux drivers involved in a networking
+scenario and the objects bound to each driver. A brief description
+of each driver follows.
+
+::
+
+ +------------+
+ | OS Network |
+ | Stack |
+ +------------+ +------------+
+ | Allocator |. . . . . . . | Ethernet |
+ |(DPMCP,DPBP)| | (DPNI) |
+ +-.----------+ +---+---+----+
+ . . ^ |
+ . . <data avail, | | <enqueue,
+ . . tx confirm> | | dequeue>
+ +-------------+ . | |
+ | DPRC driver | . +---+---V----+ +---------+
+ | (DPRC) | . . . . . .| DPIO driver| | MAC |
+ +----------+--+ | (DPIO) | | (DPMAC) |
+ | +------+-----+ +-----+---+
+ |<dev add/remove> | |
+ | | |
+ +--------+----------+ | +--+---+
+ | MC-bus driver | | | PHY |
+ | | | |driver|
+ | /bus/fsl-mc | | +--+---+
+ +-------------------+ | |
+ | |
+ ========================= HARDWARE =========|=================|======
+ DPIO |
+ | |
+ DPNI---DPBP |
+ | |
+ DPMAC |
+ | |
+ PHY ---------------+
+ ============================================|========================
+
+A brief description of each driver is provided below.
+
+MC-bus driver
+-------------
+The MC-bus driver is a platform driver and is probed from a
+node in the device tree (compatible "fsl,qoriq-mc") passed in by boot
+firmware. It is responsible for bootstrapping the DPAA2 kernel
+infrastructure.
+Key functions include:
+
+- registering a new bus type named "fsl-mc" with the kernel,
+ and implementing bus call-backs (e.g. match/uevent/dev_groups)
+- implementing APIs for DPAA2 driver registration and for device
+ add/remove
+- creates an MSI IRQ domain
+- doing a 'device add' to expose the 'root' DPRC, in turn triggering
+ a bind of the root DPRC to the DPRC driver
+
+The binding for the MC-bus device-tree node can be consulted at
+*Documentation/devicetree/bindings/misc/fsl,qoriq-mc.txt*.
+The sysfs bind/unbind interfaces for the MC-bus can be consulted at
+*Documentation/ABI/testing/sysfs-bus-fsl-mc*.
+
+DPRC driver
+-----------
+The DPRC driver is bound to DPRC objects and does runtime management
+of a bus instance. It performs the initial bus scan of the DPRC
+and handles interrupts for container events such as hot plug by
+re-scanning the DPRC.
+
+Allocator
+---------
+Certain objects such as DPMCP and DPBP are generic and fungible,
+and are intended to be used by other drivers. For example,
+the DPAA2 Ethernet driver needs:
+
+- DPMCPs to send MC commands, to configure network interfaces
+- DPBPs for network buffer pools
+
+The allocator driver registers for these allocatable object types
+and those objects are bound to the allocator when the bus is probed.
+The allocator maintains a pool of objects that are available for
+allocation by other DPAA2 drivers.
+
+DPIO driver
+-----------
+The DPIO driver is bound to DPIO objects and provides services that allow
+other drivers such as the Ethernet driver to enqueue and dequeue data for
+their respective objects.
+Key services include:
+
+- data availability notifications
+- hardware queuing operations (enqueue and dequeue of data)
+- hardware buffer pool management
+
+To transmit a packet the Ethernet driver puts data on a queue and
+invokes a DPIO API. For receive, the Ethernet driver registers
+a data availability notification callback. To dequeue a packet
+a DPIO API is used.
+There is typically one DPIO object per physical CPU for optimum
+performance, allowing different CPUs to simultaneously enqueue
+and dequeue data.
+
+The DPIO driver operates on behalf of all DPAA2 drivers
+active in the kernel-- Ethernet, crypto, compression,
+etc.
+
+Ethernet driver
+---------------
+The Ethernet driver is bound to a DPNI and implements the kernel
+interfaces needed to connect the DPAA2 network interface to
+the network stack.
+Each DPNI corresponds to a Linux network interface.
+
+MAC driver
+----------
+An Ethernet PHY is an off-chip, board specific component and is managed
+by the appropriate PHY driver via an mdio bus. The MAC driver
+plays a role of being a proxy between the PHY driver and the
+MC. It does this proxy via the MC commands to a DPMAC object.
+If the PHY driver signals a link change, the MAC driver notifies
+the MC via a DPMAC command. If a network interface is brought
+up or down, the MC notifies the DPMAC driver via an interrupt and
+the driver can take appropriate action.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/gianfar.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/gianfar.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9c4a91d38
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/freescale/gianfar.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,51 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===========================
+The Gianfar Ethernet Driver
+===========================
+
+:Author: Andy Fleming <afleming@freescale.com>
+:Updated: 2005-07-28
+
+
+Checksum Offloading
+===================
+
+The eTSEC controller (first included in parts from late 2005 like
+the 8548) has the ability to perform TCP, UDP, and IP checksums
+in hardware. The Linux kernel only offloads the TCP and UDP
+checksums (and always performs the pseudo header checksums), so
+the driver only supports checksumming for TCP/IP and UDP/IP
+packets. Use ethtool to enable or disable this feature for RX
+and TX.
+
+VLAN
+====
+
+In order to use VLAN, please consult Linux documentation on
+configuring VLANs. The gianfar driver supports hardware insertion and
+extraction of VLAN headers, but not filtering. Filtering will be
+done by the kernel.
+
+Multicasting
+============
+
+The gianfar driver supports using the group hash table on the
+TSEC (and the extended hash table on the eTSEC) for multicast
+filtering. On the eTSEC, the exact-match MAC registers are used
+before the hash tables. See Linux documentation on how to join
+multicast groups.
+
+Padding
+=======
+
+The gianfar driver supports padding received frames with 2 bytes
+to align the IP header to a 16-byte boundary, when supported by
+hardware.
+
+Ethtool
+=======
+
+The gianfar driver supports the use of ethtool for many
+configuration options. You must run ethtool only on currently
+open interfaces. See ethtool documentation for details.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/google/gve.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/google/gve.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..793693cef
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/google/gve.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,123 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+==============================================================
+Linux kernel driver for Compute Engine Virtual Ethernet (gve):
+==============================================================
+
+Supported Hardware
+===================
+The GVE driver binds to a single PCI device id used by the virtual
+Ethernet device found in some Compute Engine VMs.
+
++--------------+----------+---------+
+|Field | Value | Comments|
++==============+==========+=========+
+|Vendor ID | `0x1AE0` | Google |
++--------------+----------+---------+
+|Device ID | `0x0042` | |
++--------------+----------+---------+
+|Sub-vendor ID | `0x1AE0` | Google |
++--------------+----------+---------+
+|Sub-device ID | `0x0058` | |
++--------------+----------+---------+
+|Revision ID | `0x0` | |
++--------------+----------+---------+
+|Device Class | `0x200` | Ethernet|
++--------------+----------+---------+
+
+PCI Bars
+========
+The gVNIC PCI device exposes three 32-bit memory BARS:
+- Bar0 - Device configuration and status registers.
+- Bar1 - MSI-X vector table
+- Bar2 - IRQ, RX and TX doorbells
+
+Device Interactions
+===================
+The driver interacts with the device in the following ways:
+ - Registers
+ - A block of MMIO registers
+ - See gve_register.h for more detail
+ - Admin Queue
+ - See description below
+ - Reset
+ - At any time the device can be reset
+ - Interrupts
+ - See supported interrupts below
+ - Transmit and Receive Queues
+ - See description below
+
+Registers
+---------
+All registers are MMIO and big endian.
+
+The registers are used for initializing and configuring the device as well as
+querying device status in response to management interrupts.
+
+Admin Queue (AQ)
+----------------
+The Admin Queue is a PAGE_SIZE memory block, treated as an array of AQ
+commands, used by the driver to issue commands to the device and set up
+resources.The driver and the device maintain a count of how many commands
+have been submitted and executed. To issue AQ commands, the driver must do
+the following (with proper locking):
+
+1) Copy new commands into next available slots in the AQ array
+2) Increment its counter by he number of new commands
+3) Write the counter into the GVE_ADMIN_QUEUE_DOORBELL register
+4) Poll the ADMIN_QUEUE_EVENT_COUNTER register until it equals
+ the value written to the doorbell, or until a timeout.
+
+The device will update the status field in each AQ command reported as
+executed through the ADMIN_QUEUE_EVENT_COUNTER register.
+
+Device Resets
+-------------
+A device reset is triggered by writing 0x0 to the AQ PFN register.
+This causes the device to release all resources allocated by the
+driver, including the AQ itself.
+
+Interrupts
+----------
+The following interrupts are supported by the driver:
+
+Management Interrupt
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+The management interrupt is used by the device to tell the driver to
+look at the GVE_DEVICE_STATUS register.
+
+The handler for the management irq simply queues the service task in
+the workqueue to check the register and acks the irq.
+
+Notification Block Interrupts
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+The notification block interrupts are used to tell the driver to poll
+the queues associated with that interrupt.
+
+The handler for these irqs schedule the napi for that block to run
+and poll the queues.
+
+Traffic Queues
+--------------
+gVNIC's queues are composed of a descriptor ring and a buffer and are
+assigned to a notification block.
+
+The descriptor rings are power-of-two-sized ring buffers consisting of
+fixed-size descriptors. They advance their head pointer using a __be32
+doorbell located in Bar2. The tail pointers are advanced by consuming
+descriptors in-order and updating a __be32 counter. Both the doorbell
+and the counter overflow to zero.
+
+Each queue's buffers must be registered in advance with the device as a
+queue page list, and packet data can only be put in those pages.
+
+Transmit
+~~~~~~~~
+gve maps the buffers for transmit rings into a FIFO and copies the packets
+into the FIFO before sending them to the NIC.
+
+Receive
+~~~~~~~
+The buffers for receive rings are put into a data ring that is the same
+length as the descriptor ring and the head and tail pointers advance over
+the rings together.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/huawei/hinic.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/huawei/hinic.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..867ac8f4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/huawei/hinic.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,128 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+============================================================
+Linux Kernel Driver for Huawei Intelligent NIC(HiNIC) family
+============================================================
+
+Overview:
+=========
+HiNIC is a network interface card for the Data Center Area.
+
+The driver supports a range of link-speed devices (10GbE, 25GbE, 40GbE, etc.).
+The driver supports also a negotiated and extendable feature set.
+
+Some HiNIC devices support SR-IOV. This driver is used for Physical Function
+(PF).
+
+HiNIC devices support MSI-X interrupt vector for each Tx/Rx queue and
+adaptive interrupt moderation.
+
+HiNIC devices support also various offload features such as checksum offload,
+TCP Transmit Segmentation Offload(TSO), Receive-Side Scaling(RSS) and
+LRO(Large Receive Offload).
+
+
+Supported PCI vendor ID/device IDs:
+===================================
+
+19e5:1822 - HiNIC PF
+
+
+Driver Architecture and Source Code:
+====================================
+
+hinic_dev - Implement a Logical Network device that is independent from
+specific HW details about HW data structure formats.
+
+hinic_hwdev - Implement the HW details of the device and include the components
+for accessing the PCI NIC.
+
+hinic_hwdev contains the following components:
+===============================================
+
+HW Interface:
+=============
+
+The interface for accessing the pci device (DMA memory and PCI BARs).
+(hinic_hw_if.c, hinic_hw_if.h)
+
+Configuration Status Registers Area that describes the HW Registers on the
+configuration and status BAR0. (hinic_hw_csr.h)
+
+MGMT components:
+================
+
+Asynchronous Event Queues(AEQs) - The event queues for receiving messages from
+the MGMT modules on the cards. (hinic_hw_eqs.c, hinic_hw_eqs.h)
+
+Application Programmable Interface commands(API CMD) - Interface for sending
+MGMT commands to the card. (hinic_hw_api_cmd.c, hinic_hw_api_cmd.h)
+
+Management (MGMT) - the PF to MGMT channel that uses API CMD for sending MGMT
+commands to the card and receives notifications from the MGMT modules on the
+card by AEQs. Also set the addresses of the IO CMDQs in HW.
+(hinic_hw_mgmt.c, hinic_hw_mgmt.h)
+
+IO components:
+==============
+
+Completion Event Queues(CEQs) - The completion Event Queues that describe IO
+tasks that are finished. (hinic_hw_eqs.c, hinic_hw_eqs.h)
+
+Work Queues(WQ) - Contain the memory and operations for use by CMD queues and
+the Queue Pairs. The WQ is a Memory Block in a Page. The Block contains
+pointers to Memory Areas that are the Memory for the Work Queue Elements(WQEs).
+(hinic_hw_wq.c, hinic_hw_wq.h)
+
+Command Queues(CMDQ) - The queues for sending commands for IO management and is
+used to set the QPs addresses in HW. The commands completion events are
+accumulated on the CEQ that is configured to receive the CMDQ completion events.
+(hinic_hw_cmdq.c, hinic_hw_cmdq.h)
+
+Queue Pairs(QPs) - The HW Receive and Send queues for Receiving and Transmitting
+Data. (hinic_hw_qp.c, hinic_hw_qp.h, hinic_hw_qp_ctxt.h)
+
+IO - de/constructs all the IO components. (hinic_hw_io.c, hinic_hw_io.h)
+
+HW device:
+==========
+
+HW device - de/constructs the HW Interface, the MGMT components on the
+initialization of the driver and the IO components on the case of Interface
+UP/DOWN Events. (hinic_hw_dev.c, hinic_hw_dev.h)
+
+
+hinic_dev contains the following components:
+===============================================
+
+PCI ID table - Contains the supported PCI Vendor/Device IDs.
+(hinic_pci_tbl.h)
+
+Port Commands - Send commands to the HW device for port management
+(MAC, Vlan, MTU, ...). (hinic_port.c, hinic_port.h)
+
+Tx Queues - Logical Tx Queues that use the HW Send Queues for transmit.
+The Logical Tx queue is not dependent on the format of the HW Send Queue.
+(hinic_tx.c, hinic_tx.h)
+
+Rx Queues - Logical Rx Queues that use the HW Receive Queues for receive.
+The Logical Rx queue is not dependent on the format of the HW Receive Queue.
+(hinic_rx.c, hinic_rx.h)
+
+hinic_dev - de/constructs the Logical Tx and Rx Queues.
+(hinic_main.c, hinic_dev.h)
+
+
+Miscellaneous
+=============
+
+Common functions that are used by HW and Logical Device.
+(hinic_common.c, hinic_common.h)
+
+
+Support
+=======
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue to
+aviad.krawczyk@huawei.com.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..cbb75a181
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,60 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+Ethernet Device Drivers
+=======================
+
+Device drivers for Ethernet and Ethernet-based virtual function devices.
+
+Contents:
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 2
+
+ 3com/3c509
+ 3com/vortex
+ amazon/ena
+ altera/altera_tse
+ aquantia/atlantic
+ chelsio/cxgb
+ cirrus/cs89x0
+ dlink/dl2k
+ davicom/dm9000
+ dec/de4x5
+ dec/dmfe
+ freescale/dpaa
+ freescale/dpaa2/index
+ freescale/gianfar
+ google/gve
+ huawei/hinic
+ intel/e100
+ intel/e1000
+ intel/e1000e
+ intel/fm10k
+ intel/igb
+ intel/igbvf
+ intel/ixgb
+ intel/ixgbe
+ intel/ixgbevf
+ intel/i40e
+ intel/iavf
+ intel/ice
+ marvell/octeontx2
+ mellanox/mlx5
+ microsoft/netvsc
+ neterion/s2io
+ neterion/vxge
+ netronome/nfp
+ pensando/ionic
+ smsc/smc9
+ stmicro/stmmac
+ ti/cpsw
+ ti/cpsw_switchdev
+ ti/tlan
+ toshiba/spider_net
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e100.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e100.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..3d4a9ba21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e100.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,188 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+=============================================================
+Linux Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of Adapters
+=============================================================
+
+June 1, 2018
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- In This Release
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Building and Installation
+- Driver Configuration Parameters
+- Additional Configurations
+- Known Issues
+- Support
+
+
+In This Release
+===============
+
+This file describes the Linux Base Driver for the Intel(R) PRO/100 Family of
+Adapters. This driver includes support for Itanium(R)2-based systems.
+
+For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
+supplied with your Intel PRO/100 adapter.
+
+The following features are now available in supported kernels:
+ - Native VLANs
+ - Channel Bonding (teaming)
+ - SNMP
+
+Channel Bonding documentation can be found in the Linux kernel source:
+/Documentation/networking/bonding.rst
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel
+network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+Driver Configuration Parameters
+===============================
+
+The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting,
+unless otherwise noted.
+
+Rx Descriptors:
+ Number of receive descriptors. A receive descriptor is a data
+ structure that describes a receive buffer and its attributes to the network
+ controller. The data in the descriptor is used by the controller to write
+ data from the controller to host memory. In the 3.x.x driver the valid range
+ for this parameter is 64-256. The default value is 256. This parameter can be
+ changed using the command::
+
+ ethtool -G eth? rx n
+
+ Where n is the number of desired Rx descriptors.
+
+Tx Descriptors:
+ Number of transmit descriptors. A transmit descriptor is a data
+ structure that describes a transmit buffer and its attributes to the network
+ controller. The data in the descriptor is used by the controller to read
+ data from the host memory to the controller. In the 3.x.x driver the valid
+ range for this parameter is 64-256. The default value is 128. This parameter
+ can be changed using the command::
+
+ ethtool -G eth? tx n
+
+ Where n is the number of desired Tx descriptors.
+
+Speed/Duplex:
+ The driver auto-negotiates the link speed and duplex settings by
+ default. The ethtool utility can be used as follows to force speed/duplex.::
+
+ ethtool -s eth? autoneg off speed {10|100} duplex {full|half}
+
+ NOTE: setting the speed/duplex to incorrect values will cause the link to
+ fail.
+
+Event Log Message Level:
+ The driver uses the message level flag to log events
+ to syslog. The message level can be set at driver load time. It can also be
+ set using the command::
+
+ ethtool -s eth? msglvl n
+
+
+Additional Configurations
+=========================
+
+Configuring the Driver on Different Distributions
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+Configuring a network driver to load properly when the system is started
+is distribution dependent. Typically, the configuration process involves
+adding an alias line to `/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf` as well as editing other
+system startup scripts and/or configuration files. Many popular Linux
+distributions ship with tools to make these changes for you. To learn
+the proper way to configure a network device for your system, refer to
+your distribution documentation. If during this process you are asked
+for the driver or module name, the name for the Linux Base Driver for
+the Intel PRO/100 Family of Adapters is e100.
+
+As an example, if you install the e100 driver for two PRO/100 adapters
+(eth0 and eth1), add the following to a configuration file in
+/etc/modprobe.d/::
+
+ alias eth0 e100
+ alias eth1 e100
+
+Viewing Link Messages
+---------------------
+
+In order to see link messages and other Intel driver information on your
+console, you must set the dmesg level up to six. This can be done by
+entering the following on the command line before loading the e100
+driver::
+
+ dmesg -n 6
+
+If you wish to see all messages issued by the driver, including debug
+messages, set the dmesg level to eight.
+
+NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots.
+
+ethtool
+-------
+
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool
+version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality.
+
+The latest release of ethtool can be found from
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+Enabling Wake on LAN (WoL)
+--------------------------
+WoL is provided through the ethtool utility. For instructions on
+enabling WoL with ethtool, refer to the ethtool man page. WoL will be
+enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For this
+driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e100 driver must be loaded
+when shutting down or rebooting the system.
+
+NAPI
+----
+
+NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the e100 driver.
+
+See https://wiki.linuxfoundation.org/networking/napi for more
+information on NAPI.
+
+Multiple Interfaces on Same Ethernet Broadcast Network
+------------------------------------------------------
+
+Due to the default ARP behavior on Linux, it is not possible to have one
+system on two IP networks in the same Ethernet broadcast domain
+(non-partitioned switch) behave as expected. All Ethernet interfaces
+will respond to IP traffic for any IP address assigned to the system.
+This results in unbalanced receive traffic.
+
+If you have multiple interfaces in a server, either turn on ARP
+filtering by
+
+(1) entering::
+
+ echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/arp_filter
+
+ (this only works if your kernel's version is higher than 2.4.5), or
+
+(2) installing the interfaces in separate broadcast domains (either
+ in different switches or in a switch partitioned to VLANs).
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4aaae0f7d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,463 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+==========================================================
+Linux Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
+==========================================================
+
+Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999 - 2013 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Command Line Parameters
+- Speed and Duplex Configuration
+- Additional Configurations
+- Support
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+
+For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter &
+Driver ID Guide at:
+
+ http://support.intel.com/support/go/network/adapter/idguide.htm
+
+For the latest Intel network drivers for Linux, refer to the following
+website. In the search field, enter your adapter name or type, or use the
+networking link on the left to search for your adapter:
+
+ http://support.intel.com/support/go/network/adapter/home.htm
+
+Command Line Parameters
+=======================
+
+The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting,
+unless otherwise noted.
+
+NOTES:
+ For more information about the AutoNeg, Duplex, and Speed
+ parameters, see the "Speed and Duplex Configuration" section in
+ this document.
+
+ For more information about the InterruptThrottleRate,
+ RxIntDelay, TxIntDelay, RxAbsIntDelay, and TxAbsIntDelay
+ parameters, see the application note at:
+ http://www.intel.com/design/network/applnots/ap450.htm
+
+AutoNeg
+-------
+
+(Supported only on adapters with copper connections)
+
+:Valid Range: 0x01-0x0F, 0x20-0x2F
+:Default Value: 0x2F
+
+This parameter is a bit-mask that specifies the speed and duplex settings
+advertised by the adapter. When this parameter is used, the Speed and
+Duplex parameters must not be specified.
+
+NOTE:
+ Refer to the Speed and Duplex section of this readme for more
+ information on the AutoNeg parameter.
+
+Duplex
+------
+
+(Supported only on adapters with copper connections)
+
+:Valid Range: 0-2 (0=auto-negotiate, 1=half, 2=full)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This defines the direction in which data is allowed to flow. Can be
+either one or two-directional. If both Duplex and the link partner are
+set to auto-negotiate, the board auto-detects the correct duplex. If the
+link partner is forced (either full or half), Duplex defaults to half-
+duplex.
+
+FlowControl
+-----------
+
+:Valid Range: 0-3 (0=none, 1=Rx only, 2=Tx only, 3=Rx&Tx)
+:Default Value: Reads flow control settings from the EEPROM
+
+This parameter controls the automatic generation(Tx) and response(Rx)
+to Ethernet PAUSE frames.
+
+InterruptThrottleRate
+---------------------
+
+(not supported on Intel(R) 82542, 82543 or 82544-based adapters)
+
+:Valid Range:
+ 0,1,3,4,100-100000 (0=off, 1=dynamic, 3=dynamic conservative,
+ 4=simplified balancing)
+:Default Value: 3
+
+The driver can limit the amount of interrupts per second that the adapter
+will generate for incoming packets. It does this by writing a value to the
+adapter that is based on the maximum amount of interrupts that the adapter
+will generate per second.
+
+Setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value greater or equal to 100
+will program the adapter to send out a maximum of that many interrupts
+per second, even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt
+load on the system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load,
+but will increase latency as packets are not processed as quickly.
+
+The default behaviour of the driver previously assumed a static
+InterruptThrottleRate value of 8000, providing a good fallback value for
+all traffic types,but lacking in small packet performance and latency.
+The hardware can handle many more small packets per second however, and
+for this reason an adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm was implemented.
+
+Since 7.3.x, the driver has two adaptive modes (setting 1 or 3) in which
+it dynamically adjusts the InterruptThrottleRate value based on the traffic
+that it receives. After determining the type of incoming traffic in the last
+timeframe, it will adjust the InterruptThrottleRate to an appropriate value
+for that traffic.
+
+The algorithm classifies the incoming traffic every interval into
+classes. Once the class is determined, the InterruptThrottleRate value is
+adjusted to suit that traffic type the best. There are three classes defined:
+"Bulk traffic", for large amounts of packets of normal size; "Low latency",
+for small amounts of traffic and/or a significant percentage of small
+packets; and "Lowest latency", for almost completely small packets or
+minimal traffic.
+
+In dynamic conservative mode, the InterruptThrottleRate value is set to 4000
+for traffic that falls in class "Bulk traffic". If traffic falls in the "Low
+latency" or "Lowest latency" class, the InterruptThrottleRate is increased
+stepwise to 20000. This default mode is suitable for most applications.
+
+For situations where low latency is vital such as cluster or
+grid computing, the algorithm can reduce latency even more when
+InterruptThrottleRate is set to mode 1. In this mode, which operates
+the same as mode 3, the InterruptThrottleRate will be increased stepwise to
+70000 for traffic in class "Lowest latency".
+
+In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and
+RX traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the
+interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second. If the
+traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could
+be as high as 8000.
+
+Setting InterruptThrottleRate to 0 turns off any interrupt moderation
+and may improve small packet latency, but is generally not suitable
+for bulk throughput traffic.
+
+NOTE:
+ InterruptThrottleRate takes precedence over the TxAbsIntDelay and
+ RxAbsIntDelay parameters. In other words, minimizing the receive
+ and/or transmit absolute delays does not force the controller to
+ generate more interrupts than what the Interrupt Throttle Rate
+ allows.
+
+CAUTION:
+ If you are using the Intel(R) PRO/1000 CT Network Connection
+ (controller 82547), setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value
+ greater than 75,000, may hang (stop transmitting) adapters
+ under certain network conditions. If this occurs a NETDEV
+ WATCHDOG message is logged in the system event log. In
+ addition, the controller is automatically reset, restoring
+ the network connection. To eliminate the potential for the
+ hang, ensure that InterruptThrottleRate is set no greater
+ than 75,000 and is not set to 0.
+
+NOTE:
+ When e1000 is loaded with default settings and multiple adapters
+ are in use simultaneously, the CPU utilization may increase non-
+ linearly. In order to limit the CPU utilization without impacting
+ the overall throughput, we recommend that you load the driver as
+ follows::
+
+ modprobe e1000 InterruptThrottleRate=3000,3000,3000
+
+ This sets the InterruptThrottleRate to 3000 interrupts/sec for
+ the first, second, and third instances of the driver. The range
+ of 2000 to 3000 interrupts per second works on a majority of
+ systems and is a good starting point, but the optimal value will
+ be platform-specific. If CPU utilization is not a concern, use
+ RX_POLLING (NAPI) and default driver settings.
+
+RxDescriptors
+-------------
+
+:Valid Range:
+ - 48-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters
+ - 48-4096 for all other supported adapters
+:Default Value: 256
+
+This value specifies the number of receive buffer descriptors allocated
+by the driver. Increasing this value allows the driver to buffer more
+incoming packets, at the expense of increased system memory utilization.
+
+Each descriptor is 16 bytes. A receive buffer is also allocated for each
+descriptor and can be either 2048, 4096, 8192, or 16384 bytes, depending
+on the MTU setting. The maximum MTU size is 16110.
+
+NOTE:
+ MTU designates the frame size. It only needs to be set for Jumbo
+ Frames. Depending on the available system resources, the request
+ for a higher number of receive descriptors may be denied. In this
+ case, use a lower number.
+
+RxIntDelay
+----------
+
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of 1.024
+microseconds. Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU efficiency if
+properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing this value adds
+extra latency to frame reception and can end up decreasing the throughput
+of TCP traffic. If the system is reporting dropped receives, this value
+may be set too high, causing the driver to run out of available receive
+descriptors.
+
+CAUTION:
+ When setting RxIntDelay to a value other than 0, adapters may
+ hang (stop transmitting) under certain network conditions. If
+ this occurs a NETDEV WATCHDOG message is logged in the system
+ event log. In addition, the controller is automatically reset,
+ restoring the network connection. To eliminate the potential
+ for the hang ensure that RxIntDelay is set to 0.
+
+RxAbsIntDelay
+-------------
+
+(This parameter is supported only on 82540, 82545 and later adapters.)
+
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 128
+
+This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a
+receive interrupt is generated. Useful only if RxIntDelay is non-zero,
+this value ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial
+packet is received within the set amount of time. Proper tuning,
+along with RxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific network
+conditions.
+
+Speed
+-----
+
+(This parameter is supported only on adapters with copper connections.)
+
+:Valid Settings: 0, 10, 100, 1000
+:Default Value: 0 (auto-negotiate at all supported speeds)
+
+Speed forces the line speed to the specified value in megabits per second
+(Mbps). If this parameter is not specified or is set to 0 and the link
+partner is set to auto-negotiate, the board will auto-detect the correct
+speed. Duplex should also be set when Speed is set to either 10 or 100.
+
+TxDescriptors
+-------------
+
+:Valid Range:
+ - 48-256 for 82542 and 82543-based adapters
+ - 48-4096 for all other supported adapters
+:Default Value: 256
+
+This value is the number of transmit descriptors allocated by the driver.
+Increasing this value allows the driver to queue more transmits. Each
+descriptor is 16 bytes.
+
+NOTE:
+ Depending on the available system resources, the request for a
+ higher number of transmit descriptors may be denied. In this case,
+ use a lower number.
+
+TxIntDelay
+----------
+
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 8
+
+This value delays the generation of transmit interrupts in units of
+1.024 microseconds. Transmit interrupt reduction can improve CPU
+efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic. If the
+system is reporting dropped transmits, this value may be set too high
+causing the driver to run out of available transmit descriptors.
+
+TxAbsIntDelay
+-------------
+
+(This parameter is supported only on 82540, 82545 and later adapters.)
+
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 32
+
+This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a
+transmit interrupt is generated. Useful only if TxIntDelay is non-zero,
+this value ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial
+packet is sent on the wire within the set amount of time. Proper tuning,
+along with TxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific
+network conditions.
+
+XsumRX
+------
+
+(This parameter is NOT supported on the 82542-based adapter.)
+
+:Valid Range: 0-1
+:Default Value: 1
+
+A value of '1' indicates that the driver should enable IP checksum
+offload for received packets (both UDP and TCP) to the adapter hardware.
+
+Copybreak
+---------
+
+:Valid Range: 0-xxxxxxx (0=off)
+:Default Value: 256
+:Usage: modprobe e1000.ko copybreak=128
+
+Driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh RX
+buffer before handing it up the stack.
+
+This parameter is different than other parameters, in that it is a
+single (not 1,1,1 etc.) parameter applied to all driver instances and
+it is also available during runtime at
+/sys/module/e1000/parameters/copybreak
+
+SmartPowerDownEnable
+--------------------
+
+:Valid Range: 0-1
+:Default Value: 0 (disabled)
+
+Allows PHY to turn off in lower power states. The user can turn off
+this parameter in supported chipsets.
+
+Speed and Duplex Configuration
+==============================
+
+Three keywords are used to control the speed and duplex configuration.
+These keywords are Speed, Duplex, and AutoNeg.
+
+If the board uses a fiber interface, these keywords are ignored, and the
+fiber interface board only links at 1000 Mbps full-duplex.
+
+For copper-based boards, the keywords interact as follows:
+
+- The default operation is auto-negotiate. The board advertises all
+ supported speed and duplex combinations, and it links at the highest
+ common speed and duplex mode IF the link partner is set to auto-negotiate.
+
+- If Speed = 1000, limited auto-negotiation is enabled and only 1000 Mbps
+ is advertised (The 1000BaseT spec requires auto-negotiation.)
+
+- If Speed = 10 or 100, then both Speed and Duplex should be set. Auto-
+ negotiation is disabled, and the AutoNeg parameter is ignored. Partner
+ SHOULD also be forced.
+
+The AutoNeg parameter is used when more control is required over the
+auto-negotiation process. It should be used when you wish to control which
+speed and duplex combinations are advertised during the auto-negotiation
+process.
+
+The parameter may be specified as either a decimal or hexadecimal value as
+determined by the bitmap below.
+
+============== ====== ====== ======= ======= ====== ====== ======= ======
+Bit position 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
+Decimal Value 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
+Hex value 80 40 20 10 8 4 2 1
+Speed (Mbps) N/A N/A 1000 N/A 100 100 10 10
+Duplex Full Full Half Full Half
+============== ====== ====== ======= ======= ====== ====== ======= ======
+
+Some examples of using AutoNeg::
+
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x01 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Half)
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=1 (Same as above)
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x02 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Full)
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x03 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Half or 10 Full)
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x04 (Restricts autonegotiation to 100 Half)
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x05 (Restricts autonegotiation to 10 Half or 100
+ Half)
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=0x020 (Restricts autonegotiation to 1000 Full)
+ modprobe e1000 AutoNeg=32 (Same as above)
+
+Note that when this parameter is used, Speed and Duplex must not be specified.
+
+If the link partner is forced to a specific speed and duplex, then this
+parameter should not be used. Instead, use the Speed and Duplex parameters
+previously mentioned to force the adapter to the same speed and duplex.
+
+Additional Configurations
+=========================
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+
+ Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than
+ the default of 1500. Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size.
+ For example::
+
+ ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up
+
+ This setting is not saved across reboots. It can be made permanent if
+ you add::
+
+ MTU=9000
+
+ to the file /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x>. This example
+ applies to the Red Hat distributions; other distributions may store this
+ setting in a different location.
+
+Notes:
+ Degradation in throughput performance may be observed in some Jumbo frames
+ environments. If this is observed, increasing the application's socket buffer
+ size and/or increasing the /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_*mem entry values may help.
+ See the specific application manual and /usr/src/linux*/Documentation/
+ networking/ip-sysctl.txt for more details.
+
+ - The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 16110. This value coincides
+ with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 16128.
+
+ - Using Jumbo frames at 10 or 100 Mbps is not supported and may result in
+ poor performance or loss of link.
+
+ - Adapters based on the Intel(R) 82542 and 82573V/E controller do not
+ support Jumbo Frames. These correspond to the following product names::
+
+ Intel(R) PRO/1000 Gigabit Server Adapter
+ Intel(R) PRO/1000 PM Network Connection
+
+ethtool
+-------
+
+ The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+ diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool
+ version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality.
+
+ The latest release of ethtool can be found from
+ https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+Enabling Wake on LAN (WoL)
+--------------------------
+
+ WoL is configured through the ethtool utility.
+
+ WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot.
+ For this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000 driver must be
+ loaded when shutting down or rebooting the system.
+
+Support
+=======
+
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+ http://support.intel.com
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+ http://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported
+kernel with a supported adapter, email the specific information related
+to the issue to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000e.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000e.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..f49cd370e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/e1000e.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,383 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+=====================================================
+Linux Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
+=====================================================
+
+Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 2008-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Command Line Parameters
+- Additional Configurations
+- Support
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel
+network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+
+Command Line Parameters
+=======================
+If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are used
+by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using this
+syntax::
+
+ modprobe e1000e [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...]
+
+There needs to be a <VAL#> for each network port in the system supported by
+this driver. The values will be applied to each instance, in function order.
+For example::
+
+ modprobe e1000e InterruptThrottleRate=16000,16000
+
+In this case, there are two network ports supported by e1000e in the system.
+The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting,
+unless otherwise noted.
+
+NOTE: A descriptor describes a data buffer and attributes related to the data
+buffer. This information is accessed by the hardware.
+
+InterruptThrottleRate
+---------------------
+:Valid Range: 0,1,3,4,100-100000
+:Default Value: 3
+
+Interrupt Throttle Rate controls the number of interrupts each interrupt
+vector can generate per second. Increasing ITR lowers latency at the cost of
+increased CPU utilization, though it may help throughput in some circumstances.
+
+Setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value greater or equal to 100
+will program the adapter to send out a maximum of that many interrupts
+per second, even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt
+load on the system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load,
+but will increase latency as packets are not processed as quickly.
+
+The default behaviour of the driver previously assumed a static
+InterruptThrottleRate value of 8000, providing a good fallback value for
+all traffic types, but lacking in small packet performance and latency.
+The hardware can handle many more small packets per second however, and
+for this reason an adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm was implemented.
+
+The driver has two adaptive modes (setting 1 or 3) in which
+it dynamically adjusts the InterruptThrottleRate value based on the traffic
+that it receives. After determining the type of incoming traffic in the last
+timeframe, it will adjust the InterruptThrottleRate to an appropriate value
+for that traffic.
+
+The algorithm classifies the incoming traffic every interval into
+classes. Once the class is determined, the InterruptThrottleRate value is
+adjusted to suit that traffic type the best. There are three classes defined:
+"Bulk traffic", for large amounts of packets of normal size; "Low latency",
+for small amounts of traffic and/or a significant percentage of small
+packets; and "Lowest latency", for almost completely small packets or
+minimal traffic.
+
+ - 0: Off
+ Turns off any interrupt moderation and may improve small packet latency.
+ However, this is generally not suitable for bulk throughput traffic due
+ to the increased CPU utilization of the higher interrupt rate.
+ - 1: Dynamic mode
+ This mode attempts to moderate interrupts per vector while maintaining
+ very low latency. This can sometimes cause extra CPU utilization. If
+ planning on deploying e1000e in a latency sensitive environment, this
+ parameter should be considered.
+ - 3: Dynamic Conservative mode (default)
+ In dynamic conservative mode, the InterruptThrottleRate value is set to
+ 4000 for traffic that falls in class "Bulk traffic". If traffic falls in
+ the "Low latency" or "Lowest latency" class, the InterruptThrottleRate is
+ increased stepwise to 20000. This default mode is suitable for most
+ applications.
+ - 4: Simplified Balancing mode
+ In simplified mode the interrupt rate is based on the ratio of TX and
+ RX traffic. If the bytes per second rate is approximately equal, the
+ interrupt rate will drop as low as 2000 interrupts per second. If the
+ traffic is mostly transmit or mostly receive, the interrupt rate could
+ be as high as 8000.
+ - 100-100000:
+ Setting InterruptThrottleRate to a value greater or equal to 100
+ will program the adapter to send at most that many interrupts per second,
+ even if more packets have come in. This reduces interrupt load on the
+ system and can lower CPU utilization under heavy load, but will increase
+ latency as packets are not processed as quickly.
+
+NOTE: InterruptThrottleRate takes precedence over the TxAbsIntDelay and
+RxAbsIntDelay parameters. In other words, minimizing the receive and/or
+transmit absolute delays does not force the controller to generate more
+interrupts than what the Interrupt Throttle Rate allows.
+
+RxIntDelay
+----------
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of 1.024
+microseconds. Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU efficiency if
+properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing this value adds extra
+latency to frame reception and can end up decreasing the throughput of TCP
+traffic. If the system is reporting dropped receives, this value may be set
+too high, causing the driver to run out of available receive descriptors.
+
+CAUTION: When setting RxIntDelay to a value other than 0, adapters may hang
+(stop transmitting) under certain network conditions. If this occurs a NETDEV
+WATCHDOG message is logged in the system event log. In addition, the
+controller is automatically reset, restoring the network connection. To
+eliminate the potential for the hang ensure that RxIntDelay is set to 0.
+
+RxAbsIntDelay
+-------------
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 8
+
+This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a
+receive interrupt is generated. This value ensures that an interrupt is
+generated after the initial packet is received within the set amount of time,
+which is useful only if RxIntDelay is non-zero. Proper tuning, along with
+RxIntDelay, may improve traffic throughput in specific network conditions.
+
+TxIntDelay
+----------
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 8
+
+This value delays the generation of transmit interrupts in units of 1.024
+microseconds. Transmit interrupt reduction can improve CPU efficiency if
+properly tuned for specific network traffic. If the system is reporting
+dropped transmits, this value may be set too high causing the driver to run
+out of available transmit descriptors.
+
+TxAbsIntDelay
+-------------
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 32
+
+This value, in units of 1.024 microseconds, limits the delay in which a
+transmit interrupt is generated. It is useful only if TxIntDelay is non-zero.
+It ensures that an interrupt is generated after the initial Packet is sent on
+the wire within the set amount of time. Proper tuning, along with TxIntDelay,
+may improve traffic throughput in specific network conditions.
+
+copybreak
+---------
+:Valid Range: 0-xxxxxxx (0=off)
+:Default Value: 256
+
+The driver copies all packets below or equaling this size to a fresh receive
+buffer before handing it up the stack.
+This parameter differs from other parameters because it is a single (not 1,1,1
+etc.) parameter applied to all driver instances and it is also available
+during runtime at /sys/module/e1000e/parameters/copybreak.
+
+To use copybreak, type::
+
+ modprobe e1000e.ko copybreak=128
+
+SmartPowerDownEnable
+--------------------
+:Valid Range: 0,1
+:Default Value: 0 (disabled)
+
+Allows the PHY to turn off in lower power states. The user can turn off this
+parameter in supported chipsets.
+
+KumeranLockLoss
+---------------
+:Valid Range: 0,1
+:Default Value: 1 (enabled)
+
+This workaround skips resetting the PHY at shutdown for the initial silicon
+releases of ICH8 systems.
+
+IntMode
+-------
+:Valid Range: 0-2
+:Default Value: 0
+
+ +-------+----------------+
+ | Value | Interrupt Mode |
+ +=======+================+
+ | 0 | Legacy |
+ +-------+----------------+
+ | 1 | MSI |
+ +-------+----------------+
+ | 2 | MSI-X |
+ +-------+----------------+
+
+IntMode allows load time control over the type of interrupt registered for by
+the driver. MSI-X is required for multiple queue support, and some kernels and
+combinations of kernel .config options will force a lower level of interrupt
+support.
+
+This command will show different values for each type of interrupt::
+
+ cat /proc/interrupts
+
+CrcStripping
+------------
+:Valid Range: 0,1
+:Default Value: 1 (enabled)
+
+Strip the CRC from received packets before sending up the network stack. If
+you have a machine with a BMC enabled but cannot receive IPMI traffic after
+loading or enabling the driver, try disabling this feature.
+
+WriteProtectNVM
+---------------
+:Valid Range: 0,1
+:Default Value: 1 (enabled)
+
+If set to 1, configure the hardware to ignore all write/erase cycles to the
+GbE region in the ICHx NVM (in order to prevent accidental corruption of the
+NVM). This feature can be disabled by setting the parameter to 0 during initial
+driver load.
+
+NOTE: The machine must be power cycled (full off/on) when enabling NVM writes
+via setting the parameter to zero. Once the NVM has been locked (via the
+parameter at 1 when the driver loads) it cannot be unlocked except via power
+cycle.
+
+Debug
+-----
+:Valid Range: 0-16 (0=none,...,16=all)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This parameter adjusts the level of debug messages displayed in the system logs.
+
+
+Additional Features and Configurations
+======================================
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
+to a value larger than the default value of 1500.
+
+Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the
+following where <x> is the interface number::
+
+ ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up
+
+Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows::
+
+ ip link set mtu 9000 dev eth<x>
+ ip link set up dev eth<x>
+
+This setting is not saved across reboots. The setting change can be made
+permanent by adding 'MTU=9000' to the file:
+
+- For RHEL: /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x>
+- For SLES: /etc/sysconfig/network/<config_file>
+
+NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 8996. This value coincides
+with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9018 bytes.
+
+NOTE: Using Jumbo frames at 10 or 100 Mbps is not supported and may result in
+poor performance or loss of link.
+
+NOTE: The following adapters limit Jumbo Frames sized packets to a maximum of
+4088 bytes:
+
+ - Intel(R) 82578DM Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82577LM Gigabit Network Connection
+
+The following adapters do not support Jumbo Frames:
+
+ - Intel(R) PRO/1000 Gigabit Server Adapter
+ - Intel(R) PRO/1000 PM Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82562G 10/100 Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82562G-2 10/100 Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82562GT 10/100 Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82562GT-2 10/100 Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82562V 10/100 Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82562V-2 10/100 Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82566DC Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82566DC-2 Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82566DM Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82566MC Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82566MM Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82567V-3 Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82577LC Gigabit Network Connection
+ - Intel(R) 82578DC Gigabit Network Connection
+
+NOTE: Jumbo Frames cannot be configured on an 82579-based Network device if
+MACSec is enabled on the system.
+
+
+ethtool
+-------
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool
+version is required for this functionality. Download it at:
+
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+NOTE: When validating enable/disable tests on some parts (for example, 82578),
+it is necessary to add a few seconds between tests when working with ethtool.
+
+
+Speed and Duplex Configuration
+------------------------------
+In addressing speed and duplex configuration issues, you need to distinguish
+between copper-based adapters and fiber-based adapters.
+
+In the default mode, an Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter using copper
+connections will attempt to auto-negotiate with its link partner to determine
+the best setting. If the adapter cannot establish link with the link partner
+using auto-negotiation, you may need to manually configure the adapter and link
+partner to identical settings to establish link and pass packets. This should
+only be needed when attempting to link with an older switch that does not
+support auto-negotiation or one that has been forced to a specific speed or
+duplex mode. Your link partner must match the setting you choose. 1 Gbps speeds
+and higher cannot be forced. Use the autonegotiation advertising setting to
+manually set devices for 1 Gbps and higher.
+
+Speed, duplex, and autonegotiation advertising are configured through the
+ethtool utility.
+
+Caution: Only experienced network administrators should force speed and duplex
+or change autonegotiation advertising manually. The settings at the switch must
+always match the adapter settings. Adapter performance may suffer or your
+adapter may not operate if you configure the adapter differently from your
+switch.
+
+An Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter using fiber-based connections, however,
+will not attempt to auto-negotiate with its link partner since those adapters
+operate only in full duplex and only at their native speed.
+
+
+Enabling Wake on LAN (WoL)
+--------------------------
+WoL is configured through the ethtool utility.
+
+WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For
+this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the e1000e driver must be loaded
+prior to shutting down or suspending the system.
+
+NOTE: Wake on LAN is only supported on port A for the following devices:
+- Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Network Connection
+- Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Server Connection
+- Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Dual Port Server Adapter
+- Intel(R) PRO/1000 PF Dual Port Server Adapter
+- Intel(R) PRO/1000 PT Quad Port Server Adapter
+- Intel(R) Gigabit PT Quad Port Server ExpressModule
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/fm10k.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/fm10k.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9258ef6f5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/fm10k.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,142 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+=============================================================
+Linux Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Multi-host Controller
+=============================================================
+
+August 20, 2018
+Copyright(c) 2015-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Additional Configurations
+- Performance Tuning
+- Known Issues
+- Support
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+The driver in this release is compatible with devices based on the Intel(R)
+Ethernet Multi-host Controller.
+
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel
+network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+
+Flow Control
+------------
+The Intel(R) Ethernet Switch Host Interface Driver does not support Flow
+Control. It will not send pause frames. This may result in dropped frames.
+
+
+Virtual Functions (VFs)
+-----------------------
+Use sysfs to enable VFs.
+Valid Range: 0-64
+
+For example::
+
+ echo $num_vf_enabled > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs //enable VFs
+ echo 0 > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs //disable VFs
+
+NOTE: Neither the device nor the driver control how VFs are mapped into config
+space. Bus layout will vary by operating system. On operating systems that
+support it, you can check sysfs to find the mapping.
+
+NOTE: When SR-IOV mode is enabled, hardware VLAN filtering and VLAN tag
+stripping/insertion will remain enabled. Please remove the old VLAN filter
+before the new VLAN filter is added. For example::
+
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 100 // set vlan 100 for VF 0
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 0 // Delete vlan 100
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 200 // set a new vlan 200 for VF 0
+
+
+Additional Features and Configurations
+======================================
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
+to a value larger than the default value of 1500.
+
+Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the
+following where <x> is the interface number::
+
+ ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up
+
+Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows::
+
+ ip link set mtu 9000 dev eth<x>
+ ip link set up dev eth<x>
+
+This setting is not saved across reboots. The setting change can be made
+permanent by adding 'MTU=9000' to the file:
+
+- For RHEL: /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x>
+- For SLES: /etc/sysconfig/network/<config_file>
+
+NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 15342. This value coincides
+with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 15364 bytes.
+
+NOTE: This driver will attempt to use multiple page sized buffers to receive
+each jumbo packet. This should help to avoid buffer starvation issues when
+allocating receive packets.
+
+
+Generic Receive Offload, aka GRO
+--------------------------------
+The driver supports the in-kernel software implementation of GRO. GRO has
+shown that by coalescing Rx traffic into larger chunks of data, CPU
+utilization can be significantly reduced when under large Rx load. GRO is an
+evolution of the previously-used LRO interface. GRO is able to coalesce
+other protocols besides TCP. It's also safe to use with configurations that
+are problematic for LRO, namely bridging and iSCSI.
+
+
+
+Supported ethtool Commands and Options for Filtering
+----------------------------------------------------
+-n --show-nfc
+ Retrieves the receive network flow classification configurations.
+
+rx-flow-hash tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6
+ Retrieves the hash options for the specified network traffic type.
+
+-N --config-nfc
+ Configures the receive network flow classification.
+
+rx-flow-hash tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6 m|v|t|s|d|f|n|r
+ Configures the hash options for the specified network traffic type.
+
+- udp4: UDP over IPv4
+- udp6: UDP over IPv6
+- f Hash on bytes 0 and 1 of the Layer 4 header of the rx packet.
+- n Hash on bytes 2 and 3 of the Layer 4 header of the rx packet.
+
+
+Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+============================
+
+Enabling SR-IOV in a 64-bit Microsoft Windows Server 2012/R2 guest OS under Linux KVM
+-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+KVM Hypervisor/VMM supports direct assignment of a PCIe device to a VM. This
+includes traditional PCIe devices, as well as SR-IOV-capable devices based on
+the Intel Ethernet Controller XL710.
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/i40e.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/i40e.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..8a9b18573
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/i40e.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,771 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+=================================================================
+Linux Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 700 Series
+=================================================================
+
+Intel 40 Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Overview
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Intel(R) Ethernet Flow Director
+- Additional Configurations
+- Known Issues
+- Support
+
+
+Driver information can be obtained using ethtool, lspci, and ifconfig.
+Instructions on updating ethtool can be found in the section Additional
+Configurations later in this document.
+
+For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
+supplied with your Intel adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply to use
+with Linux.
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+The driver is compatible with devices based on the following:
+
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X710
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller XL710
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection X722
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller XXV710
+
+For the best performance, make sure the latest NVM/FW is installed on your
+device.
+
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest NVM/FW
+images and Intel network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+SFP+ and QSFP+ Devices
+----------------------
+For information about supported media, refer to this document:
+https://www.intel.com/content/dam/www/public/us/en/documents/release-notes/xl710-ethernet-controller-feature-matrix.pdf
+
+NOTE: Some adapters based on the Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 700 Series only
+support Intel Ethernet Optics modules. On these adapters, other modules are not
+supported and will not function. In all cases Intel recommends using Intel
+Ethernet Optics; other modules may function but are not validated by Intel.
+Contact Intel for supported media types.
+
+NOTE: For connections based on Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 700 Series, support
+is dependent on your system board. Please see your vendor for details.
+
+NOTE: In systems that do not have adequate airflow to cool the adapter and
+optical modules, you must use high temperature optical modules.
+
+Virtual Functions (VFs)
+-----------------------
+Use sysfs to enable VFs. For example::
+
+ #echo $num_vf_enabled > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs #enable VFs
+ #echo 0 > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs #disable VFs
+
+For example, the following instructions will configure PF eth0 and the first VF
+on VLAN 10::
+
+ $ ip link set dev eth0 vf 0 vlan 10
+
+VLAN Tag Packet Steering
+------------------------
+Allows you to send all packets with a specific VLAN tag to a particular SR-IOV
+virtual function (VF). Further, this feature allows you to designate a
+particular VF as trusted, and allows that trusted VF to request selective
+promiscuous mode on the Physical Function (PF).
+
+To set a VF as trusted or untrusted, enter the following command in the
+Hypervisor::
+
+ # ip link set dev eth0 vf 1 trust [on|off]
+
+Once the VF is designated as trusted, use the following commands in the VM to
+set the VF to promiscuous mode.
+
+::
+
+ For promiscuous all:
+ #ip link set eth2 promisc on
+ Where eth2 is a VF interface in the VM
+
+ For promiscuous Multicast:
+ #ip link set eth2 allmulticast on
+ Where eth2 is a VF interface in the VM
+
+NOTE: By default, the ethtool priv-flag vf-true-promisc-support is set to
+"off",meaning that promiscuous mode for the VF will be limited. To set the
+promiscuous mode for the VF to true promiscuous and allow the VF to see all
+ingress traffic, use the following command::
+
+ #ethtool -set-priv-flags p261p1 vf-true-promisc-support on
+
+The vf-true-promisc-support priv-flag does not enable promiscuous mode; rather,
+it designates which type of promiscuous mode (limited or true) you will get
+when you enable promiscuous mode using the ip link commands above. Note that
+this is a global setting that affects the entire device. However,the
+vf-true-promisc-support priv-flag is only exposed to the first PF of the
+device. The PF remains in limited promiscuous mode (unless it is in MFP mode)
+regardless of the vf-true-promisc-support setting.
+
+Now add a VLAN interface on the VF interface::
+
+ #ip link add link eth2 name eth2.100 type vlan id 100
+
+Note that the order in which you set the VF to promiscuous mode and add the
+VLAN interface does not matter (you can do either first). The end result in
+this example is that the VF will get all traffic that is tagged with VLAN 100.
+
+Intel(R) Ethernet Flow Director
+-------------------------------
+The Intel Ethernet Flow Director performs the following tasks:
+
+- Directs receive packets according to their flows to different queues.
+- Enables tight control on routing a flow in the platform.
+- Matches flows and CPU cores for flow affinity.
+- Supports multiple parameters for flexible flow classification and load
+ balancing (in SFP mode only).
+
+NOTE: The Linux i40e driver supports the following flow types: IPv4, TCPv4, and
+UDPv4. For a given flow type, it supports valid combinations of IP addresses
+(source or destination) and UDP/TCP ports (source and destination). For
+example, you can supply only a source IP address, a source IP address and a
+destination port, or any combination of one or more of these four parameters.
+
+NOTE: The Linux i40e driver allows you to filter traffic based on a
+user-defined flexible two-byte pattern and offset by using the ethtool user-def
+and mask fields. Only L3 and L4 flow types are supported for user-defined
+flexible filters. For a given flow type, you must clear all Intel Ethernet Flow
+Director filters before changing the input set (for that flow type).
+
+To enable or disable the Intel Ethernet Flow Director::
+
+ # ethtool -K ethX ntuple <on|off>
+
+When disabling ntuple filters, all the user programmed filters are flushed from
+the driver cache and hardware. All needed filters must be re-added when ntuple
+is re-enabled.
+
+To add a filter that directs packet to queue 2, use -U or -N switch::
+
+ # ethtool -N ethX flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.10.1 dst-ip \
+ 192.168.10.2 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 action 2 [loc 1]
+
+To set a filter using only the source and destination IP address::
+
+ # ethtool -N ethX flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.10.1 dst-ip \
+ 192.168.10.2 action 2 [loc 1]
+
+To see the list of filters currently present::
+
+ # ethtool <-u|-n> ethX
+
+Application Targeted Routing (ATR) Perfect Filters
+--------------------------------------------------
+ATR is enabled by default when the kernel is in multiple transmit queue mode.
+An ATR Intel Ethernet Flow Director filter rule is added when a TCP-IP flow
+starts and is deleted when the flow ends. When a TCP-IP Intel Ethernet Flow
+Director rule is added from ethtool (Sideband filter), ATR is turned off by the
+driver. To re-enable ATR, the sideband can be disabled with the ethtool -K
+option. For example::
+
+ ethtool –K [adapter] ntuple [off|on]
+
+If sideband is re-enabled after ATR is re-enabled, ATR remains enabled until a
+TCP-IP flow is added. When all TCP-IP sideband rules are deleted, ATR is
+automatically re-enabled.
+
+Packets that match the ATR rules are counted in fdir_atr_match stats in
+ethtool, which also can be used to verify whether ATR rules still exist.
+
+Sideband Perfect Filters
+------------------------
+Sideband Perfect Filters are used to direct traffic that matches specified
+characteristics. They are enabled through ethtool's ntuple interface. To add a
+new filter use the following command::
+
+ ethtool -U <device> flow-type <type> src-ip <ip> dst-ip <ip> src-port <port> \
+ dst-port <port> action <queue>
+
+Where:
+ <device> - the ethernet device to program
+ <type> - can be ip4, tcp4, udp4, or sctp4
+ <ip> - the ip address to match on
+ <port> - the port number to match on
+ <queue> - the queue to direct traffic towards (-1 discards matching traffic)
+
+Use the following command to display all of the active filters::
+
+ ethtool -u <device>
+
+Use the following command to delete a filter::
+
+ ethtool -U <device> delete <N>
+
+Where <N> is the filter id displayed when printing all the active filters, and
+may also have been specified using "loc <N>" when adding the filter.
+
+The following example matches TCP traffic sent from 192.168.0.1, port 5300,
+directed to 192.168.0.5, port 80, and sends it to queue 7::
+
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 dst-ip 192.168.0.5 \
+ src-port 5300 dst-port 80 action 7
+
+For each flow-type, the programmed filters must all have the same matching
+input set. For example, issuing the following two commands is acceptable::
+
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10
+
+Issuing the next two commands, however, is not acceptable, since the first
+specifies src-ip and the second specifies dst-ip::
+
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 dst-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10
+
+The second command will fail with an error. You may program multiple filters
+with the same fields, using different values, but, on one device, you may not
+program two tcp4 filters with different matching fields.
+
+Matching on a sub-portion of a field is not supported by the i40e driver, thus
+partial mask fields are not supported.
+
+The driver also supports matching user-defined data within the packet payload.
+This flexible data is specified using the "user-def" field of the ethtool
+command in the following way:
+
++----------------------------+--------------------------+
+| 31 28 24 20 16 | 15 12 8 4 0 |
++----------------------------+--------------------------+
+| offset into packet payload | 2 bytes of flexible data |
++----------------------------+--------------------------+
+
+For example,
+
+::
+
+ ... user-def 0x4FFFF ...
+
+tells the filter to look 4 bytes into the payload and match that value against
+0xFFFF. The offset is based on the beginning of the payload, and not the
+beginning of the packet. Thus
+
+::
+
+ flow-type tcp4 ... user-def 0x8BEAF ...
+
+would match TCP/IPv4 packets which have the value 0xBEAF 8 bytes into the
+TCP/IPv4 payload.
+
+Note that ICMP headers are parsed as 4 bytes of header and 4 bytes of payload.
+Thus to match the first byte of the payload, you must actually add 4 bytes to
+the offset. Also note that ip4 filters match both ICMP frames as well as raw
+(unknown) ip4 frames, where the payload will be the L3 payload of the IP4 frame.
+
+The maximum offset is 64. The hardware will only read up to 64 bytes of data
+from the payload. The offset must be even because the flexible data is 2 bytes
+long and must be aligned to byte 0 of the packet payload.
+
+The user-defined flexible offset is also considered part of the input set and
+cannot be programmed separately for multiple filters of the same type. However,
+the flexible data is not part of the input set and multiple filters may use the
+same offset but match against different data.
+
+To create filters that direct traffic to a specific Virtual Function, use the
+"action" parameter. Specify the action as a 64 bit value, where the lower 32
+bits represents the queue number, while the next 8 bits represent which VF.
+Note that 0 is the PF, so the VF identifier is offset by 1. For example::
+
+ ... action 0x800000002 ...
+
+specifies to direct traffic to Virtual Function 7 (8 minus 1) into queue 2 of
+that VF.
+
+Note that these filters will not break internal routing rules, and will not
+route traffic that otherwise would not have been sent to the specified Virtual
+Function.
+
+Setting the link-down-on-close Private Flag
+-------------------------------------------
+When the link-down-on-close private flag is set to "on", the port's link will
+go down when the interface is brought down using the ifconfig ethX down command.
+
+Use ethtool to view and set link-down-on-close, as follows::
+
+ ethtool --show-priv-flags ethX
+ ethtool --set-priv-flags ethX link-down-on-close [on|off]
+
+Viewing Link Messages
+---------------------
+Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is
+restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on
+your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following::
+
+ dmesg -n 8
+
+NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots.
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
+to a value larger than the default value of 1500.
+
+Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the
+following where <x> is the interface number::
+
+ ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up
+
+Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows::
+
+ ip link set mtu 9000 dev eth<x>
+ ip link set up dev eth<x>
+
+This setting is not saved across reboots. The setting change can be made
+permanent by adding 'MTU=9000' to the file::
+
+ /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x> // for RHEL
+ /etc/sysconfig/network/<config_file> // for SLES
+
+NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 9702. This value coincides
+with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9728 bytes.
+
+NOTE: This driver will attempt to use multiple page sized buffers to receive
+each jumbo packet. This should help to avoid buffer starvation issues when
+allocating receive packets.
+
+ethtool
+-------
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool
+version is required for this functionality. Download it at:
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+Supported ethtool Commands and Options for Filtering
+----------------------------------------------------
+-n --show-nfc
+ Retrieves the receive network flow classification configurations.
+
+rx-flow-hash tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6
+ Retrieves the hash options for the specified network traffic type.
+
+-N --config-nfc
+ Configures the receive network flow classification.
+
+rx-flow-hash tcp4|udp4|ah4|esp4|sctp4|tcp6|udp6|ah6|esp6|sctp6 m|v|t|s|d|f|n|r...
+ Configures the hash options for the specified network traffic type.
+
+udp4 UDP over IPv4
+udp6 UDP over IPv6
+
+f Hash on bytes 0 and 1 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet.
+n Hash on bytes 2 and 3 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet.
+
+Speed and Duplex Configuration
+------------------------------
+In addressing speed and duplex configuration issues, you need to distinguish
+between copper-based adapters and fiber-based adapters.
+
+In the default mode, an Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter using copper
+connections will attempt to auto-negotiate with its link partner to determine
+the best setting. If the adapter cannot establish link with the link partner
+using auto-negotiation, you may need to manually configure the adapter and link
+partner to identical settings to establish link and pass packets. This should
+only be needed when attempting to link with an older switch that does not
+support auto-negotiation or one that has been forced to a specific speed or
+duplex mode. Your link partner must match the setting you choose. 1 Gbps speeds
+and higher cannot be forced. Use the autonegotiation advertising setting to
+manually set devices for 1 Gbps and higher.
+
+NOTE: You cannot set the speed for devices based on the Intel(R) Ethernet
+Network Adapter XXV710 based devices.
+
+Speed, duplex, and autonegotiation advertising are configured through the
+ethtool utility.
+
+Caution: Only experienced network administrators should force speed and duplex
+or change autonegotiation advertising manually. The settings at the switch must
+always match the adapter settings. Adapter performance may suffer or your
+adapter may not operate if you configure the adapter differently from your
+switch.
+
+An Intel(R) Ethernet Network Adapter using fiber-based connections, however,
+will not attempt to auto-negotiate with its link partner since those adapters
+operate only in full duplex and only at their native speed.
+
+NAPI
+----
+NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the i40e driver.
+For more information on NAPI, see
+https://wiki.linuxfoundation.org/networking/napi
+
+Flow Control
+------------
+Ethernet Flow Control (IEEE 802.3x) can be configured with ethtool to enable
+receiving and transmitting pause frames for i40e. When transmit is enabled,
+pause frames are generated when the receive packet buffer crosses a predefined
+threshold. When receive is enabled, the transmit unit will halt for the time
+delay specified when a pause frame is received.
+
+NOTE: You must have a flow control capable link partner.
+
+Flow Control is on by default.
+
+Use ethtool to change the flow control settings.
+
+To enable or disable Rx or Tx Flow Control::
+
+ ethtool -A eth? rx <on|off> tx <on|off>
+
+Note: This command only enables or disables Flow Control if auto-negotiation is
+disabled. If auto-negotiation is enabled, this command changes the parameters
+used for auto-negotiation with the link partner.
+
+To enable or disable auto-negotiation::
+
+ ethtool -s eth? autoneg <on|off>
+
+Note: Flow Control auto-negotiation is part of link auto-negotiation. Depending
+on your device, you may not be able to change the auto-negotiation setting.
+
+RSS Hash Flow
+-------------
+Allows you to set the hash bytes per flow type and any combination of one or
+more options for Receive Side Scaling (RSS) hash byte configuration.
+
+::
+
+ # ethtool -N <dev> rx-flow-hash <type> <option>
+
+Where <type> is:
+ tcp4 signifying TCP over IPv4
+ udp4 signifying UDP over IPv4
+ tcp6 signifying TCP over IPv6
+ udp6 signifying UDP over IPv6
+And <option> is one or more of:
+ s Hash on the IP source address of the Rx packet.
+ d Hash on the IP destination address of the Rx packet.
+ f Hash on bytes 0 and 1 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet.
+ n Hash on bytes 2 and 3 of the Layer 4 header of the Rx packet.
+
+MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature
+----------------------------------
+When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by the
+hardware and not transmitted.
+NOTE: This feature can be disabled for a specific Virtual Function (VF)::
+
+ ip link set <pf dev> vf <vf id> spoofchk {off|on}
+
+IEEE 1588 Precision Time Protocol (PTP) Hardware Clock (PHC)
+------------------------------------------------------------
+Precision Time Protocol (PTP) is used to synchronize clocks in a computer
+network. PTP support varies among Intel devices that support this driver. Use
+"ethtool -T <netdev name>" to get a definitive list of PTP capabilities
+supported by the device.
+
+IEEE 802.1ad (QinQ) Support
+---------------------------
+The IEEE 802.1ad standard, informally known as QinQ, allows for multiple VLAN
+IDs within a single Ethernet frame. VLAN IDs are sometimes referred to as
+"tags," and multiple VLAN IDs are thus referred to as a "tag stack." Tag stacks
+allow L2 tunneling and the ability to segregate traffic within a particular
+VLAN ID, among other uses.
+
+The following are examples of how to configure 802.1ad (QinQ)::
+
+ ip link add link eth0 eth0.24 type vlan proto 802.1ad id 24
+ ip link add link eth0.24 eth0.24.371 type vlan proto 802.1Q id 371
+
+Where "24" and "371" are example VLAN IDs.
+
+NOTES:
+ Receive checksum offloads, cloud filters, and VLAN acceleration are not
+ supported for 802.1ad (QinQ) packets.
+
+VXLAN and GENEVE Overlay HW Offloading
+--------------------------------------
+Virtual Extensible LAN (VXLAN) allows you to extend an L2 network over an L3
+network, which may be useful in a virtualized or cloud environment. Some
+Intel(R) Ethernet Network devices perform VXLAN processing, offloading it from
+the operating system. This reduces CPU utilization.
+
+VXLAN offloading is controlled by the Tx and Rx checksum offload options
+provided by ethtool. That is, if Tx checksum offload is enabled, and the
+adapter has the capability, VXLAN offloading is also enabled.
+
+Support for VXLAN and GENEVE HW offloading is dependent on kernel support of
+the HW offloading features.
+
+Multiple Functions per Port
+---------------------------
+Some adapters based on the Intel Ethernet Controller X710/XL710 support
+multiple functions on a single physical port. Configure these functions through
+the System Setup/BIOS.
+
+Minimum TX Bandwidth is the guaranteed minimum data transmission bandwidth, as
+a percentage of the full physical port link speed, that the partition will
+receive. The bandwidth the partition is awarded will never fall below the level
+you specify.
+
+The range for the minimum bandwidth values is:
+1 to ((100 minus # of partitions on the physical port) plus 1)
+For example, if a physical port has 4 partitions, the range would be:
+1 to ((100 - 4) + 1 = 97)
+
+The Maximum Bandwidth percentage represents the maximum transmit bandwidth
+allocated to the partition as a percentage of the full physical port link
+speed. The accepted range of values is 1-100. The value is used as a limiter,
+should you chose that any one particular function not be able to consume 100%
+of a port's bandwidth (should it be available). The sum of all the values for
+Maximum Bandwidth is not restricted, because no more than 100% of a port's
+bandwidth can ever be used.
+
+NOTE: X710/XXV710 devices fail to enable Max VFs (64) when Multiple Functions
+per Port (MFP) and SR-IOV are enabled. An error from i40e is logged that says
+"add vsi failed for VF N, aq_err 16". To workaround the issue, enable less than
+64 virtual functions (VFs).
+
+Data Center Bridging (DCB)
+--------------------------
+DCB is a configuration Quality of Service implementation in hardware. It uses
+the VLAN priority tag (802.1p) to filter traffic. That means that there are 8
+different priorities that traffic can be filtered into. It also enables
+priority flow control (802.1Qbb) which can limit or eliminate the number of
+dropped packets during network stress. Bandwidth can be allocated to each of
+these priorities, which is enforced at the hardware level (802.1Qaz).
+
+Adapter firmware implements LLDP and DCBX protocol agents as per 802.1AB and
+802.1Qaz respectively. The firmware based DCBX agent runs in willing mode only
+and can accept settings from a DCBX capable peer. Software configuration of
+DCBX parameters via dcbtool/lldptool are not supported.
+
+NOTE: Firmware LLDP can be disabled by setting the private flag disable-fw-lldp.
+
+The i40e driver implements the DCB netlink interface layer to allow user-space
+to communicate with the driver and query DCB configuration for the port.
+
+NOTE:
+The kernel assumes that TC0 is available, and will disable Priority Flow
+Control (PFC) on the device if TC0 is not available. To fix this, ensure TC0 is
+enabled when setting up DCB on your switch.
+
+Interrupt Rate Limiting
+-----------------------
+:Valid Range: 0-235 (0=no limit)
+
+The Intel(R) Ethernet Controller XL710 family supports an interrupt rate
+limiting mechanism. The user can control, via ethtool, the number of
+microseconds between interrupts.
+
+Syntax::
+
+ # ethtool -C ethX rx-usecs-high N
+
+The range of 0-235 microseconds provides an effective range of 4,310 to 250,000
+interrupts per second. The value of rx-usecs-high can be set independently of
+rx-usecs and tx-usecs in the same ethtool command, and is also independent of
+the adaptive interrupt moderation algorithm. The underlying hardware supports
+granularity in 4-microsecond intervals, so adjacent values may result in the
+same interrupt rate.
+
+One possible use case is the following::
+
+ # ethtool -C ethX adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs-high 20 rx-usecs \
+ 5 tx-usecs 5
+
+The above command would disable adaptive interrupt moderation, and allow a
+maximum of 5 microseconds before indicating a receive or transmit was complete.
+However, instead of resulting in as many as 200,000 interrupts per second, it
+limits total interrupts per second to 50,000 via the rx-usecs-high parameter.
+
+Performance Optimization
+========================
+Driver defaults are meant to fit a wide variety of workloads, but if further
+optimization is required we recommend experimenting with the following settings.
+
+NOTE: For better performance when processing small (64B) frame sizes, try
+enabling Hyper threading in the BIOS in order to increase the number of logical
+cores in the system and subsequently increase the number of queues available to
+the adapter.
+
+Virtualized Environments
+------------------------
+1. Disable XPS on both ends by using the included virt_perf_default script
+or by running the following command as root::
+
+ for file in `ls /sys/class/net/<ethX>/queues/tx-*/xps_cpus`;
+ do echo 0 > $file; done
+
+2. Using the appropriate mechanism (vcpupin) in the vm, pin the cpu's to
+individual lcpu's, making sure to use a set of cpu's included in the
+device's local_cpulist: /sys/class/net/<ethX>/device/local_cpulist.
+
+3. Configure as many Rx/Tx queues in the VM as available. Do not rely on
+the default setting of 1.
+
+
+Non-virtualized Environments
+----------------------------
+Pin the adapter's IRQs to specific cores by disabling the irqbalance service
+and using the included set_irq_affinity script. Please see the script's help
+text for further options.
+
+- The following settings will distribute the IRQs across all the cores evenly::
+
+ # scripts/set_irq_affinity -x all <interface1> , [ <interface2>, ... ]
+
+- The following settings will distribute the IRQs across all the cores that are
+ local to the adapter (same NUMA node)::
+
+ # scripts/set_irq_affinity -x local <interface1> ,[ <interface2>, ... ]
+
+For very CPU intensive workloads, we recommend pinning the IRQs to all cores.
+
+For IP Forwarding: Disable Adaptive ITR and lower Rx and Tx interrupts per
+queue using ethtool.
+
+- Setting rx-usecs and tx-usecs to 125 will limit interrupts to about 8000
+ interrupts per second per queue.
+
+::
+
+ # ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs 125 \
+ tx-usecs 125
+
+For lower CPU utilization: Disable Adaptive ITR and lower Rx and Tx interrupts
+per queue using ethtool.
+
+- Setting rx-usecs and tx-usecs to 250 will limit interrupts to about 4000
+ interrupts per second per queue.
+
+::
+
+ # ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs 250 \
+ tx-usecs 250
+
+For lower latency: Disable Adaptive ITR and ITR by setting Rx and Tx to 0 using
+ethtool.
+
+::
+
+ # ethtool -C <interface> adaptive-rx off adaptive-tx off rx-usecs 0 \
+ tx-usecs 0
+
+Application Device Queues (ADq)
+-------------------------------
+Application Device Queues (ADq) allows you to dedicate one or more queues to a
+specific application. This can reduce latency for the specified application,
+and allow Tx traffic to be rate limited per application. Follow the steps below
+to set ADq.
+
+1. Create traffic classes (TCs). Maximum of 8 TCs can be created per interface.
+The shaper bw_rlimit parameter is optional.
+
+Example: Sets up two tcs, tc0 and tc1, with 16 queues each and max tx rate set
+to 1Gbit for tc0 and 3Gbit for tc1.
+
+::
+
+ # tc qdisc add dev <interface> root mqprio num_tc 2 map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
+ queues 16@0 16@16 hw 1 mode channel shaper bw_rlimit min_rate 1Gbit 2Gbit
+ max_rate 1Gbit 3Gbit
+
+map: priority mapping for up to 16 priorities to tcs (e.g. map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
+sets priorities 0-3 to use tc0 and 4-7 to use tc1)
+
+queues: for each tc, <num queues>@<offset> (e.g. queues 16@0 16@16 assigns
+16 queues to tc0 at offset 0 and 16 queues to tc1 at offset 16. Max total
+number of queues for all tcs is 64 or number of cores, whichever is lower.)
+
+hw 1 mode channel: ‘channel’ with ‘hw’ set to 1 is a new new hardware
+offload mode in mqprio that makes full use of the mqprio options, the
+TCs, the queue configurations, and the QoS parameters.
+
+shaper bw_rlimit: for each tc, sets minimum and maximum bandwidth rates.
+Totals must be equal or less than port speed.
+
+For example: min_rate 1Gbit 3Gbit: Verify bandwidth limit using network
+monitoring tools such as ifstat or sar –n DEV [interval] [number of samples]
+
+2. Enable HW TC offload on interface::
+
+ # ethtool -K <interface> hw-tc-offload on
+
+3. Apply TCs to ingress (RX) flow of interface::
+
+ # tc qdisc add dev <interface> ingress
+
+NOTES:
+ - Run all tc commands from the iproute2 <pathtoiproute2>/tc/ directory.
+ - ADq is not compatible with cloud filters.
+ - Setting up channels via ethtool (ethtool -L) is not supported when the
+ TCs are configured using mqprio.
+ - You must have iproute2 latest version
+ - NVM version 6.01 or later is required.
+ - ADq cannot be enabled when any the following features are enabled: Data
+ Center Bridging (DCB), Multiple Functions per Port (MFP), or Sideband
+ Filters.
+ - If another driver (for example, DPDK) has set cloud filters, you cannot
+ enable ADq.
+ - Tunnel filters are not supported in ADq. If encapsulated packets do
+ arrive in non-tunnel mode, filtering will be done on the inner headers.
+ For example, for VXLAN traffic in non-tunnel mode, PCTYPE is identified
+ as a VXLAN encapsulated packet, outer headers are ignored. Therefore,
+ inner headers are matched.
+ - If a TC filter on a PF matches traffic over a VF (on the PF), that
+ traffic will be routed to the appropriate queue of the PF, and will
+ not be passed on the VF. Such traffic will end up getting dropped higher
+ up in the TCP/IP stack as it does not match PF address data.
+ - If traffic matches multiple TC filters that point to different TCs,
+ that traffic will be duplicated and sent to all matching TC queues.
+ The hardware switch mirrors the packet to a VSI list when multiple
+ filters are matched.
+
+
+Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+============================
+
+NOTE: 1 Gb devices based on the Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection X722 do
+not support the following features:
+
+ * Data Center Bridging (DCB)
+ * QOS
+ * VMQ
+ * SR-IOV
+ * Task Encapsulation offload (VXLAN, NVGRE)
+ * Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE)
+ * Auto-media detect
+
+Unexpected Issues when the device driver and DPDK share a device
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+Unexpected issues may result when an i40e device is in multi driver mode and
+the kernel driver and DPDK driver are sharing the device. This is because
+access to the global NIC resources is not synchronized between multiple
+drivers. Any change to the global NIC configuration (writing to a global
+register, setting global configuration by AQ, or changing switch modes) will
+affect all ports and drivers on the device. Loading DPDK with the
+"multi-driver" module parameter may mitigate some of the issues.
+
+TC0 must be enabled when setting up DCB on a switch
+---------------------------------------------------
+The kernel assumes that TC0 is available, and will disable Priority Flow
+Control (PFC) on the device if TC0 is not available. To fix this, ensure TC0 is
+enabled when setting up DCB on your switch.
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/iavf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/iavf.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..52e037b11
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/iavf.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,331 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+=================================================================
+Linux Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Adaptive Virtual Function
+=================================================================
+
+Intel Ethernet Adaptive Virtual Function Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 2013-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Overview
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Additional Configurations
+- Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+- Support
+
+Overview
+========
+
+This file describes the iavf Linux Base Driver. This driver was formerly
+called i40evf.
+
+The iavf driver supports the below mentioned virtual function devices and
+can only be activated on kernels running the i40e or newer Physical Function
+(PF) driver compiled with CONFIG_PCI_IOV. The iavf driver requires
+CONFIG_PCI_MSI to be enabled.
+
+The guest OS loading the iavf driver must support MSI-X interrupts.
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+
+The driver in this kernel is compatible with devices based on the following:
+ * Intel(R) XL710 X710 Virtual Function
+ * Intel(R) X722 Virtual Function
+ * Intel(R) XXV710 Virtual Function
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Adaptive Virtual Function
+
+For the best performance, make sure the latest NVM/FW is installed on your
+device.
+
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest NVM/FW
+images and Intel network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+
+Additional Features and Configurations
+======================================
+
+Viewing Link Messages
+---------------------
+Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is
+restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on
+your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following::
+
+ # dmesg -n 8
+
+NOTE:
+ This setting is not saved across reboots.
+
+ethtool
+-------
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool
+version is required for this functionality. Download it at:
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+Setting VLAN Tag Stripping
+--------------------------
+If you have applications that require Virtual Functions (VFs) to receive
+packets with VLAN tags, you can disable VLAN tag stripping for the VF. The
+Physical Function (PF) processes requests issued from the VF to enable or
+disable VLAN tag stripping. Note that if the PF has assigned a VLAN to a VF,
+then requests from that VF to set VLAN tag stripping will be ignored.
+
+To enable/disable VLAN tag stripping for a VF, issue the following command
+from inside the VM in which you are running the VF::
+
+ # ethtool -K <if_name> rxvlan on/off
+
+or alternatively::
+
+ # ethtool --offload <if_name> rxvlan on/off
+
+Adaptive Virtual Function
+-------------------------
+Adaptive Virtual Function (AVF) allows the virtual function driver, or VF, to
+adapt to changing feature sets of the physical function driver (PF) with which
+it is associated. This allows system administrators to update a PF without
+having to update all the VFs associated with it. All AVFs have a single common
+device ID and branding string.
+
+AVFs have a minimum set of features known as "base mode," but may provide
+additional features depending on what features are available in the PF with
+which the AVF is associated. The following are base mode features:
+
+- 4 Queue Pairs (QP) and associated Configuration Status Registers (CSRs)
+ for Tx/Rx
+- i40e descriptors and ring format
+- Descriptor write-back completion
+- 1 control queue, with i40e descriptors, CSRs and ring format
+- 5 MSI-X interrupt vectors and corresponding i40e CSRs
+- 1 Interrupt Throttle Rate (ITR) index
+- 1 Virtual Station Interface (VSI) per VF
+- 1 Traffic Class (TC), TC0
+- Receive Side Scaling (RSS) with 64 entry indirection table and key,
+ configured through the PF
+- 1 unicast MAC address reserved per VF
+- 16 MAC address filters for each VF
+- Stateless offloads - non-tunneled checksums
+- AVF device ID
+- HW mailbox is used for VF to PF communications (including on Windows)
+
+IEEE 802.1ad (QinQ) Support
+---------------------------
+The IEEE 802.1ad standard, informally known as QinQ, allows for multiple VLAN
+IDs within a single Ethernet frame. VLAN IDs are sometimes referred to as
+"tags," and multiple VLAN IDs are thus referred to as a "tag stack." Tag stacks
+allow L2 tunneling and the ability to segregate traffic within a particular
+VLAN ID, among other uses.
+
+The following are examples of how to configure 802.1ad (QinQ)::
+
+ # ip link add link eth0 eth0.24 type vlan proto 802.1ad id 24
+ # ip link add link eth0.24 eth0.24.371 type vlan proto 802.1Q id 371
+
+Where "24" and "371" are example VLAN IDs.
+
+NOTES:
+ Receive checksum offloads, cloud filters, and VLAN acceleration are not
+ supported for 802.1ad (QinQ) packets.
+
+Application Device Queues (ADq)
+-------------------------------
+Application Device Queues (ADq) allows you to dedicate one or more queues to a
+specific application. This can reduce latency for the specified application,
+and allow Tx traffic to be rate limited per application. Follow the steps below
+to set ADq.
+
+Requirements:
+
+- The sch_mqprio, act_mirred and cls_flower modules must be loaded
+- The latest version of iproute2
+- If another driver (for example, DPDK) has set cloud filters, you cannot
+ enable ADQ
+- Depending on the underlying PF device, ADQ cannot be enabled when the
+ following features are enabled:
+
+ + Data Center Bridging (DCB)
+ + Multiple Functions per Port (MFP)
+ + Sideband Filters
+
+1. Create traffic classes (TCs). Maximum of 8 TCs can be created per interface.
+The shaper bw_rlimit parameter is optional.
+
+Example: Sets up two tcs, tc0 and tc1, with 16 queues each and max tx rate set
+to 1Gbit for tc0 and 3Gbit for tc1.
+
+::
+
+ tc qdisc add dev <interface> root mqprio num_tc 2 map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
+ queues 16@0 16@16 hw 1 mode channel shaper bw_rlimit min_rate 1Gbit 2Gbit
+ max_rate 1Gbit 3Gbit
+
+map: priority mapping for up to 16 priorities to tcs (e.g. map 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1
+sets priorities 0-3 to use tc0 and 4-7 to use tc1)
+
+queues: for each tc, <num queues>@<offset> (e.g. queues 16@0 16@16 assigns
+16 queues to tc0 at offset 0 and 16 queues to tc1 at offset 16. Max total
+number of queues for all tcs is 64 or number of cores, whichever is lower.)
+
+hw 1 mode channel: ‘channel’ with ‘hw’ set to 1 is a new new hardware
+offload mode in mqprio that makes full use of the mqprio options, the
+TCs, the queue configurations, and the QoS parameters.
+
+shaper bw_rlimit: for each tc, sets minimum and maximum bandwidth rates.
+Totals must be equal or less than port speed.
+
+For example: min_rate 1Gbit 3Gbit: Verify bandwidth limit using network
+monitoring tools such as ifstat or sar –n DEV [interval] [number of samples]
+
+NOTE:
+ Setting up channels via ethtool (ethtool -L) is not supported when the
+ TCs are configured using mqprio.
+
+2. Enable HW TC offload on interface::
+
+ # ethtool -K <interface> hw-tc-offload on
+
+3. Apply TCs to ingress (RX) flow of interface::
+
+ # tc qdisc add dev <interface> ingress
+
+NOTES:
+ - Run all tc commands from the iproute2 <pathtoiproute2>/tc/ directory
+ - ADq is not compatible with cloud filters
+ - Setting up channels via ethtool (ethtool -L) is not supported when the TCs
+ are configured using mqprio
+ - You must have iproute2 latest version
+ - NVM version 6.01 or later is required
+ - ADq cannot be enabled when any the following features are enabled: Data
+ Center Bridging (DCB), Multiple Functions per Port (MFP), or Sideband Filters
+ - If another driver (for example, DPDK) has set cloud filters, you cannot
+ enable ADq
+ - Tunnel filters are not supported in ADq. If encapsulated packets do arrive
+ in non-tunnel mode, filtering will be done on the inner headers. For example,
+ for VXLAN traffic in non-tunnel mode, PCTYPE is identified as a VXLAN
+ encapsulated packet, outer headers are ignored. Therefore, inner headers are
+ matched.
+ - If a TC filter on a PF matches traffic over a VF (on the PF), that traffic
+ will be routed to the appropriate queue of the PF, and will not be passed on
+ the VF. Such traffic will end up getting dropped higher up in the TCP/IP
+ stack as it does not match PF address data.
+ - If traffic matches multiple TC filters that point to different TCs, that
+ traffic will be duplicated and sent to all matching TC queues. The hardware
+ switch mirrors the packet to a VSI list when multiple filters are matched.
+
+
+Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+============================
+
+Bonding fails with VFs bound to an Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 700 series device
+---------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+If you bind Virtual Functions (VFs) to an Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 700
+series based device, the VF slaves may fail when they become the active slave.
+If the MAC address of the VF is set by the PF (Physical Function) of the
+device, when you add a slave, or change the active-backup slave, Linux bonding
+tries to sync the backup slave's MAC address to the same MAC address as the
+active slave. Linux bonding will fail at this point. This issue will not occur
+if the VF's MAC address is not set by the PF.
+
+Traffic Is Not Being Passed Between VM and Client
+-------------------------------------------------
+You may not be able to pass traffic between a client system and a
+Virtual Machine (VM) running on a separate host if the Virtual Function
+(VF, or Virtual NIC) is not in trusted mode and spoof checking is enabled
+on the VF. Note that this situation can occur in any combination of client,
+host, and guest operating system. For information on how to set the VF to
+trusted mode, refer to the section "VLAN Tag Packet Steering" in this
+readme document. For information on setting spoof checking, refer to the
+section "MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature" in this readme document.
+
+Do not unload port driver if VF with active VM is bound to it
+-------------------------------------------------------------
+Do not unload a port's driver if a Virtual Function (VF) with an active Virtual
+Machine (VM) is bound to it. Doing so will cause the port to appear to hang.
+Once the VM shuts down, or otherwise releases the VF, the command will complete.
+
+Using four traffic classes fails
+--------------------------------
+Do not try to reserve more than three traffic classes in the iavf driver. Doing
+so will fail to set any traffic classes and will cause the driver to write
+errors to stdout. Use a maximum of three queues to avoid this issue.
+
+Multiple log error messages on iavf driver removal
+--------------------------------------------------
+If you have several VFs and you remove the iavf driver, several instances of
+the following log errors are written to the log::
+
+ Unable to send opcode 2 to PF, err I40E_ERR_QUEUE_EMPTY, aq_err ok
+ Unable to send the message to VF 2 aq_err 12
+ ARQ Overflow Error detected
+
+Virtual machine does not get link
+---------------------------------
+If the virtual machine has more than one virtual port assigned to it, and those
+virtual ports are bound to different physical ports, you may not get link on
+all of the virtual ports. The following command may work around the issue::
+
+ # ethtool -r <PF>
+
+Where <PF> is the PF interface in the host, for example: p5p1. You may need to
+run the command more than once to get link on all virtual ports.
+
+MAC address of Virtual Function changes unexpectedly
+----------------------------------------------------
+If a Virtual Function's MAC address is not assigned in the host, then the VF
+(virtual function) driver will use a random MAC address. This random MAC
+address may change each time the VF driver is reloaded. You can assign a static
+MAC address in the host machine. This static MAC address will survive
+a VF driver reload.
+
+Driver Buffer Overflow Fix
+--------------------------
+The fix to resolve CVE-2016-8105, referenced in Intel SA-00069
+https://www.intel.com/content/www/us/en/security-center/advisory/intel-sa-00069.html
+is included in this and future versions of the driver.
+
+Multiple Interfaces on Same Ethernet Broadcast Network
+------------------------------------------------------
+Due to the default ARP behavior on Linux, it is not possible to have one system
+on two IP networks in the same Ethernet broadcast domain (non-partitioned
+switch) behave as expected. All Ethernet interfaces will respond to IP traffic
+for any IP address assigned to the system. This results in unbalanced receive
+traffic.
+
+If you have multiple interfaces in a server, either turn on ARP filtering by
+entering::
+
+ # echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/arp_filter
+
+NOTE:
+ This setting is not saved across reboots. The configuration change can be
+ made permanent by adding the following line to the file /etc/sysctl.conf::
+
+ net.ipv4.conf.all.arp_filter = 1
+
+Another alternative is to install the interfaces in separate broadcast domains
+(either in different switches or in a switch partitioned to VLANs).
+
+Rx Page Allocation Errors
+-------------------------
+'Page allocation failure. order:0' errors may occur under stress.
+This is caused by the way the Linux kernel reports this stressed condition.
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://support.intel.com
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on the supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ice.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ice.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ee43ea57d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ice.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,46 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+==================================================================
+Linux Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet Connection E800 Series
+==================================================================
+
+Intel ice Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Enabling the driver
+- Support
+
+The driver in this release supports Intel's E800 Series of products. For
+more information, visit Intel's support page at https://support.intel.com.
+
+Enabling the driver
+===================
+The driver is enabled via the standard kernel configuration system,
+using the make command::
+
+ make oldconfig/menuconfig/etc.
+
+The driver is located in the menu structure at:
+
+ -> Device Drivers
+ -> Network device support (NETDEVICES [=y])
+ -> Ethernet driver support
+ -> Intel devices
+ -> Intel(R) Ethernet Connection E800 Series Support
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igb.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igb.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d46289e18
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igb.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,213 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+==========================================================
+Linux Base Driver for Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
+==========================================================
+
+Intel Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Command Line Parameters
+- Additional Configurations
+- Support
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel
+network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+
+Command Line Parameters
+========================
+If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are used
+by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using this
+syntax::
+
+ modprobe igb [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...]
+
+There needs to be a <VAL#> for each network port in the system supported by
+this driver. The values will be applied to each instance, in function order.
+For example::
+
+ modprobe igb max_vfs=2,4
+
+In this case, there are two network ports supported by igb in the system.
+
+NOTE: A descriptor describes a data buffer and attributes related to the data
+buffer. This information is accessed by the hardware.
+
+max_vfs
+-------
+:Valid Range: 0-7
+
+This parameter adds support for SR-IOV. It causes the driver to spawn up to
+max_vfs worth of virtual functions. If the value is greater than 0 it will
+also force the VMDq parameter to be 1 or more.
+
+The parameters for the driver are referenced by position. Thus, if you have a
+dual port adapter, or more than one adapter in your system, and want N virtual
+functions per port, you must specify a number for each port with each parameter
+separated by a comma. For example::
+
+ modprobe igb max_vfs=4
+
+This will spawn 4 VFs on the first port.
+
+::
+
+ modprobe igb max_vfs=2,4
+
+This will spawn 2 VFs on the first port and 4 VFs on the second port.
+
+NOTE: Caution must be used in loading the driver with these parameters.
+Depending on your system configuration, number of slots, etc., it is impossible
+to predict in all cases where the positions would be on the command line.
+
+NOTE: Neither the device nor the driver control how VFs are mapped into config
+space. Bus layout will vary by operating system. On operating systems that
+support it, you can check sysfs to find the mapping.
+
+NOTE: When either SR-IOV mode or VMDq mode is enabled, hardware VLAN filtering
+and VLAN tag stripping/insertion will remain enabled. Please remove the old
+VLAN filter before the new VLAN filter is added. For example::
+
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 100 // set vlan 100 for VF 0
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 0 // Delete vlan 100
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 200 // set a new vlan 200 for VF 0
+
+Debug
+-----
+:Valid Range: 0-16 (0=none,...,16=all)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This parameter adjusts the level debug messages displayed in the system logs.
+
+
+Additional Features and Configurations
+======================================
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
+to a value larger than the default value of 1500.
+
+Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the
+following where <x> is the interface number::
+
+ ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up
+
+Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows::
+
+ ip link set mtu 9000 dev eth<x>
+ ip link set up dev eth<x>
+
+This setting is not saved across reboots. The setting change can be made
+permanent by adding 'MTU=9000' to the file:
+
+- For RHEL: /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x>
+- For SLES: /etc/sysconfig/network/<config_file>
+
+NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 9216. This value coincides
+with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9234 bytes.
+
+NOTE: Using Jumbo frames at 10 or 100 Mbps is not supported and may result in
+poor performance or loss of link.
+
+
+ethtool
+-------
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool
+version is required for this functionality. Download it at:
+
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+
+Enabling Wake on LAN (WoL)
+--------------------------
+WoL is configured through the ethtool utility.
+
+WoL will be enabled on the system during the next shut down or reboot. For
+this driver version, in order to enable WoL, the igb driver must be loaded
+prior to shutting down or suspending the system.
+
+NOTE: Wake on LAN is only supported on port A of multi-port devices. Also
+Wake On LAN is not supported for the following device:
+- Intel(R) Gigabit VT Quad Port Server Adapter
+
+
+Multiqueue
+----------
+In this mode, a separate MSI-X vector is allocated for each queue and one for
+"other" interrupts such as link status change and errors. All interrupts are
+throttled via interrupt moderation. Interrupt moderation must be used to avoid
+interrupt storms while the driver is processing one interrupt. The moderation
+value should be at least as large as the expected time for the driver to
+process an interrupt. Multiqueue is off by default.
+
+REQUIREMENTS: MSI-X support is required for Multiqueue. If MSI-X is not found,
+the system will fallback to MSI or to Legacy interrupts. This driver supports
+receive multiqueue on all kernels that support MSI-X.
+
+NOTE: On some kernels a reboot is required to switch between single queue mode
+and multiqueue mode or vice-versa.
+
+
+MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature
+----------------------------------
+When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by the
+hardware and not transmitted.
+
+An interrupt is sent to the PF driver notifying it of the spoof attempt. When a
+spoofed packet is detected, the PF driver will send the following message to
+the system log (displayed by the "dmesg" command):
+Spoof event(s) detected on VF(n), where n = the VF that attempted to do the
+spoofing
+
+
+Setting MAC Address, VLAN and Rate Limit Using IProute2 Tool
+------------------------------------------------------------
+You can set a MAC address of a Virtual Function (VF), a default VLAN and the
+rate limit using the IProute2 tool. Download the latest version of the
+IProute2 tool from Sourceforge if your version does not have all the features
+you require.
+
+Credit Based Shaper (Qav Mode)
+------------------------------
+When enabling the CBS qdisc in the hardware offload mode, traffic shaping using
+the CBS (described in the IEEE 802.1Q-2018 Section 8.6.8.2 and discussed in the
+Annex L) algorithm will run in the i210 controller, so it's more accurate and
+uses less CPU.
+
+When using offloaded CBS, and the traffic rate obeys the configured rate
+(doesn't go above it), CBS should have little to no effect in the latency.
+
+The offloaded version of the algorithm has some limits, caused by how the idle
+slope is expressed in the adapter's registers. It can only represent idle slopes
+in 16.38431 kbps units, which means that if a idle slope of 2576kbps is
+requested, the controller will be configured to use a idle slope of ~2589 kbps,
+because the driver rounds the value up. For more details, see the comments on
+:c:func:`igb_config_tx_modes()`.
+
+NOTE: This feature is exclusive to i210 models.
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igbvf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igbvf.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..40fa210c5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/igbvf.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,65 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+===========================================================
+Linux Base Virtual Function Driver for Intel(R) 1G Ethernet
+===========================================================
+
+Intel Gigabit Virtual Function Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Additional Configurations
+- Support
+
+This driver supports Intel 82576-based virtual function devices-based virtual
+function devices that can only be activated on kernels that support SR-IOV.
+
+SR-IOV requires the correct platform and OS support.
+
+The guest OS loading this driver must support MSI-X interrupts.
+
+For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
+supplied with your Intel adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply to use
+with Linux.
+
+Driver information can be obtained using ethtool, lspci, and ifconfig.
+Instructions on updating ethtool can be found in the section Additional
+Configurations later in this document.
+
+NOTE: There is a limit of a total of 32 shared VLANs to 1 or more VFs.
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel
+network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+
+Additional Features and Configurations
+======================================
+
+ethtool
+-------
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool
+version is required for this functionality. Download it at:
+
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgb.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgb.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c6a233e68
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgb.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,468 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+=====================================================================
+Linux Base Driver for 10 Gigabit Intel(R) Ethernet Network Connection
+=====================================================================
+
+October 1, 2018
+
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- In This Release
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Command Line Parameters
+- Improving Performance
+- Additional Configurations
+- Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+- Support
+
+
+
+In This Release
+===============
+
+This file describes the ixgb Linux Base Driver for the 10 Gigabit Intel(R)
+Network Connection. This driver includes support for Itanium(R)2-based
+systems.
+
+For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
+supplied with your 10 Gigabit adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply
+to use with Linux.
+
+The following features are available in this kernel:
+ - Native VLANs
+ - Channel Bonding (teaming)
+ - SNMP
+
+Channel Bonding documentation can be found in the Linux kernel source:
+/Documentation/networking/bonding.rst
+
+The driver information previously displayed in the /proc filesystem is not
+supported in this release. Alternatively, you can use ethtool (version 1.6
+or later), lspci, and iproute2 to obtain the same information.
+
+Instructions on updating ethtool can be found in the section "Additional
+Configurations" later in this document.
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+
+The following Intel network adapters are compatible with the drivers in this
+release:
+
++------------+------------------------------+----------------------------------+
+| Controller | Adapter Name | Physical Layer |
++============+==============================+==================================+
+| 82597EX | Intel(R) PRO/10GbE LR/SR/CX4 | - 10G Base-LR (fiber) |
+| | Server Adapters | - 10G Base-SR (fiber) |
+| | | - 10G Base-CX4 (copper) |
++------------+------------------------------+----------------------------------+
+
+For more information on how to identify your adapter, go to the Adapter &
+Driver ID Guide at:
+
+ https://support.intel.com
+
+
+Command Line Parameters
+=======================
+
+If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are
+used by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using
+this syntax::
+
+ modprobe ixgb [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...]
+
+For example, with two 10GbE PCI adapters, entering::
+
+ modprobe ixgb TxDescriptors=80,128
+
+loads the ixgb driver with 80 TX resources for the first adapter and 128 TX
+resources for the second adapter.
+
+The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting,
+unless otherwise noted.
+
+Copybreak
+---------
+:Valid Range: 0-XXXX
+:Default Value: 256
+
+ This is the maximum size of packet that is copied to a new buffer on
+ receive.
+
+Debug
+-----
+:Valid Range: 0-16 (0=none,...,16=all)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+ This parameter adjusts the level of debug messages displayed in the
+ system logs.
+
+FlowControl
+-----------
+:Valid Range: 0-3 (0=none, 1=Rx only, 2=Tx only, 3=Rx&Tx)
+:Default Value: 1 if no EEPROM, otherwise read from EEPROM
+
+ This parameter controls the automatic generation(Tx) and response(Rx) to
+ Ethernet PAUSE frames. There are hardware bugs associated with enabling
+ Tx flow control so beware.
+
+RxDescriptors
+-------------
+:Valid Range: 64-4096
+:Default Value: 1024
+
+ This value is the number of receive descriptors allocated by the driver.
+ Increasing this value allows the driver to buffer more incoming packets.
+ Each descriptor is 16 bytes. A receive buffer is also allocated for
+ each descriptor and can be either 2048, 4056, 8192, or 16384 bytes,
+ depending on the MTU setting. When the MTU size is 1500 or less, the
+ receive buffer size is 2048 bytes. When the MTU is greater than 1500 the
+ receive buffer size will be either 4056, 8192, or 16384 bytes. The
+ maximum MTU size is 16114.
+
+TxDescriptors
+-------------
+:Valid Range: 64-4096
+:Default Value: 256
+
+ This value is the number of transmit descriptors allocated by the driver.
+ Increasing this value allows the driver to queue more transmits. Each
+ descriptor is 16 bytes.
+
+RxIntDelay
+----------
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 72
+
+ This value delays the generation of receive interrupts in units of
+ 0.8192 microseconds. Receive interrupt reduction can improve CPU
+ efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing
+ this value adds extra latency to frame reception and can end up
+ decreasing the throughput of TCP traffic. If the system is reporting
+ dropped receives, this value may be set too high, causing the driver to
+ run out of available receive descriptors.
+
+TxIntDelay
+----------
+:Valid Range: 0-65535 (0=off)
+:Default Value: 32
+
+ This value delays the generation of transmit interrupts in units of
+ 0.8192 microseconds. Transmit interrupt reduction can improve CPU
+ efficiency if properly tuned for specific network traffic. Increasing
+ this value adds extra latency to frame transmission and can end up
+ decreasing the throughput of TCP traffic. If this value is set too high,
+ it will cause the driver to run out of available transmit descriptors.
+
+XsumRX
+------
+:Valid Range: 0-1
+:Default Value: 1
+
+ A value of '1' indicates that the driver should enable IP checksum
+ offload for received packets (both UDP and TCP) to the adapter hardware.
+
+RxFCHighThresh
+--------------
+:Valid Range: 1,536-262,136 (0x600 - 0x3FFF8, 8 byte granularity)
+:Default Value: 196,608 (0x30000)
+
+ Receive Flow control high threshold (when we send a pause frame)
+
+RxFCLowThresh
+-------------
+:Valid Range: 64-262,136 (0x40 - 0x3FFF8, 8 byte granularity)
+:Default Value: 163,840 (0x28000)
+
+ Receive Flow control low threshold (when we send a resume frame)
+
+FCReqTimeout
+------------
+:Valid Range: 1-65535
+:Default Value: 65535
+
+ Flow control request timeout (how long to pause the link partner's tx)
+
+IntDelayEnable
+--------------
+:Value Range: 0,1
+:Default Value: 1
+
+ Interrupt Delay, 0 disables transmit interrupt delay and 1 enables it.
+
+
+Improving Performance
+=====================
+
+With the 10 Gigabit server adapters, the default Linux configuration will
+very likely limit the total available throughput artificially. There is a set
+of configuration changes that, when applied together, will increase the ability
+of Linux to transmit and receive data. The following enhancements were
+originally acquired from settings published at https://www.spec.org/web99/ for
+various submitted results using Linux.
+
+NOTE:
+ These changes are only suggestions, and serve as a starting point for
+ tuning your network performance.
+
+The changes are made in three major ways, listed in order of greatest effect:
+
+- Use ip link to modify the mtu (maximum transmission unit) and the txqueuelen
+ parameter.
+- Use sysctl to modify /proc parameters (essentially kernel tuning)
+- Use setpci to modify the MMRBC field in PCI-X configuration space to increase
+ transmit burst lengths on the bus.
+
+NOTE:
+ setpci modifies the adapter's configuration registers to allow it to read
+ up to 4k bytes at a time (for transmits). However, for some systems the
+ behavior after modifying this register may be undefined (possibly errors of
+ some kind). A power-cycle, hard reset or explicitly setting the e6 register
+ back to 22 (setpci -d 8086:1a48 e6.b=22) may be required to get back to a
+ stable configuration.
+
+- COPY these lines and paste them into ixgb_perf.sh:
+
+::
+
+ #!/bin/bash
+ echo "configuring network performance , edit this file to change the interface
+ or device ID of 10GbE card"
+ # set mmrbc to 4k reads, modify only Intel 10GbE device IDs
+ # replace 1a48 with appropriate 10GbE device's ID installed on the system,
+ # if needed.
+ setpci -d 8086:1a48 e6.b=2e
+ # set the MTU (max transmission unit) - it requires your switch and clients
+ # to change as well.
+ # set the txqueuelen
+ # your ixgb adapter should be loaded as eth1 for this to work, change if needed
+ ip li set dev eth1 mtu 9000 txqueuelen 1000 up
+ # call the sysctl utility to modify /proc/sys entries
+ sysctl -p ./sysctl_ixgb.conf
+
+- COPY these lines and paste them into sysctl_ixgb.conf:
+
+::
+
+ # some of the defaults may be different for your kernel
+ # call this file with sysctl -p <this file>
+ # these are just suggested values that worked well to increase throughput in
+ # several network benchmark tests, your mileage may vary
+
+ ### IPV4 specific settings
+ # turn TCP timestamp support off, default 1, reduces CPU use
+ net.ipv4.tcp_timestamps = 0
+ # turn SACK support off, default on
+ # on systems with a VERY fast bus -> memory interface this is the big gainer
+ net.ipv4.tcp_sack = 0
+ # set min/default/max TCP read buffer, default 4096 87380 174760
+ net.ipv4.tcp_rmem = 10000000 10000000 10000000
+ # set min/pressure/max TCP write buffer, default 4096 16384 131072
+ net.ipv4.tcp_wmem = 10000000 10000000 10000000
+ # set min/pressure/max TCP buffer space, default 31744 32256 32768
+ net.ipv4.tcp_mem = 10000000 10000000 10000000
+
+ ### CORE settings (mostly for socket and UDP effect)
+ # set maximum receive socket buffer size, default 131071
+ net.core.rmem_max = 524287
+ # set maximum send socket buffer size, default 131071
+ net.core.wmem_max = 524287
+ # set default receive socket buffer size, default 65535
+ net.core.rmem_default = 524287
+ # set default send socket buffer size, default 65535
+ net.core.wmem_default = 524287
+ # set maximum amount of option memory buffers, default 10240
+ net.core.optmem_max = 524287
+ # set number of unprocessed input packets before kernel starts dropping them; default 300
+ net.core.netdev_max_backlog = 300000
+
+Edit the ixgb_perf.sh script if necessary to change eth1 to whatever interface
+your ixgb driver is using and/or replace '1a48' with appropriate 10GbE device's
+ID installed on the system.
+
+NOTE:
+ Unless these scripts are added to the boot process, these changes will
+ only last only until the next system reboot.
+
+
+Resolving Slow UDP Traffic
+--------------------------
+If your server does not seem to be able to receive UDP traffic as fast as it
+can receive TCP traffic, it could be because Linux, by default, does not set
+the network stack buffers as large as they need to be to support high UDP
+transfer rates. One way to alleviate this problem is to allow more memory to
+be used by the IP stack to store incoming data.
+
+For instance, use the commands::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.rmem_max=262143
+
+and::
+
+ sysctl -w net.core.rmem_default=262143
+
+to increase the read buffer memory max and default to 262143 (256k - 1) from
+defaults of max=131071 (128k - 1) and default=65535 (64k - 1). These variables
+will increase the amount of memory used by the network stack for receives, and
+can be increased significantly more if necessary for your application.
+
+
+Additional Configurations
+=========================
+
+Configuring the Driver on Different Distributions
+-------------------------------------------------
+Configuring a network driver to load properly when the system is started is
+distribution dependent. Typically, the configuration process involves adding
+an alias line to /etc/modprobe.conf as well as editing other system startup
+scripts and/or configuration files. Many popular Linux distributions ship
+with tools to make these changes for you. To learn the proper way to
+configure a network device for your system, refer to your distribution
+documentation. If during this process you are asked for the driver or module
+name, the name for the Linux Base Driver for the Intel 10GbE Family of
+Adapters is ixgb.
+
+Viewing Link Messages
+---------------------
+Link messages will not be displayed to the console if the distribution is
+restricting system messages. In order to see network driver link messages on
+your console, set dmesg to eight by entering the following::
+
+ dmesg -n 8
+
+NOTE: This setting is not saved across reboots.
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+The driver supports Jumbo Frames for all adapters. Jumbo Frames support is
+enabled by changing the MTU to a value larger than the default of 1500.
+The maximum value for the MTU is 16114. Use the ip command to
+increase the MTU size. For example::
+
+ ip li set dev ethx mtu 9000
+
+The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 16114. This value coincides
+with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 16128.
+
+Ethtool
+-------
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The ethtool
+version 1.6 or later is required for this functionality.
+
+The latest release of ethtool can be found from
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+NOTE:
+ The ethtool version 1.6 only supports a limited set of ethtool options.
+ Support for a more complete ethtool feature set can be enabled by
+ upgrading to the latest version.
+
+NAPI
+----
+NAPI (Rx polling mode) is supported in the ixgb driver.
+
+See https://wiki.linuxfoundation.org/networking/napi for more information on
+NAPI.
+
+
+Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+============================
+
+NOTE:
+ After installing the driver, if your Intel Network Connection is not
+ working, verify in the "In This Release" section of the readme that you have
+ installed the correct driver.
+
+Cable Interoperability Issue with Fujitsu XENPAK Module in SmartBits Chassis
+----------------------------------------------------------------------------
+Excessive CRC errors may be observed if the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE CX4
+Server adapter is connected to a Fujitsu XENPAK CX4 module in a SmartBits
+chassis using 15 m/24AWG cable assemblies manufactured by Fujitsu or Leoni.
+The CRC errors may be received either by the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE CX4
+Server adapter or the SmartBits. If this situation occurs using a different
+cable assembly may resolve the issue.
+
+Cable Interoperability Issues with HP Procurve 3400cl Switch Port
+-----------------------------------------------------------------
+Excessive CRC errors may be observed if the Intel(R) PRO/10GbE CX4 Server
+adapter is connected to an HP Procurve 3400cl switch port using short cables
+(1 m or shorter). If this situation occurs, using a longer cable may resolve
+the issue.
+
+Excessive CRC errors may be observed using Fujitsu 24AWG cable assemblies that
+Are 10 m or longer or where using a Leoni 15 m/24AWG cable assembly. The CRC
+errors may be received either by the CX4 Server adapter or at the switch. If
+this situation occurs, using a different cable assembly may resolve the issue.
+
+Jumbo Frames System Requirement
+-------------------------------
+Memory allocation failures have been observed on Linux systems with 64 MB
+of RAM or less that are running Jumbo Frames. If you are using Jumbo
+Frames, your system may require more than the advertised minimum
+requirement of 64 MB of system memory.
+
+Performance Degradation with Jumbo Frames
+-----------------------------------------
+Degradation in throughput performance may be observed in some Jumbo frames
+environments. If this is observed, increasing the application's socket buffer
+size and/or increasing the /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_*mem entry values may help.
+See the specific application manual and /usr/src/linux*/Documentation/
+networking/ip-sysctl.txt for more details.
+
+Allocating Rx Buffers when Using Jumbo Frames
+---------------------------------------------
+Allocating Rx buffers when using Jumbo Frames on 2.6.x kernels may fail if
+the available memory is heavily fragmented. This issue may be seen with PCI-X
+adapters or with packet split disabled. This can be reduced or eliminated
+by changing the amount of available memory for receive buffer allocation, by
+increasing /proc/sys/vm/min_free_kbytes.
+
+Multiple Interfaces on Same Ethernet Broadcast Network
+------------------------------------------------------
+Due to the default ARP behavior on Linux, it is not possible to have
+one system on two IP networks in the same Ethernet broadcast domain
+(non-partitioned switch) behave as expected. All Ethernet interfaces
+will respond to IP traffic for any IP address assigned to the system.
+This results in unbalanced receive traffic.
+
+If you have multiple interfaces in a server, do either of the following:
+
+ - Turn on ARP filtering by entering::
+
+ echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/arp_filter
+
+ - Install the interfaces in separate broadcast domains - either in
+ different switches or in a switch partitioned to VLANs.
+
+UDP Stress Test Dropped Packet Issue
+--------------------------------------
+Under small packets UDP stress test with 10GbE driver, the Linux system
+may drop UDP packets due to the fullness of socket buffers. You may want
+to change the driver's Flow Control variables to the minimum value for
+controlling packet reception.
+
+Tx Hangs Possible Under Stress
+------------------------------
+Under stress conditions, if TX hangs occur, turning off TSO
+"ethtool -K eth0 tso off" may resolve the problem.
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbe.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbe.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0a233b17c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbe.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,557 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+===========================================================================
+Linux Base Driver for the Intel(R) Ethernet 10 Gigabit PCI Express Adapters
+===========================================================================
+
+Intel 10 Gigabit Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Command Line Parameters
+- Additional Configurations
+- Known Issues
+- Support
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+The driver is compatible with devices based on the following:
+
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 82598
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 82599
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X520
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X540
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller x550
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X552
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X553
+
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel
+network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+SFP+ Devices with Pluggable Optics
+----------------------------------
+
+82599-BASED ADAPTERS
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+NOTES:
+- If your 82599-based Intel(R) Network Adapter came with Intel optics or is an
+Intel(R) Ethernet Server Adapter X520-2, then it only supports Intel optics
+and/or the direct attach cables listed below.
+- When 82599-based SFP+ devices are connected back to back, they should be set
+to the same Speed setting via ethtool. Results may vary if you mix speed
+settings.
+
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Supplier | Type | Part Numbers |
++===============+=======================================+==================+
+| SR Modules |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) | FTLX8571D3BCV-IT |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) | AFBR-703SDZ-IN2 |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (bailed) | AFBR-703SDDZ-IN1 |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| LR Modules |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) | FTLX1471D3BCV-IT |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) | AFCT-701SDZ-IN2 |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (bailed) | AFCT-701SDDZ-IN1 |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+
+The following is a list of 3rd party SFP+ modules that have received some
+testing. Not all modules are applicable to all devices.
+
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Supplier | Type | Part Numbers |
++===============+=======================================+==================+
+| Finisar | SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate | FTLX8571D3BCL |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Avago | SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate | AFBR-700SDZ |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Finisar | SFP+ LR bailed, 10g single rate | FTLX1471D3BCL |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Finisar | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (No Bail) | FTLX8571D3QCV-IT |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Avago | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ SR (No Bail) | AFBR-703SDZ-IN1 |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Finisar | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (No Bail) | FTLX1471D3QCV-IT |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Avago | DUAL RATE 1G/10G SFP+ LR (No Bail) | AFCT-701SDZ-IN1 |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Finisar | 1000BASE-T SFP | FCLF8522P2BTL |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Avago | 1000BASE-T | ABCU-5710RZ |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| HP | 1000BASE-SX SFP | 453153-001 |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+
+82599-based adapters support all passive and active limiting direct attach
+cables that comply with SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications.
+
+Laser turns off for SFP+ when ifconfig ethX down
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+"ifconfig ethX down" turns off the laser for 82599-based SFP+ fiber adapters.
+"ifconfig ethX up" turns on the laser.
+Alternatively, you can use "ip link set [down/up] dev ethX" to turn the
+laser off and on.
+
+
+82599-based QSFP+ Adapters
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+NOTES:
+- If your 82599-based Intel(R) Network Adapter came with Intel optics, it only
+supports Intel optics.
+- 82599-based QSFP+ adapters only support 4x10 Gbps connections. 1x40 Gbps
+connections are not supported. QSFP+ link partners must be configured for
+4x10 Gbps.
+- 82599-based QSFP+ adapters do not support automatic link speed detection.
+The link speed must be configured to either 10 Gbps or 1 Gbps to match the link
+partners speed capabilities. Incorrect speed configurations will result in
+failure to link.
+- Intel(R) Ethernet Converged Network Adapter X520-Q1 only supports the optics
+and direct attach cables listed below.
+
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Supplier | Type | Part Numbers |
++===============+=======================================+==================+
+| Intel | DUAL RATE 1G/10G QSFP+ SRL (bailed) | E10GQSFPSR |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+
+82599-based QSFP+ adapters support all passive and active limiting QSFP+
+direct attach cables that comply with SFF-8436 v4.1 specifications.
+
+82598-BASED ADAPTERS
+~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~
+NOTES:
+- Intel(r) Ethernet Network Adapters that support removable optical modules
+only support their original module type (for example, the Intel(R) 10 Gigabit
+SR Dual Port Express Module only supports SR optical modules). If you plug in
+a different type of module, the driver will not load.
+- Hot Swapping/hot plugging optical modules is not supported.
+- Only single speed, 10 gigabit modules are supported.
+- LAN on Motherboard (LOMs) may support DA, SR, or LR modules. Other module
+types are not supported. Please see your system documentation for details.
+
+The following is a list of SFP+ modules and direct attach cables that have
+received some testing. Not all modules are applicable to all devices.
+
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Supplier | Type | Part Numbers |
++===============+=======================================+==================+
+| Finisar | SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate | FTLX8571D3BCL |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Avago | SFP+ SR bailed, 10g single rate | AFBR-700SDZ |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+| Finisar | SFP+ LR bailed, 10g single rate | FTLX1471D3BCL |
++---------------+---------------------------------------+------------------+
+
+82598-based adapters support all passive direct attach cables that comply with
+SFF-8431 v4.1 and SFF-8472 v10.4 specifications. Active direct attach cables
+are not supported.
+
+Third party optic modules and cables referred to above are listed only for the
+purpose of highlighting third party specifications and potential
+compatibility, and are not recommendations or endorsements or sponsorship of
+any third party's product by Intel. Intel is not endorsing or promoting
+products made by any third party and the third party reference is provided
+only to share information regarding certain optic modules and cables with the
+above specifications. There may be other manufacturers or suppliers, producing
+or supplying optic modules and cables with similar or matching descriptions.
+Customers must use their own discretion and diligence to purchase optic
+modules and cables from any third party of their choice. Customers are solely
+responsible for assessing the suitability of the product and/or devices and
+for the selection of the vendor for purchasing any product. THE OPTIC MODULES
+AND CABLES REFERRED TO ABOVE ARE NOT WARRANTED OR SUPPORTED BY INTEL. INTEL
+ASSUMES NO LIABILITY WHATSOEVER, AND INTEL DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
+WARRANTY, RELATING TO SALE AND/OR USE OF SUCH THIRD PARTY PRODUCTS OR
+SELECTION OF VENDOR BY CUSTOMERS.
+
+Command Line Parameters
+=======================
+
+max_vfs
+-------
+:Valid Range: 1-63
+
+This parameter adds support for SR-IOV. It causes the driver to spawn up to
+max_vfs worth of virtual functions.
+If the value is greater than 0 it will also force the VMDq parameter to be 1 or
+more.
+
+NOTE: This parameter is only used on kernel 3.7.x and below. On kernel 3.8.x
+and above, use sysfs to enable VFs. Also, for Red Hat distributions, this
+parameter is only used on version 6.6 and older. For version 6.7 and newer, use
+sysfs. For example::
+
+ #echo $num_vf_enabled > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs // enable VFs
+ #echo 0 > /sys/class/net/$dev/device/sriov_numvfs //disable VFs
+
+The parameters for the driver are referenced by position. Thus, if you have a
+dual port adapter, or more than one adapter in your system, and want N virtual
+functions per port, you must specify a number for each port with each parameter
+separated by a comma. For example::
+
+ modprobe ixgbe max_vfs=4
+
+This will spawn 4 VFs on the first port.
+
+::
+
+ modprobe ixgbe max_vfs=2,4
+
+This will spawn 2 VFs on the first port and 4 VFs on the second port.
+
+NOTE: Caution must be used in loading the driver with these parameters.
+Depending on your system configuration, number of slots, etc., it is impossible
+to predict in all cases where the positions would be on the command line.
+
+NOTE: Neither the device nor the driver control how VFs are mapped into config
+space. Bus layout will vary by operating system. On operating systems that
+support it, you can check sysfs to find the mapping.
+
+NOTE: When either SR-IOV mode or VMDq mode is enabled, hardware VLAN filtering
+and VLAN tag stripping/insertion will remain enabled. Please remove the old
+VLAN filter before the new VLAN filter is added. For example,
+
+::
+
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 100 // set VLAN 100 for VF 0
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 0 // Delete VLAN 100
+ ip link set eth0 vf 0 vlan 200 // set a new VLAN 200 for VF 0
+
+With kernel 3.6, the driver supports the simultaneous usage of max_vfs and DCB
+features, subject to the constraints described below. Prior to kernel 3.6, the
+driver did not support the simultaneous operation of max_vfs greater than 0 and
+the DCB features (multiple traffic classes utilizing Priority Flow Control and
+Extended Transmission Selection).
+
+When DCB is enabled, network traffic is transmitted and received through
+multiple traffic classes (packet buffers in the NIC). The traffic is associated
+with a specific class based on priority, which has a value of 0 through 7 used
+in the VLAN tag. When SR-IOV is not enabled, each traffic class is associated
+with a set of receive/transmit descriptor queue pairs. The number of queue
+pairs for a given traffic class depends on the hardware configuration. When
+SR-IOV is enabled, the descriptor queue pairs are grouped into pools. The
+Physical Function (PF) and each Virtual Function (VF) is allocated a pool of
+receive/transmit descriptor queue pairs. When multiple traffic classes are
+configured (for example, DCB is enabled), each pool contains a queue pair from
+each traffic class. When a single traffic class is configured in the hardware,
+the pools contain multiple queue pairs from the single traffic class.
+
+The number of VFs that can be allocated depends on the number of traffic
+classes that can be enabled. The configurable number of traffic classes for
+each enabled VF is as follows:
+0 - 15 VFs = Up to 8 traffic classes, depending on device support
+16 - 31 VFs = Up to 4 traffic classes
+32 - 63 VFs = 1 traffic class
+
+When VFs are configured, the PF is allocated one pool as well. The PF supports
+the DCB features with the constraint that each traffic class will only use a
+single queue pair. When zero VFs are configured, the PF can support multiple
+queue pairs per traffic class.
+
+allow_unsupported_sfp
+---------------------
+:Valid Range: 0,1
+:Default Value: 0 (disabled)
+
+This parameter allows unsupported and untested SFP+ modules on 82599-based
+adapters, as long as the type of module is known to the driver.
+
+debug
+-----
+:Valid Range: 0-16 (0=none,...,16=all)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This parameter adjusts the level of debug messages displayed in the system
+logs.
+
+
+Additional Features and Configurations
+======================================
+
+Flow Control
+------------
+Ethernet Flow Control (IEEE 802.3x) can be configured with ethtool to enable
+receiving and transmitting pause frames for ixgbe. When transmit is enabled,
+pause frames are generated when the receive packet buffer crosses a predefined
+threshold. When receive is enabled, the transmit unit will halt for the time
+delay specified when a pause frame is received.
+
+NOTE: You must have a flow control capable link partner.
+
+Flow Control is enabled by default.
+
+Use ethtool to change the flow control settings. To enable or disable Rx or
+Tx Flow Control::
+
+ ethtool -A eth? rx <on|off> tx <on|off>
+
+Note: This command only enables or disables Flow Control if auto-negotiation is
+disabled. If auto-negotiation is enabled, this command changes the parameters
+used for auto-negotiation with the link partner.
+
+To enable or disable auto-negotiation::
+
+ ethtool -s eth? autoneg <on|off>
+
+Note: Flow Control auto-negotiation is part of link auto-negotiation. Depending
+on your device, you may not be able to change the auto-negotiation setting.
+
+NOTE: For 82598 backplane cards entering 1 gigabit mode, flow control default
+behavior is changed to off. Flow control in 1 gigabit mode on these devices can
+lead to transmit hangs.
+
+Intel(R) Ethernet Flow Director
+-------------------------------
+The Intel Ethernet Flow Director performs the following tasks:
+
+- Directs receive packets according to their flows to different queues.
+- Enables tight control on routing a flow in the platform.
+- Matches flows and CPU cores for flow affinity.
+- Supports multiple parameters for flexible flow classification and load
+ balancing (in SFP mode only).
+
+NOTE: Intel Ethernet Flow Director masking works in the opposite manner from
+subnet masking. In the following command::
+
+ #ethtool -N eth11 flow-type ip4 src-ip 172.4.1.2 m 255.0.0.0 dst-ip \
+ 172.21.1.1 m 255.128.0.0 action 31
+
+The src-ip value that is written to the filter will be 0.4.1.2, not 172.0.0.0
+as might be expected. Similarly, the dst-ip value written to the filter will be
+0.21.1.1, not 172.0.0.0.
+
+To enable or disable the Intel Ethernet Flow Director::
+
+ # ethtool -K ethX ntuple <on|off>
+
+When disabling ntuple filters, all the user programmed filters are flushed from
+the driver cache and hardware. All needed filters must be re-added when ntuple
+is re-enabled.
+
+To add a filter that directs packet to queue 2, use -U or -N switch::
+
+ # ethtool -N ethX flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.10.1 dst-ip \
+ 192.168.10.2 src-port 2000 dst-port 2001 action 2 [loc 1]
+
+To see the list of filters currently present::
+
+ # ethtool <-u|-n> ethX
+
+Sideband Perfect Filters
+------------------------
+Sideband Perfect Filters are used to direct traffic that matches specified
+characteristics. They are enabled through ethtool's ntuple interface. To add a
+new filter use the following command::
+
+ ethtool -U <device> flow-type <type> src-ip <ip> dst-ip <ip> src-port <port> \
+ dst-port <port> action <queue>
+
+Where:
+ <device> - the ethernet device to program
+ <type> - can be ip4, tcp4, udp4, or sctp4
+ <ip> - the IP address to match on
+ <port> - the port number to match on
+ <queue> - the queue to direct traffic towards (-1 discards the matched traffic)
+
+Use the following command to delete a filter::
+
+ ethtool -U <device> delete <N>
+
+Where <N> is the filter id displayed when printing all the active filters, and
+may also have been specified using "loc <N>" when adding the filter.
+
+The following example matches TCP traffic sent from 192.168.0.1, port 5300,
+directed to 192.168.0.5, port 80, and sends it to queue 7::
+
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type tcp4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 dst-ip 192.168.0.5 \
+ src-port 5300 dst-port 80 action 7
+
+For each flow-type, the programmed filters must all have the same matching
+input set. For example, issuing the following two commands is acceptable::
+
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10
+
+Issuing the next two commands, however, is not acceptable, since the first
+specifies src-ip and the second specifies dst-ip::
+
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 src-ip 192.168.0.1 src-port 5300 action 7
+ ethtool -U enp130s0 flow-type ip4 dst-ip 192.168.0.5 src-port 55 action 10
+
+The second command will fail with an error. You may program multiple filters
+with the same fields, using different values, but, on one device, you may not
+program two TCP4 filters with different matching fields.
+
+Matching on a sub-portion of a field is not supported by the ixgbe driver, thus
+partial mask fields are not supported.
+
+To create filters that direct traffic to a specific Virtual Function, use the
+"user-def" parameter. Specify the user-def as a 64 bit value, where the lower 32
+bits represents the queue number, while the next 8 bits represent which VF.
+Note that 0 is the PF, so the VF identifier is offset by 1. For example::
+
+ ... user-def 0x800000002 ...
+
+specifies to direct traffic to Virtual Function 7 (8 minus 1) into queue 2 of
+that VF.
+
+Note that these filters will not break internal routing rules, and will not
+route traffic that otherwise would not have been sent to the specified Virtual
+Function.
+
+Jumbo Frames
+------------
+Jumbo Frames support is enabled by changing the Maximum Transmission Unit (MTU)
+to a value larger than the default value of 1500.
+
+Use the ifconfig command to increase the MTU size. For example, enter the
+following where <x> is the interface number::
+
+ ifconfig eth<x> mtu 9000 up
+
+Alternatively, you can use the ip command as follows::
+
+ ip link set mtu 9000 dev eth<x>
+ ip link set up dev eth<x>
+
+This setting is not saved across reboots. The setting change can be made
+permanent by adding 'MTU=9000' to the file::
+
+ /etc/sysconfig/network-scripts/ifcfg-eth<x> // for RHEL
+ /etc/sysconfig/network/<config_file> // for SLES
+
+NOTE: The maximum MTU setting for Jumbo Frames is 9710. This value coincides
+with the maximum Jumbo Frames size of 9728 bytes.
+
+NOTE: This driver will attempt to use multiple page sized buffers to receive
+each jumbo packet. This should help to avoid buffer starvation issues when
+allocating receive packets.
+
+NOTE: For 82599-based network connections, if you are enabling jumbo frames in
+a virtual function (VF), jumbo frames must first be enabled in the physical
+function (PF). The VF MTU setting cannot be larger than the PF MTU.
+
+NBASE-T Support
+---------------
+The ixgbe driver supports NBASE-T on some devices. However, the advertisement
+of NBASE-T speeds is suppressed by default, to accommodate broken network
+switches which cannot cope with advertised NBASE-T speeds. Use the ethtool
+command to enable advertising NBASE-T speeds on devices which support it::
+
+ ethtool -s eth? advertise 0x1800000001028
+
+On Linux systems with INTERFACES(5), this can be specified as a pre-up command
+in /etc/network/interfaces so that the interface is always brought up with
+NBASE-T support, e.g.::
+
+ iface eth? inet dhcp
+ pre-up ethtool -s eth? advertise 0x1800000001028 || true
+
+Generic Receive Offload, aka GRO
+--------------------------------
+The driver supports the in-kernel software implementation of GRO. GRO has
+shown that by coalescing Rx traffic into larger chunks of data, CPU
+utilization can be significantly reduced when under large Rx load. GRO is an
+evolution of the previously-used LRO interface. GRO is able to coalesce
+other protocols besides TCP. It's also safe to use with configurations that
+are problematic for LRO, namely bridging and iSCSI.
+
+Data Center Bridging (DCB)
+--------------------------
+NOTE:
+The kernel assumes that TC0 is available, and will disable Priority Flow
+Control (PFC) on the device if TC0 is not available. To fix this, ensure TC0 is
+enabled when setting up DCB on your switch.
+
+DCB is a configuration Quality of Service implementation in hardware. It uses
+the VLAN priority tag (802.1p) to filter traffic. That means that there are 8
+different priorities that traffic can be filtered into. It also enables
+priority flow control (802.1Qbb) which can limit or eliminate the number of
+dropped packets during network stress. Bandwidth can be allocated to each of
+these priorities, which is enforced at the hardware level (802.1Qaz).
+
+Adapter firmware implements LLDP and DCBX protocol agents as per 802.1AB and
+802.1Qaz respectively. The firmware based DCBX agent runs in willing mode only
+and can accept settings from a DCBX capable peer. Software configuration of
+DCBX parameters via dcbtool/lldptool are not supported.
+
+The ixgbe driver implements the DCB netlink interface layer to allow user-space
+to communicate with the driver and query DCB configuration for the port.
+
+ethtool
+-------
+The driver utilizes the ethtool interface for driver configuration and
+diagnostics, as well as displaying statistical information. The latest ethtool
+version is required for this functionality. Download it at:
+https://www.kernel.org/pub/software/network/ethtool/
+
+FCoE
+----
+The ixgbe driver supports Fiber Channel over Ethernet (FCoE) and Data Center
+Bridging (DCB). This code has no default effect on the regular driver
+operation. Configuring DCB and FCoE is outside the scope of this README. Refer
+to http://www.open-fcoe.org/ for FCoE project information and contact
+ixgbe-eedc@lists.sourceforge.net for DCB information.
+
+MAC and VLAN anti-spoofing feature
+----------------------------------
+When a malicious driver attempts to send a spoofed packet, it is dropped by the
+hardware and not transmitted.
+
+An interrupt is sent to the PF driver notifying it of the spoof attempt. When a
+spoofed packet is detected, the PF driver will send the following message to
+the system log (displayed by the "dmesg" command)::
+
+ ixgbe ethX: ixgbe_spoof_check: n spoofed packets detected
+
+where "x" is the PF interface number; and "n" is number of spoofed packets.
+NOTE: This feature can be disabled for a specific Virtual Function (VF)::
+
+ ip link set <pf dev> vf <vf id> spoofchk {off|on}
+
+IPsec Offload
+-------------
+The ixgbe driver supports IPsec Hardware Offload. When creating Security
+Associations with "ip xfrm ..." the 'offload' tag option can be used to
+register the IPsec SA with the driver in order to get higher throughput in
+the secure communications.
+
+The offload is also supported for ixgbe's VFs, but the VF must be set as
+'trusted' and the support must be enabled with::
+
+ ethtool --set-priv-flags eth<x> vf-ipsec on
+ ip link set eth<x> vf <y> trust on
+
+
+Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+============================
+
+Enabling SR-IOV in a 64-bit Microsoft Windows Server 2012/R2 guest OS
+---------------------------------------------------------------------
+Linux KVM Hypervisor/VMM supports direct assignment of a PCIe device to a VM.
+This includes traditional PCIe devices, as well as SR-IOV-capable devices based
+on the Intel Ethernet Controller XL710.
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbevf.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbevf.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..76bbde736
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/intel/ixgbevf.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,67 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+============================================================
+Linux Base Virtual Function Driver for Intel(R) 10G Ethernet
+============================================================
+
+Intel 10 Gigabit Virtual Function Linux driver.
+Copyright(c) 1999-2018 Intel Corporation.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Identifying Your Adapter
+- Known Issues
+- Support
+
+This driver supports 82599, X540, X550, and X552-based virtual function devices
+that can only be activated on kernels that support SR-IOV.
+
+For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
+supplied with your Intel adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply to use
+with Linux.
+
+
+Identifying Your Adapter
+========================
+The driver is compatible with devices based on the following:
+
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 82598
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller 82599
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X520
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X540
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller x550
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X552
+ * Intel(R) Ethernet Controller X553
+
+For information on how to identify your adapter, and for the latest Intel
+network drivers, refer to the Intel Support website:
+https://www.intel.com/support
+
+Known Issues/Troubleshooting
+============================
+
+SR-IOV requires the correct platform and OS support.
+
+The guest OS loading this driver must support MSI-X interrupts.
+
+This driver is only supported as a loadable module at this time. Intel is not
+supplying patches against the kernel source to allow for static linking of the
+drivers.
+
+VLANs: There is a limit of a total of 64 shared VLANs to 1 or more VFs.
+
+
+Support
+=======
+For general information, go to the Intel support website at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/
+
+or the Intel Wired Networking project hosted by Sourceforge at:
+
+https://sourceforge.net/projects/e1000
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the issue
+to e1000-devel@lists.sf.net.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeontx2.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeontx2.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..88f508338
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/marvell/octeontx2.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,159 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+====================================
+Marvell OcteonTx2 RVU Kernel Drivers
+====================================
+
+Copyright (c) 2020 Marvell International Ltd.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- `Overview`_
+- `Drivers`_
+- `Basic packet flow`_
+
+Overview
+========
+
+Resource virtualization unit (RVU) on Marvell's OcteonTX2 SOC maps HW
+resources from the network, crypto and other functional blocks into
+PCI-compatible physical and virtual functions. Each functional block
+again has multiple local functions (LFs) for provisioning to PCI devices.
+RVU supports multiple PCIe SRIOV physical functions (PFs) and virtual
+functions (VFs). PF0 is called the administrative / admin function (AF)
+and has privileges to provision RVU functional block's LFs to each of the
+PF/VF.
+
+RVU managed networking functional blocks
+ - Network pool or buffer allocator (NPA)
+ - Network interface controller (NIX)
+ - Network parser CAM (NPC)
+ - Schedule/Synchronize/Order unit (SSO)
+ - Loopback interface (LBK)
+
+RVU managed non-networking functional blocks
+ - Crypto accelerator (CPT)
+ - Scheduled timers unit (TIM)
+ - Schedule/Synchronize/Order unit (SSO)
+ Used for both networking and non networking usecases
+
+Resource provisioning examples
+ - A PF/VF with NIX-LF & NPA-LF resources works as a pure network device
+ - A PF/VF with CPT-LF resource works as a pure crypto offload device.
+
+RVU functional blocks are highly configurable as per software requirements.
+
+Firmware setups following stuff before kernel boots
+ - Enables required number of RVU PFs based on number of physical links.
+ - Number of VFs per PF are either static or configurable at compile time.
+ Based on config, firmware assigns VFs to each of the PFs.
+ - Also assigns MSIX vectors to each of PF and VFs.
+ - These are not changed after kernel boot.
+
+Drivers
+=======
+
+Linux kernel will have multiple drivers registering to different PF and VFs
+of RVU. Wrt networking there will be 3 flavours of drivers.
+
+Admin Function driver
+---------------------
+
+As mentioned above RVU PF0 is called the admin function (AF), this driver
+supports resource provisioning and configuration of functional blocks.
+Doesn't handle any I/O. It sets up few basic stuff but most of the
+funcionality is achieved via configuration requests from PFs and VFs.
+
+PF/VFs communicates with AF via a shared memory region (mailbox). Upon
+receiving requests AF does resource provisioning and other HW configuration.
+AF is always attached to host kernel, but PFs and their VFs may be used by host
+kernel itself, or attached to VMs or to userspace applications like
+DPDK etc. So AF has to handle provisioning/configuration requests sent
+by any device from any domain.
+
+AF driver also interacts with underlying firmware to
+ - Manage physical ethernet links ie CGX LMACs.
+ - Retrieve information like speed, duplex, autoneg etc
+ - Retrieve PHY EEPROM and stats.
+ - Configure FEC, PAM modes
+ - etc
+
+From pure networking side AF driver supports following functionality.
+ - Map a physical link to a RVU PF to which a netdev is registered.
+ - Attach NIX and NPA block LFs to RVU PF/VF which provide buffer pools, RQs, SQs
+ for regular networking functionality.
+ - Flow control (pause frames) enable/disable/config.
+ - HW PTP timestamping related config.
+ - NPC parser profile config, basically how to parse pkt and what info to extract.
+ - NPC extract profile config, what to extract from the pkt to match data in MCAM entries.
+ - Manage NPC MCAM entries, upon request can frame and install requested packet forwarding rules.
+ - Defines receive side scaling (RSS) algorithms.
+ - Defines segmentation offload algorithms (eg TSO)
+ - VLAN stripping, capture and insertion config.
+ - SSO and TIM blocks config which provide packet scheduling support.
+ - Debugfs support, to check current resource provising, current status of
+ NPA pools, NIX RQ, SQ and CQs, various stats etc which helps in debugging issues.
+ - And many more.
+
+Physical Function driver
+------------------------
+
+This RVU PF handles IO, is mapped to a physical ethernet link and this
+driver registers a netdev. This supports SR-IOV. As said above this driver
+communicates with AF with a mailbox. To retrieve information from physical
+links this driver talks to AF and AF gets that info from firmware and responds
+back ie cannot talk to firmware directly.
+
+Supports ethtool for configuring links, RSS, queue count, queue size,
+flow control, ntuple filters, dump PHY EEPROM, config FEC etc.
+
+Virtual Function driver
+-----------------------
+
+There are two types VFs, VFs that share the physical link with their parent
+SR-IOV PF and the VFs which work in pairs using internal HW loopback channels (LBK).
+
+Type1:
+ - These VFs and their parent PF share a physical link and used for outside communication.
+ - VFs cannot communicate with AF directly, they send mbox message to PF and PF
+ forwards that to AF. AF after processing, responds back to PF and PF forwards
+ the reply to VF.
+ - From functionality point of view there is no difference between PF and VF as same type
+ HW resources are attached to both. But user would be able to configure few stuff only
+ from PF as PF is treated as owner/admin of the link.
+
+Type2:
+ - RVU PF0 ie admin function creates these VFs and maps them to loopback block's channels.
+ - A set of two VFs (VF0 & VF1, VF2 & VF3 .. so on) works as a pair ie pkts sent out of
+ VF0 will be received by VF1 and viceversa.
+ - These VFs can be used by applications or virtual machines to communicate between them
+ without sending traffic outside. There is no switch present in HW, hence the support
+ for loopback VFs.
+ - These communicate directly with AF (PF0) via mbox.
+
+Except for the IO channels or links used for packet reception and transmission there is
+no other difference between these VF types. AF driver takes care of IO channel mapping,
+hence same VF driver works for both types of devices.
+
+Basic packet flow
+=================
+
+Ingress
+-------
+
+1. CGX LMAC receives packet.
+2. Forwards the packet to the NIX block.
+3. Then submitted to NPC block for parsing and then MCAM lookup to get the destination RVU device.
+4. NIX LF attached to the destination RVU device allocates a buffer from RQ mapped buffer pool of NPA block LF.
+5. RQ may be selected by RSS or by configuring MCAM rule with a RQ number.
+6. Packet is DMA'ed and driver is notified.
+
+Egress
+------
+
+1. Driver prepares a send descriptor and submits to SQ for transmission.
+2. The SQ is already configured (by AF) to transmit on a specific link/channel.
+3. The SQ descriptor ring is maintained in buffers allocated from SQ mapped pool of NPA block LF.
+4. NIX block transmits the pkt on the designated channel.
+5. NPC MCAM entries can be installed to divert pkt onto a different channel.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/mellanox/mlx5.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/mellanox/mlx5.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e9b65035c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/mellanox/mlx5.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,321 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0 OR Linux-OpenIB
+
+=================================================
+Mellanox ConnectX(R) mlx5 core VPI Network Driver
+=================================================
+
+Copyright (c) 2019, Mellanox Technologies LTD.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- `Enabling the driver and kconfig options`_
+- `Devlink info`_
+- `Devlink parameters`_
+- `Devlink health reporters`_
+- `mlx5 tracepoints`_
+
+Enabling the driver and kconfig options
+================================================
+
+| mlx5 core is modular and most of the major mlx5 core driver features can be selected (compiled in/out)
+| at build time via kernel Kconfig flags.
+| Basic features, ethernet net device rx/tx offloads and XDP, are available with the most basic flags
+| CONFIG_MLX5_CORE=y/m and CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN=y.
+| For the list of advanced features please see below.
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE=(y/m/n)** (module mlx5_core.ko)
+
+| The driver can be enabled by choosing CONFIG_MLX5_CORE=y/m in kernel config.
+| This will provide mlx5 core driver for mlx5 ulps to interface with (mlx5e, mlx5_ib).
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN=(y/n)**
+
+| Choosing this option will allow basic ethernet netdevice support with all of the standard rx/tx offloads.
+| mlx5e is the mlx5 ulp driver which provides netdevice kernel interface, when chosen, mlx5e will be
+| built-in into mlx5_core.ko.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_ARFS=(y/n)**
+
+| Enables Hardware-accelerated receive flow steering (arfs) support, and ntuple filtering.
+| https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/howto-configure-arfs-on-connectx-4
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_RXNFC=(y/n)**
+
+| Enables ethtool receive network flow classification, which allows user defined
+| flow rules to direct traffic into arbitrary rx queue via ethtool set/get_rxnfc API.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN_DCB=(y/n)**:
+
+| Enables `Data Center Bridging (DCB) Support <https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/howto-auto-config-pfc-and-ets-on-connectx-4-via-lldp-dcbx>`_.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_MPFS=(y/n)**
+
+| Ethernet Multi-Physical Function Switch (MPFS) support in ConnectX NIC.
+| MPFs is required for when `Multi-Host <http://www.mellanox.com/page/multihost>`_ configuration is enabled to allow passing
+| user configured unicast MAC addresses to the requesting PF.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_ESWITCH=(y/n)**
+
+| Ethernet SRIOV E-Switch support in ConnectX NIC. E-Switch provides internal SRIOV packet steering
+| and switching for the enabled VFs and PF in two available modes:
+| 1) `Legacy SRIOV mode (L2 mac vlan steering based) <https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/howto-configure-sr-iov-for-connectx-4-connectx-5-with-kvm--ethernet-x>`_.
+| 2) `Switchdev mode (eswitch offloads) <https://www.mellanox.com/related-docs/prod_software/ASAP2_Hardware_Offloading_for_vSwitches_User_Manual_v4.4.pdf>`_.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_IPOIB=(y/n)**
+
+| IPoIB offloads & acceleration support.
+| Requires CONFIG_MLX5_CORE_EN to provide an accelerated interface for the rdma
+| IPoIB ulp netdevice.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_FPGA=(y/n)**
+
+| Build support for the Innova family of network cards by Mellanox Technologies.
+| Innova network cards are comprised of a ConnectX chip and an FPGA chip on one board.
+| If you select this option, the mlx5_core driver will include the Innova FPGA core and allow
+| building sandbox-specific client drivers.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_IPSEC=(y/n)**
+
+| Enables `IPSec XFRM cryptography-offload accelaration <http://www.mellanox.com/related-docs/prod_software/Mellanox_Innova_IPsec_Ethernet_Adapter_Card_User_Manual.pdf>`_.
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_EN_TLS=(y/n)**
+
+| TLS cryptography-offload accelaration.
+
+
+**CONFIG_MLX5_INFINIBAND=(y/n/m)** (module mlx5_ib.ko)
+
+| Provides low-level InfiniBand/RDMA and `RoCE <https://community.mellanox.com/s/article/recommended-network-configuration-examples-for-roce-deployment>`_ support.
+
+
+**External options** ( Choose if the corresponding mlx5 feature is required )
+
+- CONFIG_PTP_1588_CLOCK: When chosen, mlx5 ptp support will be enabled
+- CONFIG_VXLAN: When chosen, mlx5 vxlan support will be enabled.
+- CONFIG_MLXFW: When chosen, mlx5 firmware flashing support will be enabled (via devlink and ethtool).
+
+Devlink info
+============
+
+The devlink info reports the running and stored firmware versions on device.
+It also prints the device PSID which represents the HCA board type ID.
+
+User command example::
+
+ $ devlink dev info pci/0000:00:06.0
+ pci/0000:00:06.0:
+ driver mlx5_core
+ versions:
+ fixed:
+ fw.psid MT_0000000009
+ running:
+ fw.version 16.26.0100
+ stored:
+ fw.version 16.26.0100
+
+Devlink parameters
+==================
+
+flow_steering_mode: Device flow steering mode
+---------------------------------------------
+The flow steering mode parameter controls the flow steering mode of the driver.
+Two modes are supported:
+1. 'dmfs' - Device managed flow steering.
+2. 'smfs - Software/Driver managed flow steering.
+
+In DMFS mode, the HW steering entities are created and managed through the
+Firmware.
+In SMFS mode, the HW steering entities are created and managed though by
+the driver directly into Hardware without firmware intervention.
+
+SMFS mode is faster and provides better rule inserstion rate compared to default DMFS mode.
+
+User command examples:
+
+- Set SMFS flow steering mode::
+
+ $ devlink dev param set pci/0000:06:00.0 name flow_steering_mode value "smfs" cmode runtime
+
+- Read device flow steering mode::
+
+ $ devlink dev param show pci/0000:06:00.0 name flow_steering_mode
+ pci/0000:06:00.0:
+ name flow_steering_mode type driver-specific
+ values:
+ cmode runtime value smfs
+
+enable_roce: RoCE enablement state
+----------------------------------
+RoCE enablement state controls driver support for RoCE traffic.
+When RoCE is disabled, there is no gid table, only raw ethernet QPs are supported and traffic on the well known UDP RoCE port is handled as raw ethernet traffic.
+
+To change RoCE enablement state a user must change the driverinit cmode value and run devlink reload.
+
+User command examples:
+
+- Disable RoCE::
+
+ $ devlink dev param set pci/0000:06:00.0 name enable_roce value false cmode driverinit
+ $ devlink dev reload pci/0000:06:00.0
+
+- Read RoCE enablement state::
+
+ $ devlink dev param show pci/0000:06:00.0 name enable_roce
+ pci/0000:06:00.0:
+ name enable_roce type generic
+ values:
+ cmode driverinit value true
+
+Devlink health reporters
+========================
+
+tx reporter
+-----------
+The tx reporter is responsible for reporting and recovering of the following two error scenarios:
+
+- TX timeout
+ Report on kernel tx timeout detection.
+ Recover by searching lost interrupts.
+- TX error completion
+ Report on error tx completion.
+ Recover by flushing the TX queue and reset it.
+
+TX reporter also support on demand diagnose callback, on which it provides
+real time information of its send queues status.
+
+User commands examples:
+
+- Diagnose send queues status::
+
+ $ devlink health diagnose pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter tx
+
+NOTE: This command has valid output only when interface is up, otherwise the command has empty output.
+
+- Show number of tx errors indicated, number of recover flows ended successfully,
+ is autorecover enabled and graceful period from last recover::
+
+ $ devlink health show pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter tx
+
+rx reporter
+-----------
+The rx reporter is responsible for reporting and recovering of the following two error scenarios:
+
+- RX queues initialization (population) timeout
+ RX queues descriptors population on ring initialization is done in
+ napi context via triggering an irq, in case of a failure to get
+ the minimum amount of descriptors, a timeout would occur and it
+ could be recoverable by polling the EQ (Event Queue).
+- RX completions with errors (reported by HW on interrupt context)
+ Report on rx completion error.
+ Recover (if needed) by flushing the related queue and reset it.
+
+RX reporter also supports on demand diagnose callback, on which it
+provides real time information of its receive queues status.
+
+- Diagnose rx queues status, and corresponding completion queue::
+
+ $ devlink health diagnose pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter rx
+
+NOTE: This command has valid output only when interface is up, otherwise the command has empty output.
+
+- Show number of rx errors indicated, number of recover flows ended successfully,
+ is autorecover enabled and graceful period from last recover::
+
+ $ devlink health show pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter rx
+
+fw reporter
+-----------
+The fw reporter implements diagnose and dump callbacks.
+It follows symptoms of fw error such as fw syndrome by triggering
+fw core dump and storing it into the dump buffer.
+The fw reporter diagnose command can be triggered any time by the user to check
+current fw status.
+
+User commands examples:
+
+- Check fw heath status::
+
+ $ devlink health diagnose pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter fw
+
+- Read FW core dump if already stored or trigger new one::
+
+ $ devlink health dump show pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter fw
+
+NOTE: This command can run only on the PF which has fw tracer ownership,
+running it on other PF or any VF will return "Operation not permitted".
+
+fw fatal reporter
+-----------------
+The fw fatal reporter implements dump and recover callbacks.
+It follows fatal errors indications by CR-space dump and recover flow.
+The CR-space dump uses vsc interface which is valid even if the FW command
+interface is not functional, which is the case in most FW fatal errors.
+The recover function runs recover flow which reloads the driver and triggers fw
+reset if needed.
+
+User commands examples:
+
+- Run fw recover flow manually::
+
+ $ devlink health recover pci/0000:82:00.0 reporter fw_fatal
+
+- Read FW CR-space dump if already strored or trigger new one::
+
+ $ devlink health dump show pci/0000:82:00.1 reporter fw_fatal
+
+NOTE: This command can run only on PF.
+
+mlx5 tracepoints
+================
+
+mlx5 driver provides internal trace points for tracking and debugging using
+kernel tracepoints interfaces (refer to Documentation/trace/ftrace.rst).
+
+For the list of support mlx5 events check /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/events/mlx5/
+
+tc and eswitch offloads tracepoints:
+
+- mlx5e_configure_flower: trace flower filter actions and cookies offloaded to mlx5::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_configure_flower >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ tc-6535 [019] ...1 2672.404466: mlx5e_configure_flower: cookie=0000000067874a55 actions= REDIRECT
+
+- mlx5e_delete_flower: trace flower filter actions and cookies deleted from mlx5::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_delete_flower >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ tc-6569 [010] .N.1 2686.379075: mlx5e_delete_flower: cookie=0000000067874a55 actions= NULL
+
+- mlx5e_stats_flower: trace flower stats request::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_stats_flower >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ tc-6546 [010] ...1 2679.704889: mlx5e_stats_flower: cookie=0000000060eb3d6a bytes=0 packets=0 lastused=4295560217
+
+- mlx5e_tc_update_neigh_used_value: trace tunnel rule neigh update value offloaded to mlx5::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_tc_update_neigh_used_value >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ kworker/u48:4-8806 [009] ...1 55117.882428: mlx5e_tc_update_neigh_used_value: netdev: ens1f0 IPv4: 1.1.1.10 IPv6: ::ffff:1.1.1.10 neigh_used=1
+
+- mlx5e_rep_neigh_update: trace neigh update tasks scheduled due to neigh state change events::
+
+ $ echo mlx5:mlx5e_rep_neigh_update >> /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/set_event
+ $ cat /sys/kernel/debug/tracing/trace
+ ...
+ kworker/u48:7-2221 [009] ...1 1475.387435: mlx5e_rep_neigh_update: netdev: ens1f0 MAC: 24:8a:07:9a:17:9a IPv4: 1.1.1.10 IPv6: ::ffff:1.1.1.10 neigh_connected=1
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/microsoft/netvsc.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/microsoft/netvsc.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c3f51c672
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/microsoft/netvsc.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,116 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+======================
+Hyper-V network driver
+======================
+
+Compatibility
+=============
+
+This driver is compatible with Windows Server 2012 R2, 2016 and
+Windows 10.
+
+Features
+========
+
+Checksum offload
+----------------
+ The netvsc driver supports checksum offload as long as the
+ Hyper-V host version does. Windows Server 2016 and Azure
+ support checksum offload for TCP and UDP for both IPv4 and
+ IPv6. Windows Server 2012 only supports checksum offload for TCP.
+
+Receive Side Scaling
+--------------------
+ Hyper-V supports receive side scaling. For TCP & UDP, packets can
+ be distributed among available queues based on IP address and port
+ number.
+
+ For TCP & UDP, we can switch hash level between L3 and L4 by ethtool
+ command. TCP/UDP over IPv4 and v6 can be set differently. The default
+ hash level is L4. We currently only allow switching TX hash level
+ from within the guests.
+
+ On Azure, fragmented UDP packets have high loss rate with L4
+ hashing. Using L3 hashing is recommended in this case.
+
+ For example, for UDP over IPv4 on eth0:
+
+ To include UDP port numbers in hashing::
+
+ ethtool -N eth0 rx-flow-hash udp4 sdfn
+
+ To exclude UDP port numbers in hashing::
+
+ ethtool -N eth0 rx-flow-hash udp4 sd
+
+ To show UDP hash level::
+
+ ethtool -n eth0 rx-flow-hash udp4
+
+Generic Receive Offload, aka GRO
+--------------------------------
+ The driver supports GRO and it is enabled by default. GRO coalesces
+ like packets and significantly reduces CPU usage under heavy Rx
+ load.
+
+Large Receive Offload (LRO), or Receive Side Coalescing (RSC)
+-------------------------------------------------------------
+ The driver supports LRO/RSC in the vSwitch feature. It reduces the per packet
+ processing overhead by coalescing multiple TCP segments when possible. The
+ feature is enabled by default on VMs running on Windows Server 2019 and
+ later. It may be changed by ethtool command::
+
+ ethtool -K eth0 lro on
+ ethtool -K eth0 lro off
+
+SR-IOV support
+--------------
+ Hyper-V supports SR-IOV as a hardware acceleration option. If SR-IOV
+ is enabled in both the vSwitch and the guest configuration, then the
+ Virtual Function (VF) device is passed to the guest as a PCI
+ device. In this case, both a synthetic (netvsc) and VF device are
+ visible in the guest OS and both NIC's have the same MAC address.
+
+ The VF is enslaved by netvsc device. The netvsc driver will transparently
+ switch the data path to the VF when it is available and up.
+ Network state (addresses, firewall, etc) should be applied only to the
+ netvsc device; the slave device should not be accessed directly in
+ most cases. The exceptions are if some special queue discipline or
+ flow direction is desired, these should be applied directly to the
+ VF slave device.
+
+Receive Buffer
+--------------
+ Packets are received into a receive area which is created when device
+ is probed. The receive area is broken into MTU sized chunks and each may
+ contain one or more packets. The number of receive sections may be changed
+ via ethtool Rx ring parameters.
+
+ There is a similar send buffer which is used to aggregate packets for sending.
+ The send area is broken into chunks of 6144 bytes, each of section may
+ contain one or more packets. The send buffer is an optimization, the driver
+ will use slower method to handle very large packets or if the send buffer
+ area is exhausted.
+
+XDP support
+-----------
+ XDP (eXpress Data Path) is a feature that runs eBPF bytecode at the early
+ stage when packets arrive at a NIC card. The goal is to increase performance
+ for packet processing, reducing the overhead of SKB allocation and other
+ upper network layers.
+
+ hv_netvsc supports XDP in native mode, and transparently sets the XDP
+ program on the associated VF NIC as well.
+
+ Setting / unsetting XDP program on synthetic NIC (netvsc) propagates to
+ VF NIC automatically. Setting / unsetting XDP program on VF NIC directly
+ is not recommended, also not propagated to synthetic NIC, and may be
+ overwritten by setting of synthetic NIC.
+
+ XDP program cannot run with LRO (RSC) enabled, so you need to disable LRO
+ before running XDP::
+
+ ethtool -K eth0 lro off
+
+ XDP_REDIRECT action is not yet supported.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/neterion/s2io.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/neterion/s2io.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..c5673ec45
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/neterion/s2io.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,196 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=========================================================
+Neterion's (Formerly S2io) Xframe I/II PCI-X 10GbE driver
+=========================================================
+
+Release notes for Neterion's (Formerly S2io) Xframe I/II PCI-X 10GbE driver.
+
+.. Contents
+ - 1. Introduction
+ - 2. Identifying the adapter/interface
+ - 3. Features supported
+ - 4. Command line parameters
+ - 5. Performance suggestions
+ - 6. Available Downloads
+
+
+1. Introduction
+===============
+This Linux driver supports Neterion's Xframe I PCI-X 1.0 and
+Xframe II PCI-X 2.0 adapters. It supports several features
+such as jumbo frames, MSI/MSI-X, checksum offloads, TSO, UFO and so on.
+See below for complete list of features.
+
+All features are supported for both IPv4 and IPv6.
+
+2. Identifying the adapter/interface
+====================================
+
+a. Insert the adapter(s) in your system.
+b. Build and load driver::
+
+ # insmod s2io.ko
+
+c. View log messages::
+
+ # dmesg | tail -40
+
+You will see messages similar to::
+
+ eth3: Neterion Xframe I 10GbE adapter (rev 3), Version 2.0.9.1, Intr type INTA
+ eth4: Neterion Xframe II 10GbE adapter (rev 2), Version 2.0.9.1, Intr type INTA
+ eth4: Device is on 64 bit 133MHz PCIX(M1) bus
+
+The above messages identify the adapter type(Xframe I/II), adapter revision,
+driver version, interface name(eth3, eth4), Interrupt type(INTA, MSI, MSI-X).
+In case of Xframe II, the PCI/PCI-X bus width and frequency are displayed
+as well.
+
+To associate an interface with a physical adapter use "ethtool -p <ethX>".
+The corresponding adapter's LED will blink multiple times.
+
+3. Features supported
+=====================
+a. Jumbo frames. Xframe I/II supports MTU up to 9600 bytes,
+ modifiable using ip command.
+
+b. Offloads. Supports checksum offload(TCP/UDP/IP) on transmit
+ and receive, TSO.
+
+c. Multi-buffer receive mode. Scattering of packet across multiple
+ buffers. Currently driver supports 2-buffer mode which yields
+ significant performance improvement on certain platforms(SGI Altix,
+ IBM xSeries).
+
+d. MSI/MSI-X. Can be enabled on platforms which support this feature
+ (IA64, Xeon) resulting in noticeable performance improvement(up to 7%
+ on certain platforms).
+
+e. Statistics. Comprehensive MAC-level and software statistics displayed
+ using "ethtool -S" option.
+
+f. Multi-FIFO/Ring. Supports up to 8 transmit queues and receive rings,
+ with multiple steering options.
+
+4. Command line parameters
+==========================
+
+a. tx_fifo_num
+ Number of transmit queues
+
+Valid range: 1-8
+
+Default: 1
+
+b. rx_ring_num
+ Number of receive rings
+
+Valid range: 1-8
+
+Default: 1
+
+c. tx_fifo_len
+ Size of each transmit queue
+
+Valid range: Total length of all queues should not exceed 8192
+
+Default: 4096
+
+d. rx_ring_sz
+ Size of each receive ring(in 4K blocks)
+
+Valid range: Limited by memory on system
+
+Default: 30
+
+e. intr_type
+ Specifies interrupt type. Possible values 0(INTA), 2(MSI-X)
+
+Valid values: 0, 2
+
+Default: 2
+
+5. Performance suggestions
+==========================
+
+General:
+
+a. Set MTU to maximum(9000 for switch setup, 9600 in back-to-back configuration)
+b. Set TCP windows size to optimal value.
+
+For instance, for MTU=1500 a value of 210K has been observed to result in
+good performance::
+
+ # sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="210000 210000 210000"
+ # sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="210000 210000 210000"
+
+For MTU=9000, TCP window size of 10 MB is recommended::
+
+ # sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_rmem="10000000 10000000 10000000"
+ # sysctl -w net.ipv4.tcp_wmem="10000000 10000000 10000000"
+
+Transmit performance:
+
+a. By default, the driver respects BIOS settings for PCI bus parameters.
+ However, you may want to experiment with PCI bus parameters
+ max-split-transactions(MOST) and MMRBC (use setpci command).
+
+ A MOST value of 2 has been found optimal for Opterons and 3 for Itanium.
+
+ It could be different for your hardware.
+
+ Set MMRBC to 4K**.
+
+ For example you can set
+
+ For opteron::
+
+ #setpci -d 17d5:* 62=1d
+
+ For Itanium::
+
+ #setpci -d 17d5:* 62=3d
+
+ For detailed description of the PCI registers, please see Xframe User Guide.
+
+b. Ensure Transmit Checksum offload is enabled. Use ethtool to set/verify this
+ parameter.
+
+c. Turn on TSO(using "ethtool -K")::
+
+ # ethtool -K <ethX> tso on
+
+Receive performance:
+
+a. By default, the driver respects BIOS settings for PCI bus parameters.
+ However, you may want to set PCI latency timer to 248::
+
+ #setpci -d 17d5:* LATENCY_TIMER=f8
+
+ For detailed description of the PCI registers, please see Xframe User Guide.
+
+b. Use 2-buffer mode. This results in large performance boost on
+ certain platforms(eg. SGI Altix, IBM xSeries).
+
+c. Ensure Receive Checksum offload is enabled. Use "ethtool -K ethX" command to
+ set/verify this option.
+
+d. Enable NAPI feature(in kernel configuration Device Drivers ---> Network
+ device support ---> Ethernet (10000 Mbit) ---> S2IO 10Gbe Xframe NIC) to
+ bring down CPU utilization.
+
+.. note::
+
+ For AMD opteron platforms with 8131 chipset, MMRBC=1 and MOST=1 are
+ recommended as safe parameters.
+
+For more information, please review the AMD8131 errata at
+http://vip.amd.com/us-en/assets/content_type/white_papers_and_tech_docs/
+26310_AMD-8131_HyperTransport_PCI-X_Tunnel_Revision_Guide_rev_3_18.pdf
+
+6. Support
+==========
+
+For further support please contact either your 10GbE Xframe NIC vendor (IBM,
+HP, SGI etc.)
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/neterion/vxge.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/neterion/vxge.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..589c6b15c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/neterion/vxge.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,115 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+==============================================================================
+Neterion's (Formerly S2io) X3100 Series 10GbE PCIe Server Adapter Linux driver
+==============================================================================
+
+.. Contents
+
+ 1) Introduction
+ 2) Features supported
+ 3) Configurable driver parameters
+ 4) Troubleshooting
+
+1. Introduction
+===============
+
+This Linux driver supports all Neterion's X3100 series 10 GbE PCIe I/O
+Virtualized Server adapters.
+
+The X3100 series supports four modes of operation, configurable via
+firmware:
+
+ - Single function mode
+ - Multi function mode
+ - SRIOV mode
+ - MRIOV mode
+
+The functions share a 10GbE link and the pci-e bus, but hardly anything else
+inside the ASIC. Features like independent hw reset, statistics, bandwidth/
+priority allocation and guarantees, GRO, TSO, interrupt moderation etc are
+supported independently on each function.
+
+(See below for a complete list of features supported for both IPv4 and IPv6)
+
+2. Features supported
+=====================
+
+i) Single function mode (up to 17 queues)
+
+ii) Multi function mode (up to 17 functions)
+
+iii) PCI-SIG's I/O Virtualization
+
+ - Single Root mode: v1.0 (up to 17 functions)
+ - Multi-Root mode: v1.0 (up to 17 functions)
+
+iv) Jumbo frames
+
+ X3100 Series supports MTU up to 9600 bytes, modifiable using
+ ip command.
+
+v) Offloads supported: (Enabled by default)
+
+ - Checksum offload (TCP/UDP/IP) on transmit and receive paths
+ - TCP Segmentation Offload (TSO) on transmit path
+ - Generic Receive Offload (GRO) on receive path
+
+vi) MSI-X: (Enabled by default)
+
+ Resulting in noticeable performance improvement (up to 7% on certain
+ platforms).
+
+vii) NAPI: (Enabled by default)
+
+ For better Rx interrupt moderation.
+
+viii)RTH (Receive Traffic Hash): (Enabled by default)
+
+ Receive side steering for better scaling.
+
+ix) Statistics
+
+ Comprehensive MAC-level and software statistics displayed using
+ "ethtool -S" option.
+
+x) Multiple hardware queues: (Enabled by default)
+
+ Up to 17 hardware based transmit and receive data channels, with
+ multiple steering options (transmit multiqueue enabled by default).
+
+3) Configurable driver parameters:
+----------------------------------
+
+i) max_config_dev
+ Specifies maximum device functions to be enabled.
+
+ Valid range: 1-8
+
+ii) max_config_port
+ Specifies number of ports to be enabled.
+
+ Valid range: 1,2
+
+ Default: 1
+
+iii) max_config_vpath
+ Specifies maximum VPATH(s) configured for each device function.
+
+ Valid range: 1-17
+
+iv) vlan_tag_strip
+ Enables/disables vlan tag stripping from all received tagged frames that
+ are not replicated at the internal L2 switch.
+
+ Valid range: 0,1 (disabled, enabled respectively)
+
+ Default: 1
+
+v) addr_learn_en
+ Enable learning the mac address of the guest OS interface in
+ virtualization environment.
+
+ Valid range: 0,1 (disabled, enabled respectively)
+
+ Default: 0
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/netronome/nfp.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/netronome/nfp.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..ada611fb4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/netronome/nfp.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,249 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+=============================================
+Netronome Flow Processor (NFP) Kernel Drivers
+=============================================
+
+Copyright (c) 2019, Netronome Systems, Inc.
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- `Overview`_
+- `Acquiring Firmware`_
+
+Overview
+========
+
+This driver supports Netronome's line of Flow Processor devices,
+including the NFP4000, NFP5000, and NFP6000 models, which are also
+incorporated in the company's family of Agilio SmartNICs. The SR-IOV
+physical and virtual functions for these devices are supported by
+the driver.
+
+Acquiring Firmware
+==================
+
+The NFP4000 and NFP6000 devices require application specific firmware
+to function. Application firmware can be located either on the host file system
+or in the device flash (if supported by management firmware).
+
+Firmware files on the host filesystem contain card type (`AMDA-*` string), media
+config etc. They should be placed in `/lib/firmware/netronome` directory to
+load firmware from the host file system.
+
+Firmware for basic NIC operation is available in the upstream
+`linux-firmware.git` repository.
+
+Firmware in NVRAM
+-----------------
+
+Recent versions of management firmware supports loading application
+firmware from flash when the host driver gets probed. The firmware loading
+policy configuration may be used to configure this feature appropriately.
+
+Devlink or ethtool can be used to update the application firmware on the device
+flash by providing the appropriate `nic_AMDA*.nffw` file to the respective
+command. Users need to take care to write the correct firmware image for the
+card and media configuration to flash.
+
+Available storage space in flash depends on the card being used.
+
+Dealing with multiple projects
+------------------------------
+
+NFP hardware is fully programmable therefore there can be different
+firmware images targeting different applications.
+
+When using application firmware from host, we recommend placing
+actual firmware files in application-named subdirectories in
+`/lib/firmware/netronome` and linking the desired files, e.g.::
+
+ $ tree /lib/firmware/netronome/
+ /lib/firmware/netronome/
+ ├── bpf
+ │   ├── nic_AMDA0081-0001_1x40.nffw
+ │   └── nic_AMDA0081-0001_4x10.nffw
+ ├── flower
+ │   ├── nic_AMDA0081-0001_1x40.nffw
+ │   └── nic_AMDA0081-0001_4x10.nffw
+ ├── nic
+ │   ├── nic_AMDA0081-0001_1x40.nffw
+ │   └── nic_AMDA0081-0001_4x10.nffw
+ ├── nic_AMDA0081-0001_1x40.nffw -> bpf/nic_AMDA0081-0001_1x40.nffw
+ └── nic_AMDA0081-0001_4x10.nffw -> bpf/nic_AMDA0081-0001_4x10.nffw
+
+ 3 directories, 8 files
+
+You may need to use hard instead of symbolic links on distributions
+which use old `mkinitrd` command instead of `dracut` (e.g. Ubuntu).
+
+After changing firmware files you may need to regenerate the initramfs
+image. Initramfs contains drivers and firmware files your system may
+need to boot. Refer to the documentation of your distribution to find
+out how to update initramfs. Good indication of stale initramfs
+is system loading wrong driver or firmware on boot, but when driver is
+later reloaded manually everything works correctly.
+
+Selecting firmware per device
+-----------------------------
+
+Most commonly all cards on the system use the same type of firmware.
+If you want to load specific firmware image for a specific card, you
+can use either the PCI bus address or serial number. Driver will print
+which files it's looking for when it recognizes a NFP device::
+
+ nfp: Looking for firmware file in order of priority:
+ nfp: netronome/serial-00-12-34-aa-bb-cc-10-ff.nffw: not found
+ nfp: netronome/pci-0000:02:00.0.nffw: not found
+ nfp: netronome/nic_AMDA0081-0001_1x40.nffw: found, loading...
+
+In this case if file (or link) called *serial-00-12-34-aa-bb-5d-10-ff.nffw*
+or *pci-0000:02:00.0.nffw* is present in `/lib/firmware/netronome` this
+firmware file will take precedence over `nic_AMDA*` files.
+
+Note that `serial-*` and `pci-*` files are **not** automatically included
+in initramfs, you will have to refer to documentation of appropriate tools
+to find out how to include them.
+
+Firmware loading policy
+-----------------------
+
+Firmware loading policy is controlled via three HWinfo parameters
+stored as key value pairs in the device flash:
+
+app_fw_from_flash
+ Defines which firmware should take precedence, 'Disk' (0), 'Flash' (1) or
+ the 'Preferred' (2) firmware. When 'Preferred' is selected, the management
+ firmware makes the decision over which firmware will be loaded by comparing
+ versions of the flash firmware and the host supplied firmware.
+ This variable is configurable using the 'fw_load_policy'
+ devlink parameter.
+
+abi_drv_reset
+ Defines if the driver should reset the firmware when
+ the driver is probed, either 'Disk' (0) if firmware was found on disk,
+ 'Always' (1) reset or 'Never' (2) reset. Note that the device is always
+ reset on driver unload if firmware was loaded when the driver was probed.
+ This variable is configurable using the 'reset_dev_on_drv_probe'
+ devlink parameter.
+
+abi_drv_load_ifc
+ Defines a list of PF devices allowed to load FW on the device.
+ This variable is not currently user configurable.
+
+Statistics
+==========
+
+Following device statistics are available through the ``ethtool -S`` interface:
+
+.. flat-table:: NFP device statistics
+ :header-rows: 1
+ :widths: 3 1 11
+
+ * - Name
+ - ID
+ - Meaning
+
+ * - dev_rx_discards
+ - 1
+ - Packet can be discarded on the RX path for one of the following reasons:
+
+ * The NIC is not in promisc mode, and the destination MAC address
+ doesn't match the interfaces' MAC address.
+ * The received packet is larger than the max buffer size on the host.
+ I.e. it exceeds the Layer 3 MRU.
+ * There is no freelist descriptor available on the host for the packet.
+ It is likely that the NIC couldn't cache one in time.
+ * A BPF program discarded the packet.
+ * The datapath drop action was executed.
+ * The MAC discarded the packet due to lack of ingress buffer space
+ on the NIC.
+
+ * - dev_rx_errors
+ - 2
+ - A packet can be counted (and dropped) as RX error for the following
+ reasons:
+
+ * A problem with the VEB lookup (only when SR-IOV is used).
+ * A physical layer problem that causes Ethernet errors, like FCS or
+ alignment errors. The cause is usually faulty cables or SFPs.
+
+ * - dev_rx_bytes
+ - 3
+ - Total number of bytes received.
+
+ * - dev_rx_uc_bytes
+ - 4
+ - Unicast bytes received.
+
+ * - dev_rx_mc_bytes
+ - 5
+ - Multicast bytes received.
+
+ * - dev_rx_bc_bytes
+ - 6
+ - Broadcast bytes received.
+
+ * - dev_rx_pkts
+ - 7
+ - Total number of packets received.
+
+ * - dev_rx_mc_pkts
+ - 8
+ - Multicast packets received.
+
+ * - dev_rx_bc_pkts
+ - 9
+ - Broadcast packets received.
+
+ * - dev_tx_discards
+ - 10
+ - A packet can be discarded in the TX direction if the MAC is
+ being flow controlled and the NIC runs out of TX queue space.
+
+ * - dev_tx_errors
+ - 11
+ - A packet can be counted as TX error (and dropped) for one for the
+ following reasons:
+
+ * The packet is an LSO segment, but the Layer 3 or Layer 4 offset
+ could not be determined. Therefore LSO could not continue.
+ * An invalid packet descriptor was received over PCIe.
+ * The packet Layer 3 length exceeds the device MTU.
+ * An error on the MAC/physical layer. Usually due to faulty cables or
+ SFPs.
+ * A CTM buffer could not be allocated.
+ * The packet offset was incorrect and could not be fixed by the NIC.
+
+ * - dev_tx_bytes
+ - 12
+ - Total number of bytes transmitted.
+
+ * - dev_tx_uc_bytes
+ - 13
+ - Unicast bytes transmitted.
+
+ * - dev_tx_mc_bytes
+ - 14
+ - Multicast bytes transmitted.
+
+ * - dev_tx_bc_bytes
+ - 15
+ - Broadcast bytes transmitted.
+
+ * - dev_tx_pkts
+ - 16
+ - Total number of packets transmitted.
+
+ * - dev_tx_mc_pkts
+ - 17
+ - Multicast packets transmitted.
+
+ * - dev_tx_bc_pkts
+ - 18
+ - Broadcast packets transmitted.
+
+Note that statistics unknown to the driver will be displayed as
+``dev_unknown_stat$ID``, where ``$ID`` refers to the second column
+above.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/pensando/ionic.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/pensando/ionic.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0eabbc347
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/pensando/ionic.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,274 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+========================================================
+Linux Driver for the Pensando(R) Ethernet adapter family
+========================================================
+
+Pensando Linux Ethernet driver.
+Copyright(c) 2019 Pensando Systems, Inc
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- Identifying the Adapter
+- Enabling the driver
+- Configuring the driver
+- Statistics
+- Support
+
+Identifying the Adapter
+=======================
+
+To find if one or more Pensando PCI Ethernet devices are installed on the
+host, check for the PCI devices::
+
+ $ lspci -d 1dd8:
+ b5:00.0 Ethernet controller: Device 1dd8:1002
+ b6:00.0 Ethernet controller: Device 1dd8:1002
+
+If such devices are listed as above, then the ionic.ko driver should find
+and configure them for use. There should be log entries in the kernel
+messages such as these::
+
+ $ dmesg | grep ionic
+ ionic 0000:b5:00.0: 126.016 Gb/s available PCIe bandwidth (8.0 GT/s PCIe x16 link)
+ ionic 0000:b5:00.0 enp181s0: renamed from eth0
+ ionic 0000:b5:00.0 enp181s0: Link up - 100 Gbps
+ ionic 0000:b6:00.0: 126.016 Gb/s available PCIe bandwidth (8.0 GT/s PCIe x16 link)
+ ionic 0000:b6:00.0 enp182s0: renamed from eth0
+ ionic 0000:b6:00.0 enp182s0: Link up - 100 Gbps
+
+Driver and firmware version information can be gathered with either of
+ethtool or devlink tools::
+
+ $ ethtool -i enp181s0
+ driver: ionic
+ version: 5.7.0
+ firmware-version: 1.8.0-28
+ ...
+
+ $ devlink dev info pci/0000:b5:00.0
+ pci/0000:b5:00.0:
+ driver ionic
+ serial_number FLM18420073
+ versions:
+ fixed:
+ asic.id 0x0
+ asic.rev 0x0
+ running:
+ fw 1.8.0-28
+
+See Documentation/networking/devlink/ionic.rst for more information
+on the devlink dev info data.
+
+Enabling the driver
+===================
+
+The driver is enabled via the standard kernel configuration system,
+using the make command::
+
+ make oldconfig/menuconfig/etc.
+
+The driver is located in the menu structure at:
+
+ -> Device Drivers
+ -> Network device support (NETDEVICES [=y])
+ -> Ethernet driver support
+ -> Pensando devices
+ -> Pensando Ethernet IONIC Support
+
+Configuring the Driver
+======================
+
+MTU
+---
+
+Jumbo frame support is available with a maximim size of 9194 bytes.
+
+Interrupt coalescing
+--------------------
+
+Interrupt coalescing can be configured by changing the rx-usecs value with
+the "ethtool -C" command. The rx-usecs range is 0-190. The tx-usecs value
+reflects the rx-usecs value as they are tied together on the same interrupt.
+
+SR-IOV
+------
+
+Minimal SR-IOV support is currently offered and can be enabled by setting
+the sysfs 'sriov_numvfs' value, if supported by your particular firmware
+configuration.
+
+Statistics
+==========
+
+Basic hardware stats
+--------------------
+
+The commands ``netstat -i``, ``ip -s link show``, and ``ifconfig`` show
+a limited set of statistics taken directly from firmware. For example::
+
+ $ ip -s link show enp181s0
+ 7: enp181s0: <BROADCAST,MULTICAST,UP,LOWER_UP> mtu 1500 qdisc mq state UP mode DEFAULT group default qlen 1000
+ link/ether 00:ae:cd:00:07:68 brd ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff
+ RX: bytes packets errors dropped overrun mcast
+ 414 5 0 0 0 0
+ TX: bytes packets errors dropped carrier collsns
+ 1384 18 0 0 0 0
+
+ethtool -S
+----------
+
+The statistics shown from the ``ethtool -S`` command includes a combination of
+driver counters and firmware counters, including port and queue specific values.
+The driver values are counters computed by the driver, and the firmware values
+are gathered by the firmware from the port hardware and passed through the
+driver with no further interpretation.
+
+Driver port specific::
+
+ tx_packets: 12
+ tx_bytes: 964
+ rx_packets: 5
+ rx_bytes: 414
+ tx_tso: 0
+ tx_tso_bytes: 0
+ tx_csum_none: 12
+ tx_csum: 0
+ rx_csum_none: 0
+ rx_csum_complete: 3
+ rx_csum_error: 0
+
+Driver queue specific::
+
+ tx_0_pkts: 3
+ tx_0_bytes: 294
+ tx_0_clean: 3
+ tx_0_dma_map_err: 0
+ tx_0_linearize: 0
+ tx_0_frags: 0
+ tx_0_tso: 0
+ tx_0_tso_bytes: 0
+ tx_0_csum_none: 3
+ tx_0_csum: 0
+ tx_0_vlan_inserted: 0
+ rx_0_pkts: 2
+ rx_0_bytes: 120
+ rx_0_dma_map_err: 0
+ rx_0_alloc_err: 0
+ rx_0_csum_none: 0
+ rx_0_csum_complete: 0
+ rx_0_csum_error: 0
+ rx_0_dropped: 0
+ rx_0_vlan_stripped: 0
+
+Firmware port specific::
+
+ hw_tx_dropped: 0
+ hw_rx_dropped: 0
+ hw_rx_over_errors: 0
+ hw_rx_missed_errors: 0
+ hw_tx_aborted_errors: 0
+ frames_rx_ok: 15
+ frames_rx_all: 15
+ frames_rx_bad_fcs: 0
+ frames_rx_bad_all: 0
+ octets_rx_ok: 1290
+ octets_rx_all: 1290
+ frames_rx_unicast: 10
+ frames_rx_multicast: 5
+ frames_rx_broadcast: 0
+ frames_rx_pause: 0
+ frames_rx_bad_length: 0
+ frames_rx_undersized: 0
+ frames_rx_oversized: 0
+ frames_rx_fragments: 0
+ frames_rx_jabber: 0
+ frames_rx_pripause: 0
+ frames_rx_stomped_crc: 0
+ frames_rx_too_long: 0
+ frames_rx_vlan_good: 3
+ frames_rx_dropped: 0
+ frames_rx_less_than_64b: 0
+ frames_rx_64b: 4
+ frames_rx_65b_127b: 11
+ frames_rx_128b_255b: 0
+ frames_rx_256b_511b: 0
+ frames_rx_512b_1023b: 0
+ frames_rx_1024b_1518b: 0
+ frames_rx_1519b_2047b: 0
+ frames_rx_2048b_4095b: 0
+ frames_rx_4096b_8191b: 0
+ frames_rx_8192b_9215b: 0
+ frames_rx_other: 0
+ frames_tx_ok: 31
+ frames_tx_all: 31
+ frames_tx_bad: 0
+ octets_tx_ok: 2614
+ octets_tx_total: 2614
+ frames_tx_unicast: 8
+ frames_tx_multicast: 21
+ frames_tx_broadcast: 2
+ frames_tx_pause: 0
+ frames_tx_pripause: 0
+ frames_tx_vlan: 0
+ frames_tx_less_than_64b: 0
+ frames_tx_64b: 4
+ frames_tx_65b_127b: 27
+ frames_tx_128b_255b: 0
+ frames_tx_256b_511b: 0
+ frames_tx_512b_1023b: 0
+ frames_tx_1024b_1518b: 0
+ frames_tx_1519b_2047b: 0
+ frames_tx_2048b_4095b: 0
+ frames_tx_4096b_8191b: 0
+ frames_tx_8192b_9215b: 0
+ frames_tx_other: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_0: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_1: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_2: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_3: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_4: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_5: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_6: 0
+ frames_tx_pri_7: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_0: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_1: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_2: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_3: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_4: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_5: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_6: 0
+ frames_rx_pri_7: 0
+ tx_pripause_0_1us_count: 0
+ tx_pripause_1_1us_count: 0
+ tx_pripause_2_1us_count: 0
+ tx_pripause_3_1us_count: 0
+ tx_pripause_4_1us_count: 0
+ tx_pripause_5_1us_count: 0
+ tx_pripause_6_1us_count: 0
+ tx_pripause_7_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_0_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_1_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_2_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_3_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_4_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_5_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_6_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pripause_7_1us_count: 0
+ rx_pause_1us_count: 0
+ frames_tx_truncated: 0
+
+
+Support
+=======
+
+For general Linux networking support, please use the netdev mailing
+list, which is monitored by Pensando personnel::
+
+ netdev@vger.kernel.org
+
+For more specific support needs, please use the Pensando driver support
+email::
+
+ drivers@pensando.io
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/smsc/smc9.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/smsc/smc9.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..e5eac896a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/smsc/smc9.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,48 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+================
+SMC 9xxxx Driver
+================
+
+Revision 0.12
+
+3/5/96
+
+Copyright 1996 Erik Stahlman
+
+Released under terms of the GNU General Public License.
+
+This file contains the instructions and caveats for my SMC9xxx driver. You
+should not be using the driver without reading this file.
+
+Things to note about installation:
+
+ 1. The driver should work on all kernels from 1.2.13 until 1.3.71.
+ (A kernel patch is supplied for 1.3.71 )
+
+ 2. If you include this into the kernel, you might need to change some
+ options, such as for forcing IRQ.
+
+
+ 3. To compile as a module, run 'make'.
+ Make will give you the appropriate options for various kernel support.
+
+ 4. Loading the driver as a module::
+
+ use: insmod smc9194.o
+ optional parameters:
+ io=xxxx : your base address
+ irq=xx : your irq
+ ifport=x : 0 for whatever is default
+ 1 for twisted pair
+ 2 for AUI ( or BNC on some cards )
+
+How to obtain the latest version?
+
+FTP:
+ ftp://fenris.campus.vt.edu/smc9/smc9-12.tar.gz
+ ftp://sfbox.vt.edu/filebox/F/fenris/smc9/smc9-12.tar.gz
+
+
+Contacting me:
+ erik@mail.vt.edu
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/stmicro/stmmac.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/stmicro/stmmac.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..5d46e5036
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/stmicro/stmmac.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,700 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0+
+
+==============================================================
+Linux Driver for the Synopsys(R) Ethernet Controllers "stmmac"
+==============================================================
+
+Authors: Giuseppe Cavallaro <peppe.cavallaro@st.com>,
+Alexandre Torgue <alexandre.torgue@st.com>, Jose Abreu <joabreu@synopsys.com>
+
+Contents
+========
+
+- In This Release
+- Feature List
+- Kernel Configuration
+- Command Line Parameters
+- Driver Information and Notes
+- Debug Information
+- Support
+
+In This Release
+===============
+
+This file describes the stmmac Linux Driver for all the Synopsys(R) Ethernet
+Controllers.
+
+Currently, this network device driver is for all STi embedded MAC/GMAC
+(i.e. 7xxx/5xxx SoCs), SPEAr (arm), Loongson1B (mips) and XILINX XC2V3000
+FF1152AMT0221 D1215994A VIRTEX FPGA board. The Synopsys Ethernet QoS 5.0 IPK
+is also supported.
+
+DesignWare(R) Cores Ethernet MAC 10/100/1000 Universal version 3.70a
+(and older) and DesignWare(R) Cores Ethernet Quality-of-Service version 4.0
+(and upper) have been used for developing this driver as well as
+DesignWare(R) Cores XGMAC - 10G Ethernet MAC and DesignWare(R) Cores
+Enterprise MAC - 100G Ethernet MAC.
+
+This driver supports both the platform bus and PCI.
+
+This driver includes support for the following Synopsys(R) DesignWare(R)
+Cores Ethernet Controllers and corresponding minimum and maximum versions:
+
++-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+
+| Controller Name | Min. Version | Max. Version | Abbrev. Name |
++===============================+==============+==============+==============+
+| Ethernet MAC Universal | N/A | 3.73a | GMAC |
++-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+
+| Ethernet Quality-of-Service | 4.00a | N/A | GMAC4+ |
++-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+
+| XGMAC - 10G Ethernet MAC | 2.10a | N/A | XGMAC2+ |
++-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+
+| XLGMAC - 100G Ethernet MAC | 2.00a | N/A | XLGMAC2+ |
++-------------------------------+--------------+--------------+--------------+
+
+For questions related to hardware requirements, refer to the documentation
+supplied with your Ethernet adapter. All hardware requirements listed apply
+to use with Linux.
+
+Feature List
+============
+
+The following features are available in this driver:
+ - GMII/MII/RGMII/SGMII/RMII/XGMII/XLGMII Interface
+ - Half-Duplex / Full-Duplex Operation
+ - Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE)
+ - IEEE 802.3x PAUSE Packets (Flow Control)
+ - RMON/MIB Counters
+ - IEEE 1588 Timestamping (PTP)
+ - Pulse-Per-Second Output (PPS)
+ - MDIO Clause 22 / Clause 45 Interface
+ - MAC Loopback
+ - ARP Offloading
+ - Automatic CRC / PAD Insertion and Checking
+ - Checksum Offload for Received and Transmitted Packets
+ - Standard or Jumbo Ethernet Packets
+ - Source Address Insertion / Replacement
+ - VLAN TAG Insertion / Replacement / Deletion / Filtering (HASH and PERFECT)
+ - Programmable TX and RX Watchdog and Coalesce Settings
+ - Destination Address Filtering (PERFECT)
+ - HASH Filtering (Multicast)
+ - Layer 3 / Layer 4 Filtering
+ - Remote Wake-Up Detection
+ - Receive Side Scaling (RSS)
+ - Frame Preemption for TX and RX
+ - Programmable Burst Length, Threshold, Queue Size
+ - Multiple Queues (up to 8)
+ - Multiple Scheduling Algorithms (TX: WRR, DWRR, WFQ, SP, CBS, EST, TBS;
+ RX: WRR, SP)
+ - Flexible RX Parser
+ - TCP / UDP Segmentation Offload (TSO, USO)
+ - Split Header (SPH)
+ - Safety Features (ECC Protection, Data Parity Protection)
+ - Selftests using Ethtool
+
+Kernel Configuration
+====================
+
+The kernel configuration option is ``CONFIG_STMMAC_ETH``:
+ - ``CONFIG_STMMAC_PLATFORM``: is to enable the platform driver.
+ - ``CONFIG_STMMAC_PCI``: is to enable the pci driver.
+
+Command Line Parameters
+=======================
+
+If the driver is built as a module the following optional parameters are used
+by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using this
+syntax (e.g. for PCI module)::
+
+ modprobe stmmac_pci [<option>=<VAL1>,<VAL2>,...]
+
+Driver parameters can be also passed in command line by using::
+
+ stmmaceth=watchdog:100,chain_mode=1
+
+The default value for each parameter is generally the recommended setting,
+unless otherwise noted.
+
+watchdog
+--------
+:Valid Range: 5000-None
+:Default Value: 5000
+
+This parameter overrides the transmit timeout in milliseconds.
+
+debug
+-----
+:Valid Range: 0-16 (0=none,...,16=all)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This parameter adjusts the level of debug messages displayed in the system
+logs.
+
+phyaddr
+-------
+:Valid Range: 0-31
+:Default Value: -1
+
+This parameter overrides the physical address of the PHY device.
+
+flow_ctrl
+---------
+:Valid Range: 0-3 (0=off,1=rx,2=tx,3=rx/tx)
+:Default Value: 3
+
+This parameter changes the default Flow Control ability.
+
+pause
+-----
+:Valid Range: 0-65535
+:Default Value: 65535
+
+This parameter changes the default Flow Control Pause time.
+
+tc
+--
+:Valid Range: 64-256
+:Default Value: 64
+
+This parameter changes the default HW FIFO Threshold control value.
+
+buf_sz
+------
+:Valid Range: 1536-16384
+:Default Value: 1536
+
+This parameter changes the default RX DMA packet buffer size.
+
+eee_timer
+---------
+:Valid Range: 0-None
+:Default Value: 1000
+
+This parameter changes the default LPI TX Expiration time in milliseconds.
+
+chain_mode
+----------
+:Valid Range: 0-1 (0=off,1=on)
+:Default Value: 0
+
+This parameter changes the default mode of operation from Ring Mode to
+Chain Mode.
+
+Driver Information and Notes
+============================
+
+Transmit Process
+----------------
+
+The xmit method is invoked when the kernel needs to transmit a packet; it sets
+the descriptors in the ring and informs the DMA engine that there is a packet
+ready to be transmitted.
+
+By default, the driver sets the ``NETIF_F_SG`` bit in the features field of
+the ``net_device`` structure, enabling the scatter-gather feature. This is
+true on chips and configurations where the checksum can be done in hardware.
+
+Once the controller has finished transmitting the packet, timer will be
+scheduled to release the transmit resources.
+
+Receive Process
+---------------
+
+When one or more packets are received, an interrupt happens. The interrupts
+are not queued, so the driver has to scan all the descriptors in the ring
+during the receive process.
+
+This is based on NAPI, so the interrupt handler signals only if there is work
+to be done, and it exits. Then the poll method will be scheduled at some
+future point.
+
+The incoming packets are stored, by the DMA, in a list of pre-allocated socket
+buffers in order to avoid the memcpy (zero-copy).
+
+Interrupt Mitigation
+--------------------
+
+The driver is able to mitigate the number of its DMA interrupts using NAPI for
+the reception on chips older than the 3.50. New chips have an HW RX Watchdog
+used for this mitigation.
+
+Mitigation parameters can be tuned by ethtool.
+
+WoL
+---
+
+Wake up on Lan feature through Magic and Unicast frames are supported for the
+GMAC, GMAC4/5 and XGMAC core.
+
+DMA Descriptors
+---------------
+
+Driver handles both normal and alternate descriptors. The latter has been only
+tested on DesignWare(R) Cores Ethernet MAC Universal version 3.41a and later.
+
+stmmac supports DMA descriptor to operate both in dual buffer (RING) and
+linked-list(CHAINED) mode. In RING each descriptor points to two data buffer
+pointers whereas in CHAINED mode they point to only one data buffer pointer.
+RING mode is the default.
+
+In CHAINED mode each descriptor will have pointer to next descriptor in the
+list, hence creating the explicit chaining in the descriptor itself, whereas
+such explicit chaining is not possible in RING mode.
+
+Extended Descriptors
+--------------------
+
+The extended descriptors give us information about the Ethernet payload when
+it is carrying PTP packets or TCP/UDP/ICMP over IP. These are not available on
+GMAC Synopsys(R) chips older than the 3.50. At probe time the driver will
+decide if these can be actually used. This support also is mandatory for PTPv2
+because the extra descriptors are used for saving the hardware timestamps and
+Extended Status.
+
+Ethtool Support
+---------------
+
+Ethtool is supported. For example, driver statistics (including RMON),
+internal errors can be taken using::
+
+ ethtool -S ethX
+
+Ethtool selftests are also supported. This allows to do some early sanity
+checks to the HW using MAC and PHY loopback mechanisms::
+
+ ethtool -t ethX
+
+Jumbo and Segmentation Offloading
+---------------------------------
+
+Jumbo frames are supported and tested for the GMAC. The GSO has been also
+added but it's performed in software. LRO is not supported.
+
+TSO Support
+-----------
+
+TSO (TCP Segmentation Offload) feature is supported by GMAC > 4.x and XGMAC
+chip family. When a packet is sent through TCP protocol, the TCP stack ensures
+that the SKB provided to the low level driver (stmmac in our case) matches
+with the maximum frame len (IP header + TCP header + payload <= 1500 bytes
+(for MTU set to 1500)). It means that if an application using TCP want to send
+a packet which will have a length (after adding headers) > 1514 the packet
+will be split in several TCP packets: The data payload is split and headers
+(TCP/IP ..) are added. It is done by software.
+
+When TSO is enabled, the TCP stack doesn't care about the maximum frame length
+and provide SKB packet to stmmac as it is. The GMAC IP will have to perform
+the segmentation by it self to match with maximum frame length.
+
+This feature can be enabled in device tree through ``snps,tso`` entry.
+
+Energy Efficient Ethernet
+-------------------------
+
+Energy Efficient Ethernet (EEE) enables IEEE 802.3 MAC sublayer along with a
+family of Physical layer to operate in the Low Power Idle (LPI) mode. The EEE
+mode supports the IEEE 802.3 MAC operation at 100Mbps, 1000Mbps and 1Gbps.
+
+The LPI mode allows power saving by switching off parts of the communication
+device functionality when there is no data to be transmitted & received.
+The system on both the side of the link can disable some functionalities and
+save power during the period of low-link utilization. The MAC controls whether
+the system should enter or exit the LPI mode and communicate this to PHY.
+
+As soon as the interface is opened, the driver verifies if the EEE can be
+supported. This is done by looking at both the DMA HW capability register and
+the PHY devices MCD registers.
+
+To enter in TX LPI mode the driver needs to have a software timer that enable
+and disable the LPI mode when there is nothing to be transmitted.
+
+Precision Time Protocol (PTP)
+-----------------------------
+
+The driver supports the IEEE 1588-2002, Precision Time Protocol (PTP), which
+enables precise synchronization of clocks in measurement and control systems
+implemented with technologies such as network communication.
+
+In addition to the basic timestamp features mentioned in IEEE 1588-2002
+Timestamps, new GMAC cores support the advanced timestamp features.
+IEEE 1588-2008 can be enabled when configuring the Kernel.
+
+SGMII/RGMII Support
+-------------------
+
+New GMAC devices provide own way to manage RGMII/SGMII. This information is
+available at run-time by looking at the HW capability register. This means
+that the stmmac can manage auto-negotiation and link status w/o using the
+PHYLIB stuff. In fact, the HW provides a subset of extended registers to
+restart the ANE, verify Full/Half duplex mode and Speed. Thanks to these
+registers, it is possible to look at the Auto-negotiated Link Parter Ability.
+
+Physical
+--------
+
+The driver is compatible with Physical Abstraction Layer to be connected with
+PHY and GPHY devices.
+
+Platform Information
+--------------------
+
+Several information can be passed through the platform and device-tree.
+
+::
+
+ struct plat_stmmacenet_data {
+
+1) Bus identifier::
+
+ int bus_id;
+
+2) PHY Physical Address. If set to -1 the driver will pick the first PHY it
+finds::
+
+ int phy_addr;
+
+3) PHY Device Interface::
+
+ int interface;
+
+4) Specific platform fields for the MDIO bus::
+
+ struct stmmac_mdio_bus_data *mdio_bus_data;
+
+5) Internal DMA parameters::
+
+ struct stmmac_dma_cfg *dma_cfg;
+
+6) Fixed CSR Clock Range selection::
+
+ int clk_csr;
+
+7) HW uses the GMAC core::
+
+ int has_gmac;
+
+8) If set the MAC will use Enhanced Descriptors::
+
+ int enh_desc;
+
+9) Core is able to perform TX Checksum and/or RX Checksum in HW::
+
+ int tx_coe;
+ int rx_coe;
+
+11) Some HWs are not able to perform the csum in HW for over-sized frames due
+to limited buffer sizes. Setting this flag the csum will be done in SW on
+JUMBO frames::
+
+ int bugged_jumbo;
+
+12) Core has the embedded power module::
+
+ int pmt;
+
+13) Force DMA to use the Store and Forward mode or Threshold mode::
+
+ int force_sf_dma_mode;
+ int force_thresh_dma_mode;
+
+15) Force to disable the RX Watchdog feature and switch to NAPI mode::
+
+ int riwt_off;
+
+16) Limit the maximum operating speed and MTU::
+
+ int max_speed;
+ int maxmtu;
+
+18) Number of Multicast/Unicast filters::
+
+ int multicast_filter_bins;
+ int unicast_filter_entries;
+
+20) Limit the maximum TX and RX FIFO size::
+
+ int tx_fifo_size;
+ int rx_fifo_size;
+
+21) Use the specified number of TX and RX Queues::
+
+ u32 rx_queues_to_use;
+ u32 tx_queues_to_use;
+
+22) Use the specified TX and RX scheduling algorithm::
+
+ u8 rx_sched_algorithm;
+ u8 tx_sched_algorithm;
+
+23) Internal TX and RX Queue parameters::
+
+ struct stmmac_rxq_cfg rx_queues_cfg[MTL_MAX_RX_QUEUES];
+ struct stmmac_txq_cfg tx_queues_cfg[MTL_MAX_TX_QUEUES];
+
+24) This callback is used for modifying some syscfg registers (on ST SoCs)
+according to the link speed negotiated by the physical layer::
+
+ void (*fix_mac_speed)(void *priv, unsigned int speed);
+
+25) Callbacks used for calling a custom initialization; This is sometimes
+necessary on some platforms (e.g. ST boxes) where the HW needs to have set
+some PIO lines or system cfg registers. init/exit callbacks should not use
+or modify platform data::
+
+ int (*init)(struct platform_device *pdev, void *priv);
+ void (*exit)(struct platform_device *pdev, void *priv);
+
+26) Perform HW setup of the bus. For example, on some ST platforms this field
+is used to configure the AMBA bridge to generate more efficient STBus traffic::
+
+ struct mac_device_info *(*setup)(void *priv);
+ void *bsp_priv;
+
+27) Internal clocks and rates::
+
+ struct clk *stmmac_clk;
+ struct clk *pclk;
+ struct clk *clk_ptp_ref;
+ unsigned int clk_ptp_rate;
+ unsigned int clk_ref_rate;
+ s32 ptp_max_adj;
+
+28) Main reset::
+
+ struct reset_control *stmmac_rst;
+
+29) AXI Internal Parameters::
+
+ struct stmmac_axi *axi;
+
+30) HW uses GMAC>4 cores::
+
+ int has_gmac4;
+
+31) HW is sun8i based::
+
+ bool has_sun8i;
+
+32) Enables TSO feature::
+
+ bool tso_en;
+
+33) Enables Receive Side Scaling (RSS) feature::
+
+ int rss_en;
+
+34) MAC Port selection::
+
+ int mac_port_sel_speed;
+
+35) Enables TX LPI Clock Gating::
+
+ bool en_tx_lpi_clockgating;
+
+36) HW uses XGMAC>2.10 cores::
+
+ int has_xgmac;
+
+::
+
+ }
+
+For MDIO bus data, we have:
+
+::
+
+ struct stmmac_mdio_bus_data {
+
+1) PHY mask passed when MDIO bus is registered::
+
+ unsigned int phy_mask;
+
+2) List of IRQs, one per PHY::
+
+ int *irqs;
+
+3) If IRQs is NULL, use this for probed PHY::
+
+ int probed_phy_irq;
+
+4) Set to true if PHY needs reset::
+
+ bool needs_reset;
+
+::
+
+ }
+
+For DMA engine configuration, we have:
+
+::
+
+ struct stmmac_dma_cfg {
+
+1) Programmable Burst Length (TX and RX)::
+
+ int pbl;
+
+2) If set, DMA TX / RX will use this value rather than pbl::
+
+ int txpbl;
+ int rxpbl;
+
+3) Enable 8xPBL::
+
+ bool pblx8;
+
+4) Enable Fixed or Mixed burst::
+
+ int fixed_burst;
+ int mixed_burst;
+
+5) Enable Address Aligned Beats::
+
+ bool aal;
+
+6) Enable Enhanced Addressing (> 32 bits)::
+
+ bool eame;
+
+::
+
+ }
+
+For DMA AXI parameters, we have:
+
+::
+
+ struct stmmac_axi {
+
+1) Enable AXI LPI::
+
+ bool axi_lpi_en;
+ bool axi_xit_frm;
+
+2) Set AXI Write / Read maximum outstanding requests::
+
+ u32 axi_wr_osr_lmt;
+ u32 axi_rd_osr_lmt;
+
+3) Set AXI 4KB bursts::
+
+ bool axi_kbbe;
+
+4) Set AXI maximum burst length map::
+
+ u32 axi_blen[AXI_BLEN];
+
+5) Set AXI Fixed burst / mixed burst::
+
+ bool axi_fb;
+ bool axi_mb;
+
+6) Set AXI rebuild incrx mode::
+
+ bool axi_rb;
+
+::
+
+ }
+
+For the RX Queues configuration, we have:
+
+::
+
+ struct stmmac_rxq_cfg {
+
+1) Mode to use (DCB or AVB)::
+
+ u8 mode_to_use;
+
+2) DMA channel to use::
+
+ u32 chan;
+
+3) Packet routing, if applicable::
+
+ u8 pkt_route;
+
+4) Use priority routing, and priority to route::
+
+ bool use_prio;
+ u32 prio;
+
+::
+
+ }
+
+For the TX Queues configuration, we have:
+
+::
+
+ struct stmmac_txq_cfg {
+
+1) Queue weight in scheduler::
+
+ u32 weight;
+
+2) Mode to use (DCB or AVB)::
+
+ u8 mode_to_use;
+
+3) Credit Base Shaper Parameters::
+
+ u32 send_slope;
+ u32 idle_slope;
+ u32 high_credit;
+ u32 low_credit;
+
+4) Use priority scheduling, and priority::
+
+ bool use_prio;
+ u32 prio;
+
+::
+
+ }
+
+Device Tree Information
+-----------------------
+
+Please refer to the following document:
+Documentation/devicetree/bindings/net/snps,dwmac.yaml
+
+HW Capabilities
+---------------
+
+Note that, starting from new chips, where it is available the HW capability
+register, many configurations are discovered at run-time for example to
+understand if EEE, HW csum, PTP, enhanced descriptor etc are actually
+available. As strategy adopted in this driver, the information from the HW
+capability register can replace what has been passed from the platform.
+
+Debug Information
+=================
+
+The driver exports many information i.e. internal statistics, debug
+information, MAC and DMA registers etc.
+
+These can be read in several ways depending on the type of the information
+actually needed.
+
+For example a user can be use the ethtool support to get statistics: e.g.
+using: ``ethtool -S ethX`` (that shows the Management counters (MMC) if
+supported) or sees the MAC/DMA registers: e.g. using: ``ethtool -d ethX``
+
+Compiling the Kernel with ``CONFIG_DEBUG_FS`` the driver will export the
+following debugfs entries:
+
+ - ``descriptors_status``: To show the DMA TX/RX descriptor rings
+ - ``dma_cap``: To show the HW Capabilities
+
+Developer can also use the ``debug`` module parameter to get further debug
+information (please see: NETIF Msg Level).
+
+Support
+=======
+
+If an issue is identified with the released source code on a supported kernel
+with a supported adapter, email the specific information related to the
+issue to netdev@vger.kernel.org
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a88946bd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,587 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+======================================
+Texas Instruments CPSW ethernet driver
+======================================
+
+Multiqueue & CBS & MQPRIO
+=========================
+
+
+The cpsw has 3 CBS shapers for each external ports. This document
+describes MQPRIO and CBS Qdisc offload configuration for cpsw driver
+based on examples. It potentially can be used in audio video bridging
+(AVB) and time sensitive networking (TSN).
+
+The following examples were tested on AM572x EVM and BBB boards.
+
+Test setup
+==========
+
+Under consideration two examples with AM572x EVM running cpsw driver
+in dual_emac mode.
+
+Several prerequisites:
+
+- TX queues must be rated starting from txq0 that has highest priority
+- Traffic classes are used starting from 0, that has highest priority
+- CBS shapers should be used with rated queues
+- The bandwidth for CBS shapers has to be set a little bit more then
+ potential incoming rate, thus, rate of all incoming tx queues has
+ to be a little less
+- Real rates can differ, due to discreetness
+- Map skb-priority to txq is not enough, also skb-priority to l2 prio
+ map has to be created with ip or vconfig tool
+- Any l2/socket prio (0 - 7) for classes can be used, but for
+ simplicity default values are used: 3 and 2
+- only 2 classes tested: A and B, but checked and can work with more,
+ maximum allowed 4, but only for 3 rate can be set.
+
+Test setup for examples
+=======================
+
+::
+
+ +-------------------------------+
+ |--+ |
+ | | Workstation0 |
+ |E | MAC 18:03:73:66:87:42 |
+ +-----------------------------+ +--|t | |
+ | | 1 | E | | |h |./tsn_listener -d \ |
+ | Target board: | 0 | t |--+ |0 | 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0 \|
+ | AM572x EVM | 0 | h | | | -s 1500 |
+ | | 0 | 0 | |--+ |
+ | Only 2 classes: |Mb +---| +-------------------------------+
+ | class A, class B | |
+ | | +---| +-------------------------------+
+ | | 1 | E | |--+ |
+ | | 0 | t | | | Workstation1 |
+ | | 0 | h |--+ |E | MAC 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd |
+ | |Mb | 1 | +--|t | |
+ +-----------------------------+ |h |./tsn_listener -d \ |
+ |0 | 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth0 \|
+ | | -s 1500 |
+ |--+ |
+ +-------------------------------+
+
+
+Example 1: One port tx AVB configuration scheme for target board
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+(prints and scheme for AM572x evm, applicable for single port boards)
+
+- tc - traffic class
+- txq - transmit queue
+- p - priority
+- f - fifo (cpsw fifo)
+- S - shaper configured
+
+::
+
+ +------------------------------------------------------------------+ u
+ | +---------------+ +---------------+ +------+ +------+ | s
+ | | | | | | | | | | e
+ | | App 1 | | App 2 | | Apps | | Apps | | r
+ | | Class A | | Class B | | Rest | | Rest | |
+ | | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | Eth1 | | s
+ | | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | | | | | | | p
+ | | 40 Mb/s | | 20 Mb/s | | | | | | | | a
+ | | SO_PRIORITY=3 | | SO_PRIORITY=2 | | | | | | | | c
+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | e
+ | +---|-----------+ +---|-----------+ +---|--+ +---|--+ |
+ +-----|------------------|------------------|--------|-------------+
+ +-+ +------------+ | |
+ | | +-----------------+ +--+
+ | | | |
+ +---|-------|-------------|-----------------------|----------------+
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ |
+ | | p3 | | p2 | | p1 | | p0 | | p0 | | k
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | e
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | r
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | n
+ | | | | | | e
+ | | | +-----+ | | l
+ | | | | | |
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | s
+ | |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | |tc0 | | p
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / | a
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / | c
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ | e
+ | | | +-----+ | |
+ | | | | | | |
+ | | | | | | |
+ | | | | | | |
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ |
+ | |txq0| |txq1| |txq2| |txq3| |txq4| |
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / |
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / |
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ |
+ | +-|------|------|------|--+ +--|--------------+ |
+ | | | | | | | Eth0.100 | | Eth1 | |
+ +---|------|------|------|------------------------|----------------+
+ | | | | |
+ p p p p |
+ 3 2 0-1, 4-7 <- L2 priority |
+ | | | | |
+ | | | | |
+ +---|------|------|------|------------------------|----------------+
+ | | | | | |----------+ |
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ |
+ | |dma7| |dma6| |dma5| |dma4| |dma3| |
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c
+ | \S / \S / \ / \ / \ / | p
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | s
+ | | | | +----- | | w
+ | | | | | | |
+ | | | | | | | d
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+p p+----+ | r
+ | | | | | | |o o| | | i
+ | | f3 | | f2 | | f0 |r r| f0 | | v
+ | |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 |t t|tc0 | | e
+ | \CBS / \CBS / \CBS /1 2\CBS / | r
+ | \S / \S / \ / \ / |
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ |
+ +------------------------------------------------------------------+
+
+
+1) ::
+
+
+ // Add 4 tx queues, for interface Eth0, and 1 tx queue for Eth1
+ $ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 5
+ rx unmodified, ignoring
+
+2) ::
+
+ // Check if num of queues is set correctly:
+ $ ethtool -l eth0
+ Channel parameters for eth0:
+ Pre-set maximums:
+ RX: 8
+ TX: 8
+ Other: 0
+ Combined: 0
+ Current hardware settings:
+ RX: 1
+ TX: 5
+ Other: 0
+ Combined: 0
+
+3) ::
+
+ // TX queues must be rated starting from 0, so set bws for tx0 and tx1
+ // Set rates 40 and 20 Mb/s appropriately.
+ // Pay attention, real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness.
+ // Leave last 2 tx queues not rated.
+ $ echo 40 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-0/tx_maxrate
+ $ echo 20 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-1/tx_maxrate
+
+4) ::
+
+ // Check maximum rate of tx (cpdma) queues:
+ $ cat /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-*/tx_maxrate
+ 40
+ 20
+ 0
+ 0
+ 0
+
+5) ::
+
+ // Map skb->priority to traffic class:
+ // 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2
+ // Map traffic class to transmit queue:
+ // tc0 -> txq0, tc1 -> txq1, tc2 -> (txq2, txq3)
+ $ tc qdisc replace dev eth0 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \
+ map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@0 1@1 2@2 hw 1
+
+5a) ::
+
+ // As two interface sharing same set of tx queues, assign all traffic
+ // coming to interface Eth1 to separate queue in order to not mix it
+ // with traffic from interface Eth0, so use separate txq to send
+ // packets to Eth1, so all prio -> tc0 and tc0 -> txq4
+ // Here hw 0, so here still default configuration for eth1 in hw
+ $ tc qdisc replace dev eth1 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 1 \
+ map 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 queues 1@4 hw 0
+
+6) ::
+
+ // Check classes settings
+ $ tc -g class show dev eth0
+ +---(100:ffe2) mqprio
+ | +---(100:3) mqprio
+ | +---(100:4) mqprio
+ |
+ +---(100:ffe1) mqprio
+ | +---(100:2) mqprio
+ |
+ +---(100:ffe0) mqprio
+ +---(100:1) mqprio
+
+ $ tc -g class show dev eth1
+ +---(100:ffe0) mqprio
+ +---(100:5) mqprio
+
+7) ::
+
+ // Set rate for class A - 41 Mbit (tc0, txq0) using CBS Qdisc
+ // Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!)
+ // here only idle slope is important, others arg are ignored
+ // Pay attention, real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:1 cbs locredit -1438 \
+ hicredit 62 sendslope -959000 idleslope 41000 offload 1
+ net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 50
+
+8) ::
+
+ // Set rate for class B - 21 Mbit (tc1, txq1) using CBS Qdisc:
+ // Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!)
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:2 cbs locredit -1468 \
+ hicredit 65 sendslope -979000 idleslope 21000 offload 1
+ net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 30
+
+9) ::
+
+ // Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos
+ $ ip link add link eth0 name eth0.100 type vlan id 100
+ 8021q: 802.1Q VLAN Support v1.8
+ 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device eth0
+ 8021q: adding VLAN 0 to HW filter on device eth1
+ net eth0: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter
+
+10) ::
+
+ // Map skb->priority to L2 prio, 1 to 1
+ $ ip link set eth0.100 type vlan \
+ egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7
+
+11) ::
+
+ // Check egress map for vlan 100
+ $ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth0.100
+ [...]
+ INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0
+ EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7
+
+12) ::
+
+ // Run your appropriate tools with socket option "SO_PRIORITY"
+ // to 3 for class A and/or to 2 for class B
+ // (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html)
+ ./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p3 -s 1500&
+ ./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p2 -s 1500&
+
+13) ::
+
+ // run your listener on workstation (should be in same vlan)
+ // (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html)
+ ./tsn_listener -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i enp5s0 -s 1500
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39000 kbps
+
+14) ::
+
+ // Restore default configuration if needed
+ $ ip link del eth0.100
+ $ tc qdisc del dev eth1 root
+ $ tc qdisc del dev eth0 root
+ net eth0: Prev FIFO2 is shaped
+ net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 0
+ net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 0
+ $ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 1
+
+Example 2: Two port tx AVB configuration scheme for target board
+----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+(prints and scheme for AM572x evm, for dual emac boards only)
+
+::
+
+ +------------------------------------------------------------------+ u
+ | +----------+ +----------+ +------+ +----------+ +----------+ | s
+ | | | | | | | | | | | | e
+ | | App 1 | | App 2 | | Apps | | App 3 | | App 4 | | r
+ | | Class A | | Class B | | Rest | | Class B | | Class A | |
+ | | Eth0 | | Eth0 | | | | | Eth1 | | Eth1 | | s
+ | | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | | | | VLAN100 | | VLAN100 | | p
+ | | 40 Mb/s | | 20 Mb/s | | | | | 10 Mb/s | | 30 Mb/s | | a
+ | | SO_PRI=3 | | SO_PRI=2 | | | | | SO_PRI=3 | | SO_PRI=2 | | c
+ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | e
+ | +---|------+ +---|------+ +---|--+ +---|------+ +---|------+ |
+ +-----|-------------|-------------|---------|-------------|--------+
+ +-+ +-------+ | +----------+ +----+
+ | | +-------+------+ | |
+ | | | | | |
+ +---|-------|-------------|--------------|-------------|-------|---+
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ |
+ | | p3 | | p2 | | p1 | | p0 | | p0 | | p1 | | p2 | | p3 | | k
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | e
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | r
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | n
+ | | | | | | | | e
+ | | | +----+ +----+ | | | l
+ | | | | | | | |
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ | s
+ | |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | |tc2 | |tc1 | |tc0 | | p
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | a
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | e
+ | | | +-----+ +-----+ | | |
+ | | | | | | | | | |
+ | | | | | | | | | |
+ | | | | | E E | | | | |
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ t t +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ |
+ | |txq0| |txq1| |txq4| |txq5| h h |txq6| |txq7| |txq3| |txq2| |
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / 0 1 \ / \ / \ / \ / |
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / . . \ / \ / \ / \ / |
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ 1 1 \/ \/ \/ \/ |
+ | +-|------|------|------|--+ 0 0 +-|------|------|------|--+ |
+ | | | | | | | 0 0 | | | | | | |
+ +---|------|------|------|---------------|------|------|------|----+
+ | | | | | | | |
+ p p p p p p p p
+ 3 2 0-1, 4-7 <-L2 pri-> 0-1, 4-7 2 3
+ | | | | | | | |
+ | | | | | | | |
+ +---|------|------|------|---------------|------|------|------|----+
+ | | | | | | | | | |
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ +----+ |
+ | |dma7| |dma6| |dma3| |dma2| |dma1| |dma0| |dma4| |dma5| |
+ | \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / \ / | c
+ | \S / \S / \ / \ / \ / \ / \S / \S / | p
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ | s
+ | | | | +----- | | | | | w
+ | | | | | +----+ | | | |
+ | | | | | | | | | | d
+ | +----+ +----+ +----+p p+----+ +----+ +----+ | r
+ | | | | | | |o o| | | | | | | i
+ | | f3 | | f2 | | f0 |r CPSW r| f3 | | f2 | | f0 | | v
+ | |tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 |t t|tc0 | |tc1 | |tc2 | | e
+ | \CBS / \CBS / \CBS /1 2\CBS / \CBS / \CBS / | r
+ | \S / \S / \ / \S / \S / \ / |
+ | \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ \/ |
+ +------------------------------------------------------------------+
+ ========================================Eth==========================>
+
+1) ::
+
+ // Add 8 tx queues, for interface Eth0, but they are common, so are accessed
+ // by two interfaces Eth0 and Eth1.
+ $ ethtool -L eth1 rx 1 tx 8
+ rx unmodified, ignoring
+
+2) ::
+
+ // Check if num of queues is set correctly:
+ $ ethtool -l eth0
+ Channel parameters for eth0:
+ Pre-set maximums:
+ RX: 8
+ TX: 8
+ Other: 0
+ Combined: 0
+ Current hardware settings:
+ RX: 1
+ TX: 8
+ Other: 0
+ Combined: 0
+
+3) ::
+
+ // TX queues must be rated starting from 0, so set bws for tx0 and tx1 for Eth0
+ // and for tx2 and tx3 for Eth1. That is, rates 40 and 20 Mb/s appropriately
+ // for Eth0 and 30 and 10 Mb/s for Eth1.
+ // Real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness
+ // Leave last 4 tx queues as not rated
+ $ echo 40 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-0/tx_maxrate
+ $ echo 20 > /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-1/tx_maxrate
+ $ echo 30 > /sys/class/net/eth1/queues/tx-2/tx_maxrate
+ $ echo 10 > /sys/class/net/eth1/queues/tx-3/tx_maxrate
+
+4) ::
+
+ // Check maximum rate of tx (cpdma) queues:
+ $ cat /sys/class/net/eth0/queues/tx-*/tx_maxrate
+ 40
+ 20
+ 30
+ 10
+ 0
+ 0
+ 0
+ 0
+
+5) ::
+
+ // Map skb->priority to traffic class for Eth0:
+ // 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2
+ // Map traffic class to transmit queue:
+ // tc0 -> txq0, tc1 -> txq1, tc2 -> (txq4, txq5)
+ $ tc qdisc replace dev eth0 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \
+ map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@0 1@1 2@4 hw 1
+
+6) ::
+
+ // Check classes settings
+ $ tc -g class show dev eth0
+ +---(100:ffe2) mqprio
+ | +---(100:5) mqprio
+ | +---(100:6) mqprio
+ |
+ +---(100:ffe1) mqprio
+ | +---(100:2) mqprio
+ |
+ +---(100:ffe0) mqprio
+ +---(100:1) mqprio
+
+7) ::
+
+ // Set rate for class A - 41 Mbit (tc0, txq0) using CBS Qdisc for Eth0
+ // here only idle slope is important, others ignored
+ // Real speed can differ a bit due to discreetness
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:1 cbs locredit -1470 \
+ hicredit 62 sendslope -959000 idleslope 41000 offload 1
+ net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 50
+
+8) ::
+
+ // Set rate for class B - 21 Mbit (tc1, txq1) using CBS Qdisc for Eth0
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth0 parent 100:2 cbs locredit -1470 \
+ hicredit 65 sendslope -979000 idleslope 21000 offload 1
+ net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 30
+
+9) ::
+
+ // Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos for Eth0
+ $ ip link add link eth0 name eth0.100 type vlan id 100
+ net eth0: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter
+
+10) ::
+
+ // Map skb->priority to L2 prio for Eth0.100, one to one
+ $ ip link set eth0.100 type vlan \
+ egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7
+
+11) ::
+
+ // Check egress map for vlan 100
+ $ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth0.100
+ [...]
+ INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0
+ EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7
+
+12) ::
+
+ // Map skb->priority to traffic class for Eth1:
+ // 3pri -> tc0, 2pri -> tc1, (0,1,4-7)pri -> tc2
+ // Map traffic class to transmit queue:
+ // tc0 -> txq2, tc1 -> txq3, tc2 -> (txq6, txq7)
+ $ tc qdisc replace dev eth1 handle 100: parent root mqprio num_tc 3 \
+ map 2 2 1 0 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 queues 1@2 1@3 2@6 hw 1
+
+13) ::
+
+ // Check classes settings
+ $ tc -g class show dev eth1
+ +---(100:ffe2) mqprio
+ | +---(100:7) mqprio
+ | +---(100:8) mqprio
+ |
+ +---(100:ffe1) mqprio
+ | +---(100:4) mqprio
+ |
+ +---(100:ffe0) mqprio
+ +---(100:3) mqprio
+
+14) ::
+
+ // Set rate for class A - 31 Mbit (tc0, txq2) using CBS Qdisc for Eth1
+ // here only idle slope is important, others ignored, but calculated
+ // for interface speed - 100Mb for eth1 port.
+ // Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!)
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth1 parent 100:3 cbs locredit -1035 \
+ hicredit 465 sendslope -69000 idleslope 31000 offload 1
+ net eth1: set FIFO3 bw = 31
+
+15) ::
+
+ // Set rate for class B - 11 Mbit (tc1, txq3) using CBS Qdisc for Eth1
+ // Set it +1 Mb for reserve (important!)
+ $ tc qdisc add dev eth1 parent 100:4 cbs locredit -1335 \
+ hicredit 405 sendslope -89000 idleslope 11000 offload 1
+ net eth1: set FIFO2 bw = 11
+
+16) ::
+
+ // Create vlan 100 to map sk->priority to vlan qos for Eth1
+ $ ip link add link eth1 name eth1.100 type vlan id 100
+ net eth1: Adding vlanid 100 to vlan filter
+
+17) ::
+
+ // Map skb->priority to L2 prio for Eth1.100, one to one
+ $ ip link set eth1.100 type vlan \
+ egress 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7
+
+18) ::
+
+ // Check egress map for vlan 100
+ $ cat /proc/net/vlan/eth1.100
+ [...]
+ INGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:0 2:0 3:0 4:0 5:0 6:0 7:0
+ EGRESS priority mappings: 0:0 1:1 2:2 3:3 4:4 5:5 6:6 7:7
+
+19) ::
+
+ // Run appropriate tools with socket option "SO_PRIORITY" to 3
+ // for class A and to 2 for class B. For both interfaces
+ ./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p2 -s 1500&
+ ./tsn_talker -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i eth0.100 -p3 -s 1500&
+ ./tsn_talker -d 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth1.100 -p2 -s 1500&
+ ./tsn_talker -d 20:cf:30:85:7d:fd -i eth1.100 -p3 -s 1500&
+
+20) ::
+
+ // run your listener on workstation (should be in same vlan)
+ // (I took at https://www.spinics.net/lists/netdev/msg460869.html)
+ ./tsn_listener -d 18:03:73:66:87:42 -i enp5s0 -s 1500
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39012 kbps
+ Receiving data rate: 39000 kbps
+
+21) ::
+
+ // Restore default configuration if needed
+ $ ip link del eth1.100
+ $ ip link del eth0.100
+ $ tc qdisc del dev eth1 root
+ net eth1: Prev FIFO2 is shaped
+ net eth1: set FIFO3 bw = 0
+ net eth1: set FIFO2 bw = 0
+ $ tc qdisc del dev eth0 root
+ net eth0: Prev FIFO2 is shaped
+ net eth0: set FIFO3 bw = 0
+ net eth0: set FIFO2 bw = 0
+ $ ethtool -L eth0 rx 1 tx 1
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw_switchdev.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw_switchdev.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..1241ecac7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/cpsw_switchdev.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,242 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+======================================================
+Texas Instruments CPSW switchdev based ethernet driver
+======================================================
+
+:Version: 2.0
+
+Port renaming
+=============
+
+On older udev versions renaming of ethX to swXpY will not be automatically
+supported
+
+In order to rename via udev::
+
+ ip -d link show dev sw0p1 | grep switchid
+
+ SUBSYSTEM=="net", ACTION=="add", ATTR{phys_switch_id}==<switchid>, \
+ ATTR{phys_port_name}!="", NAME="sw0$attr{phys_port_name}"
+
+
+Dual mac mode
+=============
+
+- The new (cpsw_new.c) driver is operating in dual-emac mode by default, thus
+ working as 2 individual network interfaces. Main differences from legacy CPSW
+ driver are:
+
+ - optimized promiscuous mode: The P0_UNI_FLOOD (both ports) is enabled in
+ addition to ALLMULTI (current port) instead of ALE_BYPASS.
+ So, Ports in promiscuous mode will keep possibility of mcast and vlan
+ filtering, which is provides significant benefits when ports are joined
+ to the same bridge, but without enabling "switch" mode, or to different
+ bridges.
+ - learning disabled on ports as it make not too much sense for
+ segregated ports - no forwarding in HW.
+ - enabled basic support for devlink.
+
+ ::
+
+ devlink dev show
+ platform/48484000.switch
+
+ devlink dev param show
+ platform/48484000.switch:
+ name switch_mode type driver-specific
+ values:
+ cmode runtime value false
+ name ale_bypass type driver-specific
+ values:
+ cmode runtime value false
+
+Devlink configuration parameters
+================================
+
+See Documentation/networking/devlink/ti-cpsw-switch.rst
+
+Bridging in dual mac mode
+=========================
+
+The dual_mac mode requires two vids to be reserved for internal purposes,
+which, by default, equal CPSW Port numbers. As result, bridge has to be
+configured in vlan unaware mode or default_pvid has to be adjusted::
+
+ ip link add name br0 type bridge
+ ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 0
+ echo 0 > /sys/class/net/br0/bridge/default_pvid
+ ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0
+ ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0
+
+or::
+
+ ip link add name br0 type bridge
+ ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 0
+ echo 100 > /sys/class/net/br0/bridge/default_pvid
+ ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 1
+ ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0
+ ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0
+
+Enabling "switch"
+=================
+
+The Switch mode can be enabled by configuring devlink driver parameter
+"switch_mode" to 1/true::
+
+ devlink dev param set platform/48484000.switch \
+ name switch_mode value 1 cmode runtime
+
+This can be done regardless of the state of Port's netdev devices - UP/DOWN, but
+Port's netdev devices have to be in UP before joining to the bridge to avoid
+overwriting of bridge configuration as CPSW switch driver copletly reloads its
+configuration when first Port changes its state to UP.
+
+When the both interfaces joined the bridge - CPSW switch driver will enable
+marking packets with offload_fwd_mark flag unless "ale_bypass=0"
+
+All configuration is implemented via switchdev API.
+
+Bridge setup
+============
+
+::
+
+ devlink dev param set platform/48484000.switch \
+ name switch_mode value 1 cmode runtime
+
+ ip link add name br0 type bridge
+ ip link set dev br0 type bridge ageing_time 1000
+ ip link set dev sw0p1 up
+ ip link set dev sw0p2 up
+ ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0
+ ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0
+
+ [*] bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self
+
+ [*] if vlan_filtering=1. where default_pvid=1
+
+ Note. Steps [*] are mandatory.
+
+
+On/off STP
+==========
+
+::
+
+ ip link set dev BRDEV type bridge stp_state 1/0
+
+VLAN configuration
+==================
+
+::
+
+ bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self <---- add cpu port to VLAN 1
+
+Note. This step is mandatory for bridge/default_pvid.
+
+Add extra VLANs
+===============
+
+ 1. untagged::
+
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 pvid untagged master
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 pvid untagged master
+ bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 pvid untagged self <---- Add cpu port to VLAN100
+
+ 2. tagged::
+
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 master
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 master
+ bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 pvid tagged self <---- Add cpu port to VLAN100
+
+FDBs
+----
+
+FDBs are automatically added on the appropriate switch port upon detection
+
+Manually adding FDBs::
+
+ bridge fdb add aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:ff dev sw0p1 master vlan 100
+ bridge fdb add aa:bb:cc:dd:ee:fe dev sw0p2 master <---- Add on all VLANs
+
+MDBs
+----
+
+MDBs are automatically added on the appropriate switch port upon detection
+
+Manually adding MDBs::
+
+ bridge mdb add dev br0 port sw0p1 grp 239.1.1.1 permanent vid 100
+ bridge mdb add dev br0 port sw0p1 grp 239.1.1.1 permanent <---- Add on all VLANs
+
+Multicast flooding
+==================
+CPU port mcast_flooding is always on
+
+Turning flooding on/off on swithch ports:
+bridge link set dev sw0p1 mcast_flood on/off
+
+Access and Trunk port
+=====================
+
+::
+
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p1 vid 100 pvid untagged master
+ bridge vlan add dev sw0p2 vid 100 master
+
+
+ bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 100 self
+ ip link add link br0 name br0.100 type vlan id 100
+
+Note. Setting PVID on Bridge device itself working only for
+default VLAN (default_pvid).
+
+NFS
+===
+
+The only way for NFS to work is by chrooting to a minimal environment when
+switch configuration that will affect connectivity is needed.
+Assuming you are booting NFS with eth1 interface(the script is hacky and
+it's just there to prove NFS is doable).
+
+setup.sh::
+
+ #!/bin/sh
+ mkdir proc
+ mount -t proc none /proc
+ ifconfig br0 > /dev/null
+ if [ $? -ne 0 ]; then
+ echo "Setting up bridge"
+ ip link add name br0 type bridge
+ ip link set dev br0 type bridge ageing_time 1000
+ ip link set dev br0 type bridge vlan_filtering 1
+
+ ip link set eth1 down
+ ip link set eth1 name sw0p1
+ ip link set dev sw0p1 up
+ ip link set dev sw0p2 up
+ ip link set dev sw0p2 master br0
+ ip link set dev sw0p1 master br0
+ bridge vlan add dev br0 vid 1 pvid untagged self
+ ifconfig sw0p1 0.0.0.0
+ udhchc -i br0
+ fi
+ umount /proc
+
+run_nfs.sh:::
+
+ #!/bin/sh
+ mkdir /tmp/root/bin -p
+ mkdir /tmp/root/lib -p
+
+ cp -r /lib/ /tmp/root/
+ cp -r /bin/ /tmp/root/
+ cp /sbin/ip /tmp/root/bin
+ cp /sbin/bridge /tmp/root/bin
+ cp /sbin/ifconfig /tmp/root/bin
+ cp /sbin/udhcpc /tmp/root/bin
+ cp /path/to/setup.sh /tmp/root/bin
+ chroot /tmp/root/ busybox sh /bin/setup.sh
+
+ run ./run_nfs.sh
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/tlan.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/tlan.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..4fdc0907f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/ti/tlan.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,140 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====================
+TLAN driver for Linux
+=====================
+
+:Version: 1.14a
+
+(C) 1997-1998 Caldera, Inc.
+
+(C) 1998 James Banks
+
+(C) 1999-2001 Torben Mathiasen <tmm@image.dk, torben.mathiasen@compaq.com>
+
+For driver information/updates visit http://www.compaq.com
+
+
+
+
+
+I. Supported Devices
+====================
+
+ Only PCI devices will work with this driver.
+
+ Supported:
+
+ ========= ========= ===========================================
+ Vendor ID Device ID Name
+ ========= ========= ===========================================
+ 0e11 ae32 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX PCI UTP
+ 0e11 ae34 Compaq Netelligent 10 T PCI UTP
+ 0e11 ae35 Compaq Integrated NetFlex 3/P
+ 0e11 ae40 Compaq Netelligent Dual 10/100 TX PCI UTP
+ 0e11 ae43 Compaq Netelligent Integrated 10/100 TX UTP
+ 0e11 b011 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX Embedded UTP
+ 0e11 b012 Compaq Netelligent 10 T/2 PCI UTP/Coax
+ 0e11 b030 Compaq Netelligent 10/100 TX UTP
+ 0e11 f130 Compaq NetFlex 3/P
+ 0e11 f150 Compaq NetFlex 3/P
+ 108d 0012 Olicom OC-2325
+ 108d 0013 Olicom OC-2183
+ 108d 0014 Olicom OC-2326
+ ========= ========= ===========================================
+
+
+ Caveats:
+
+ I am not sure if 100BaseTX daughterboards (for those cards which
+ support such things) will work. I haven't had any solid evidence
+ either way.
+
+ However, if a card supports 100BaseTx without requiring an add
+ on daughterboard, it should work with 100BaseTx.
+
+ The "Netelligent 10 T/2 PCI UTP/Coax" (b012) device is untested,
+ but I do not expect any problems.
+
+
+II. Driver Options
+==================
+
+ 1. You can append debug=x to the end of the insmod line to get
+ debug messages, where x is a bit field where the bits mean
+ the following:
+
+ ==== =====================================
+ 0x01 Turn on general debugging messages.
+ 0x02 Turn on receive debugging messages.
+ 0x04 Turn on transmit debugging messages.
+ 0x08 Turn on list debugging messages.
+ ==== =====================================
+
+ 2. You can append aui=1 to the end of the insmod line to cause
+ the adapter to use the AUI interface instead of the 10 Base T
+ interface. This is also what to do if you want to use the BNC
+ connector on a TLAN based device. (Setting this option on a
+ device that does not have an AUI/BNC connector will probably
+ cause it to not function correctly.)
+
+ 3. You can set duplex=1 to force half duplex, and duplex=2 to
+ force full duplex.
+
+ 4. You can set speed=10 to force 10Mbs operation, and speed=100
+ to force 100Mbs operation. (I'm not sure what will happen
+ if a card which only supports 10Mbs is forced into 100Mbs
+ mode.)
+
+ 5. You have to use speed=X duplex=Y together now. If you just
+ do "insmod tlan.o speed=100" the driver will do Auto-Neg.
+ To force a 10Mbps Half-Duplex link do "insmod tlan.o speed=10
+ duplex=1".
+
+ 6. If the driver is built into the kernel, you can use the 3rd
+ and 4th parameters to set aui and debug respectively. For
+ example::
+
+ ether=0,0,0x1,0x7,eth0
+
+ This sets aui to 0x1 and debug to 0x7, assuming eth0 is a
+ supported TLAN device.
+
+ The bits in the third byte are assigned as follows:
+
+ ==== ===============
+ 0x01 aui
+ 0x02 use half duplex
+ 0x04 use full duplex
+ 0x08 use 10BaseT
+ 0x10 use 100BaseTx
+ ==== ===============
+
+ You also need to set both speed and duplex settings when forcing
+ speeds with kernel-parameters.
+ ether=0,0,0x12,0,eth0 will force link to 100Mbps Half-Duplex.
+
+ 7. If you have more than one tlan adapter in your system, you can
+ use the above options on a per adapter basis. To force a 100Mbit/HD
+ link with your eth1 adapter use::
+
+ insmod tlan speed=0,100 duplex=0,1
+
+ Now eth0 will use auto-neg and eth1 will be forced to 100Mbit/HD.
+ Note that the tlan driver supports a maximum of 8 adapters.
+
+
+III. Things to try if you have problems
+=======================================
+
+ 1. Make sure your card's PCI id is among those listed in
+ section I, above.
+ 2. Make sure routing is correct.
+ 3. Try forcing different speed/duplex settings
+
+
+There is also a tlan mailing list which you can join by sending "subscribe tlan"
+in the body of an email to majordomo@vuser.vu.union.edu.
+
+There is also a tlan website at http://www.compaq.com
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/toshiba/spider_net.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/toshiba/spider_net.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fe5b32be1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/ethernet/toshiba/spider_net.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,202 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===========================
+The Spidernet Device Driver
+===========================
+
+Written by Linas Vepstas <linas@austin.ibm.com>
+
+Version of 7 June 2007
+
+Abstract
+========
+This document sketches the structure of portions of the spidernet
+device driver in the Linux kernel tree. The spidernet is a gigabit
+ethernet device built into the Toshiba southbridge commonly used
+in the SONY Playstation 3 and the IBM QS20 Cell blade.
+
+The Structure of the RX Ring.
+=============================
+The receive (RX) ring is a circular linked list of RX descriptors,
+together with three pointers into the ring that are used to manage its
+contents.
+
+The elements of the ring are called "descriptors" or "descrs"; they
+describe the received data. This includes a pointer to a buffer
+containing the received data, the buffer size, and various status bits.
+
+There are three primary states that a descriptor can be in: "empty",
+"full" and "not-in-use". An "empty" or "ready" descriptor is ready
+to receive data from the hardware. A "full" descriptor has data in it,
+and is waiting to be emptied and processed by the OS. A "not-in-use"
+descriptor is neither empty or full; it is simply not ready. It may
+not even have a data buffer in it, or is otherwise unusable.
+
+During normal operation, on device startup, the OS (specifically, the
+spidernet device driver) allocates a set of RX descriptors and RX
+buffers. These are all marked "empty", ready to receive data. This
+ring is handed off to the hardware, which sequentially fills in the
+buffers, and marks them "full". The OS follows up, taking the full
+buffers, processing them, and re-marking them empty.
+
+This filling and emptying is managed by three pointers, the "head"
+and "tail" pointers, managed by the OS, and a hardware current
+descriptor pointer (GDACTDPA). The GDACTDPA points at the descr
+currently being filled. When this descr is filled, the hardware
+marks it full, and advances the GDACTDPA by one. Thus, when there is
+flowing RX traffic, every descr behind it should be marked "full",
+and everything in front of it should be "empty". If the hardware
+discovers that the current descr is not empty, it will signal an
+interrupt, and halt processing.
+
+The tail pointer tails or trails the hardware pointer. When the
+hardware is ahead, the tail pointer will be pointing at a "full"
+descr. The OS will process this descr, and then mark it "not-in-use",
+and advance the tail pointer. Thus, when there is flowing RX traffic,
+all of the descrs in front of the tail pointer should be "full", and
+all of those behind it should be "not-in-use". When RX traffic is not
+flowing, then the tail pointer can catch up to the hardware pointer.
+The OS will then note that the current tail is "empty", and halt
+processing.
+
+The head pointer (somewhat mis-named) follows after the tail pointer.
+When traffic is flowing, then the head pointer will be pointing at
+a "not-in-use" descr. The OS will perform various housekeeping duties
+on this descr. This includes allocating a new data buffer and
+dma-mapping it so as to make it visible to the hardware. The OS will
+then mark the descr as "empty", ready to receive data. Thus, when there
+is flowing RX traffic, everything in front of the head pointer should
+be "not-in-use", and everything behind it should be "empty". If no
+RX traffic is flowing, then the head pointer can catch up to the tail
+pointer, at which point the OS will notice that the head descr is
+"empty", and it will halt processing.
+
+Thus, in an idle system, the GDACTDPA, tail and head pointers will
+all be pointing at the same descr, which should be "empty". All of the
+other descrs in the ring should be "empty" as well.
+
+The show_rx_chain() routine will print out the locations of the
+GDACTDPA, tail and head pointers. It will also summarize the contents
+of the ring, starting at the tail pointer, and listing the status
+of the descrs that follow.
+
+A typical example of the output, for a nearly idle system, might be::
+
+ net eth1: Total number of descrs=256
+ net eth1: Chain tail located at descr=20
+ net eth1: Chain head is at 20
+ net eth1: HW curr desc (GDACTDPA) is at 21
+ net eth1: Have 1 descrs with stat=x40800101
+ net eth1: HW next desc (GDACNEXTDA) is at 22
+ net eth1: Last 255 descrs with stat=xa0800000
+
+In the above, the hardware has filled in one descr, number 20. Both
+head and tail are pointing at 20, because it has not yet been emptied.
+Meanwhile, hw is pointing at 21, which is free.
+
+The "Have nnn decrs" refers to the descr starting at the tail: in this
+case, nnn=1 descr, starting at descr 20. The "Last nnn descrs" refers
+to all of the rest of the descrs, from the last status change. The "nnn"
+is a count of how many descrs have exactly the same status.
+
+The status x4... corresponds to "full" and status xa... corresponds
+to "empty". The actual value printed is RXCOMST_A.
+
+In the device driver source code, a different set of names are
+used for these same concepts, so that::
+
+ "empty" == SPIDER_NET_DESCR_CARDOWNED == 0xa
+ "full" == SPIDER_NET_DESCR_FRAME_END == 0x4
+ "not in use" == SPIDER_NET_DESCR_NOT_IN_USE == 0xf
+
+
+The RX RAM full bug/feature
+===========================
+
+As long as the OS can empty out the RX buffers at a rate faster than
+the hardware can fill them, there is no problem. If, for some reason,
+the OS fails to empty the RX ring fast enough, the hardware GDACTDPA
+pointer will catch up to the head, notice the not-empty condition,
+ad stop. However, RX packets may still continue arriving on the wire.
+The spidernet chip can save some limited number of these in local RAM.
+When this local ram fills up, the spider chip will issue an interrupt
+indicating this (GHIINT0STS will show ERRINT, and the GRMFLLINT bit
+will be set in GHIINT1STS). When the RX ram full condition occurs,
+a certain bug/feature is triggered that has to be specially handled.
+This section describes the special handling for this condition.
+
+When the OS finally has a chance to run, it will empty out the RX ring.
+In particular, it will clear the descriptor on which the hardware had
+stopped. However, once the hardware has decided that a certain
+descriptor is invalid, it will not restart at that descriptor; instead
+it will restart at the next descr. This potentially will lead to a
+deadlock condition, as the tail pointer will be pointing at this descr,
+which, from the OS point of view, is empty; the OS will be waiting for
+this descr to be filled. However, the hardware has skipped this descr,
+and is filling the next descrs. Since the OS doesn't see this, there
+is a potential deadlock, with the OS waiting for one descr to fill,
+while the hardware is waiting for a different set of descrs to become
+empty.
+
+A call to show_rx_chain() at this point indicates the nature of the
+problem. A typical print when the network is hung shows the following::
+
+ net eth1: Spider RX RAM full, incoming packets might be discarded!
+ net eth1: Total number of descrs=256
+ net eth1: Chain tail located at descr=255
+ net eth1: Chain head is at 255
+ net eth1: HW curr desc (GDACTDPA) is at 0
+ net eth1: Have 1 descrs with stat=xa0800000
+ net eth1: HW next desc (GDACNEXTDA) is at 1
+ net eth1: Have 127 descrs with stat=x40800101
+ net eth1: Have 1 descrs with stat=x40800001
+ net eth1: Have 126 descrs with stat=x40800101
+ net eth1: Last 1 descrs with stat=xa0800000
+
+Both the tail and head pointers are pointing at descr 255, which is
+marked xa... which is "empty". Thus, from the OS point of view, there
+is nothing to be done. In particular, there is the implicit assumption
+that everything in front of the "empty" descr must surely also be empty,
+as explained in the last section. The OS is waiting for descr 255 to
+become non-empty, which, in this case, will never happen.
+
+The HW pointer is at descr 0. This descr is marked 0x4.. or "full".
+Since its already full, the hardware can do nothing more, and thus has
+halted processing. Notice that descrs 0 through 254 are all marked
+"full", while descr 254 and 255 are empty. (The "Last 1 descrs" is
+descr 254, since tail was at 255.) Thus, the system is deadlocked,
+and there can be no forward progress; the OS thinks there's nothing
+to do, and the hardware has nowhere to put incoming data.
+
+This bug/feature is worked around with the spider_net_resync_head_ptr()
+routine. When the driver receives RX interrupts, but an examination
+of the RX chain seems to show it is empty, then it is probable that
+the hardware has skipped a descr or two (sometimes dozens under heavy
+network conditions). The spider_net_resync_head_ptr() subroutine will
+search the ring for the next full descr, and the driver will resume
+operations there. Since this will leave "holes" in the ring, there
+is also a spider_net_resync_tail_ptr() that will skip over such holes.
+
+As of this writing, the spider_net_resync() strategy seems to work very
+well, even under heavy network loads.
+
+
+The TX ring
+===========
+The TX ring uses a low-watermark interrupt scheme to make sure that
+the TX queue is appropriately serviced for large packet sizes.
+
+For packet sizes greater than about 1KBytes, the kernel can fill
+the TX ring quicker than the device can drain it. Once the ring
+is full, the netdev is stopped. When there is room in the ring,
+the netdev needs to be reawakened, so that more TX packets are placed
+in the ring. The hardware can empty the ring about four times per jiffy,
+so its not appropriate to wait for the poll routine to refill, since
+the poll routine runs only once per jiffy. The low-watermark mechanism
+marks a descr about 1/4th of the way from the bottom of the queue, so
+that an interrupt is generated when the descr is processed. This
+interrupt wakes up the netdev, which can then refill the queue.
+For large packets, this mechanism generates a relatively small number
+of interrupts, about 1K/sec. For smaller packets, this will drop to zero
+interrupts, as the hardware can empty the queue faster than the kernel
+can fill it.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/defza.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/defza.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..73c2f793e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/defza.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,63 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+=====================================================
+Notes on the DEC FDDIcontroller 700 (DEFZA-xx) driver
+=====================================================
+
+:Version: v.1.1.4
+
+
+DEC FDDIcontroller 700 is DEC's first-generation TURBOchannel FDDI
+network card, designed in 1990 specifically for the DECstation 5000
+model 200 workstation. The board is a single attachment station and
+it was manufactured in two variations, both of which are supported.
+
+First is the SAS MMF DEFZA-AA option, the original design implementing
+the standard MMF-PMD, however with a pair of ST connectors rather than
+the usual MIC connector. The other one is the SAS ThinWire/STP DEFZA-CA
+option, denoted 700-C, with the network medium selectable by a switch
+between the DEC proprietary ThinWire-PMD using a BNC connector and the
+standard STP-PMD using a DE-9F connector. This option can interface to
+a DECconcentrator 500 device and, in the case of the STP-PMD, also other
+FDDI equipment and was designed to make it easier to transition from
+existing IEEE 802.3 10BASE2 Ethernet and IEEE 802.5 Token Ring networks
+by providing means to reuse existing cabling.
+
+This driver handles any number of cards installed in a single system.
+They get fddi0, fddi1, etc. interface names assigned in the order of
+increasing TURBOchannel slot numbers.
+
+The board only supports DMA on the receive side. Transmission involves
+the use of PIO. As a result under a heavy transmission load there will
+be a significant impact on system performance.
+
+The board supports a 64-entry CAM for matching destination addresses.
+Two entries are preoccupied by the Directed Beacon and Ring Purger
+multicast addresses and the rest is used as a multicast filter. An
+all-multi mode is also supported for LLC frames and it is used if
+requested explicitly or if the CAM overflows. The promiscuous mode
+supports separate enables for LLC and SMT frames, but this driver
+doesn't support changing them individually.
+
+
+Known problems:
+
+None.
+
+
+To do:
+
+5. MAC address change. The card does not support changing the Media
+ Access Controller's address registers but a similar effect can be
+ achieved by adding an alias to the CAM. There is no way to disable
+ matching against the original address though.
+
+7. Queueing incoming/outgoing SMT frames in the driver if the SMT
+ receive/RMC transmit ring is full. (?)
+
+8. Retrieving/reporting FDDI/SNMP stats.
+
+
+Both success and failure reports are welcome.
+
+Maciej W. Rozycki <macro@linux-mips.org>
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0b75294e6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI) Device Drivers
+======================================================
+
+Contents:
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 2
+
+ defza
+ skfp
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/skfp.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/skfp.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..58f548105
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/fddi/skfp.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,253 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+========================
+SysKonnect driver - SKFP
+========================
+
+|copy| Copyright 1998-2000 SysKonnect,
+
+skfp.txt created 11-May-2000
+
+Readme File for skfp.o v2.06
+
+
+.. This file contains
+
+ (1) OVERVIEW
+ (2) SUPPORTED ADAPTERS
+ (3) GENERAL INFORMATION
+ (4) INSTALLATION
+ (5) INCLUSION OF THE ADAPTER IN SYSTEM START
+ (6) TROUBLESHOOTING
+ (7) FUNCTION OF THE ADAPTER LEDS
+ (8) HISTORY
+
+
+1. Overview
+===========
+
+This README explains how to use the driver 'skfp' for Linux with your
+network adapter.
+
+Chapter 2: Contains a list of all network adapters that are supported by
+this driver.
+
+Chapter 3:
+ Gives some general information.
+
+Chapter 4: Describes common problems and solutions.
+
+Chapter 5: Shows the changed functionality of the adapter LEDs.
+
+Chapter 6: History of development.
+
+
+2. Supported adapters
+=====================
+
+The network driver 'skfp' supports the following network adapters:
+SysKonnect adapters:
+
+ - SK-5521 (SK-NET FDDI-UP)
+ - SK-5522 (SK-NET FDDI-UP DAS)
+ - SK-5541 (SK-NET FDDI-FP)
+ - SK-5543 (SK-NET FDDI-LP)
+ - SK-5544 (SK-NET FDDI-LP DAS)
+ - SK-5821 (SK-NET FDDI-UP64)
+ - SK-5822 (SK-NET FDDI-UP64 DAS)
+ - SK-5841 (SK-NET FDDI-FP64)
+ - SK-5843 (SK-NET FDDI-LP64)
+ - SK-5844 (SK-NET FDDI-LP64 DAS)
+
+Compaq adapters (not tested):
+
+ - Netelligent 100 FDDI DAS Fibre SC
+ - Netelligent 100 FDDI SAS Fibre SC
+ - Netelligent 100 FDDI DAS UTP
+ - Netelligent 100 FDDI SAS UTP
+ - Netelligent 100 FDDI SAS Fibre MIC
+
+
+3. General Information
+======================
+
+From v2.01 on, the driver is integrated in the linux kernel sources.
+Therefore, the installation is the same as for any other adapter
+supported by the kernel.
+
+Refer to the manual of your distribution about the installation
+of network adapters.
+
+Makes my life much easier :-)
+
+4. Troubleshooting
+==================
+
+If you run into problems during installation, check those items:
+
+Problem:
+ The FDDI adapter cannot be found by the driver.
+
+Reason:
+ Look in /proc/pci for the following entry:
+
+ 'FDDI network controller: SysKonnect SK-FDDI-PCI ...'
+
+ If this entry exists, then the FDDI adapter has been
+ found by the system and should be able to be used.
+
+ If this entry does not exist or if the file '/proc/pci'
+ is not there, then you may have a hardware problem or PCI
+ support may not be enabled in your kernel.
+
+ The adapter can be checked using the diagnostic program
+ which is available from the SysKonnect web site:
+
+ www.syskonnect.de
+
+ Some COMPAQ machines have a problem with PCI under
+ Linux. This is described in the 'PCI howto' document
+ (included in some distributions or available from the
+ www, e.g. at 'www.linux.org') and no workaround is available.
+
+Problem:
+ You want to use your computer as a router between
+ multiple IP subnetworks (using multiple adapters), but
+ you cannot reach computers in other subnetworks.
+
+Reason:
+ Either the router's kernel is not configured for IP
+ forwarding or there is a problem with the routing table
+ and gateway configuration in at least one of the
+ computers.
+
+If your problem is not listed here, please contact our
+technical support for help.
+
+You can send email to: linux@syskonnect.de
+
+When contacting our technical support,
+please ensure that the following information is available:
+
+- System Manufacturer and Model
+- Boards in your system
+- Distribution
+- Kernel version
+
+
+5. Function of the Adapter LEDs
+===============================
+
+ The functionality of the LED's on the FDDI network adapters was
+ changed in SMT version v2.82. With this new SMT version, the yellow
+ LED works as a ring operational indicator. An active yellow LED
+ indicates that the ring is down. The green LED on the adapter now
+ works as a link indicator where an active GREEN LED indicates that
+ the respective port has a physical connection.
+
+ With versions of SMT prior to v2.82 a ring up was indicated if the
+ yellow LED was off while the green LED(s) showed the connection
+ status of the adapter. During a ring down the green LED was off and
+ the yellow LED was on.
+
+ All implementations indicate that a driver is not loaded if
+ all LEDs are off.
+
+
+6. History
+==========
+
+v2.06 (20000511) (In-Kernel version)
+ New features:
+
+ - 64 bit support
+ - new pci dma interface
+ - in kernel 2.3.99
+
+v2.05 (20000217) (In-Kernel version)
+ New features:
+
+ - Changes for 2.3.45 kernel
+
+v2.04 (20000207) (Standalone version)
+ New features:
+
+ - Added rx/tx byte counter
+
+v2.03 (20000111) (Standalone version)
+ Problems fixed:
+
+ - Fixed printk statements from v2.02
+
+v2.02 (991215) (Standalone version)
+ Problems fixed:
+
+ - Removed unnecessary output
+ - Fixed path for "printver.sh" in makefile
+
+v2.01 (991122) (In-Kernel version)
+ New features:
+
+ - Integration in Linux kernel sources
+ - Support for memory mapped I/O.
+
+v2.00 (991112)
+ New features:
+
+ - Full source released under GPL
+
+v1.05 (991023)
+ Problems fixed:
+
+ - Compilation with kernel version 2.2.13 failed
+
+v1.04 (990427)
+ Changes:
+
+ - New SMT module included, changing LED functionality
+
+ Problems fixed:
+
+ - Synchronization on SMP machines was buggy
+
+v1.03 (990325)
+ Problems fixed:
+
+ - Interrupt routing on SMP machines could be incorrect
+
+v1.02 (990310)
+ New features:
+
+ - Support for kernel versions 2.2.x added
+ - Kernel patch instead of private duplicate of kernel functions
+
+v1.01 (980812)
+ Problems fixed:
+
+ Connection hangup with telnet
+ Slow telnet connection
+
+v1.00 beta 01 (980507)
+ New features:
+
+ None.
+
+ Problems fixed:
+
+ None.
+
+ Known limitations:
+
+ - tar archive instead of standard package format (rpm).
+ - FDDI statistic is empty.
+ - not tested with 2.1.xx kernels
+ - integration in kernel not tested
+ - not tested simultaneously with FDDI adapters from other vendors.
+ - only X86 processors supported.
+ - SBA (Synchronous Bandwidth Allocator) parameters can
+ not be configured.
+ - does not work on some COMPAQ machines. See the PCI howto
+ document for details about this problem.
+ - data corruption with kernel versions below 2.0.33.
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/baycom.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/baycom.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fe2d010f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/baycom.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,174 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+===============================
+Linux Drivers for Baycom Modems
+===============================
+
+Thomas M. Sailer, HB9JNX/AE4WA, <sailer@ife.ee.ethz.ch>
+
+The drivers for the baycom modems have been split into
+separate drivers as they did not share any code, and the driver
+and device names have changed.
+
+This document describes the Linux Kernel Drivers for simple Baycom style
+amateur radio modems.
+
+The following drivers are available:
+====================================
+
+baycom_ser_fdx:
+ This driver supports the SER12 modems either full or half duplex.
+ Its baud rate may be changed via the ``baud`` module parameter,
+ therefore it supports just about every bit bang modem on a
+ serial port. Its devices are called bcsf0 through bcsf3.
+ This is the recommended driver for SER12 type modems,
+ however if you have a broken UART clone that does not have working
+ delta status bits, you may try baycom_ser_hdx.
+
+baycom_ser_hdx:
+ This is an alternative driver for SER12 type modems.
+ It only supports half duplex, and only 1200 baud. Its devices
+ are called bcsh0 through bcsh3. Use this driver only if baycom_ser_fdx
+ does not work with your UART.
+
+baycom_par:
+ This driver supports the par96 and picpar modems.
+ Its devices are called bcp0 through bcp3.
+
+baycom_epp:
+ This driver supports the EPP modem.
+ Its devices are called bce0 through bce3.
+ This driver is work-in-progress.
+
+The following modems are supported:
+
+======= ========================================================================
+ser12 This is a very simple 1200 baud AFSK modem. The modem consists only
+ of a modulator/demodulator chip, usually a TI TCM3105. The computer
+ is responsible for regenerating the receiver bit clock, as well as
+ for handling the HDLC protocol. The modem connects to a serial port,
+ hence the name. Since the serial port is not used as an async serial
+ port, the kernel driver for serial ports cannot be used, and this
+ driver only supports standard serial hardware (8250, 16450, 16550)
+
+par96 This is a modem for 9600 baud FSK compatible to the G3RUH standard.
+ The modem does all the filtering and regenerates the receiver clock.
+ Data is transferred from and to the PC via a shift register.
+ The shift register is filled with 16 bits and an interrupt is signalled.
+ The PC then empties the shift register in a burst. This modem connects
+ to the parallel port, hence the name. The modem leaves the
+ implementation of the HDLC protocol and the scrambler polynomial to
+ the PC.
+
+picpar This is a redesign of the par96 modem by Henning Rech, DF9IC. The modem
+ is protocol compatible to par96, but uses only three low power ICs
+ and can therefore be fed from the parallel port and does not require
+ an additional power supply. Furthermore, it incorporates a carrier
+ detect circuitry.
+
+EPP This is a high-speed modem adaptor that connects to an enhanced parallel
+ port.
+
+ Its target audience is users working over a high speed hub (76.8kbit/s).
+
+eppfpga This is a redesign of the EPP adaptor.
+======= ========================================================================
+
+All of the above modems only support half duplex communications. However,
+the driver supports the KISS (see below) fullduplex command. It then simply
+starts to send as soon as there's a packet to transmit and does not care
+about DCD, i.e. it starts to send even if there's someone else on the channel.
+This command is required by some implementations of the DAMA channel
+access protocol.
+
+
+The Interface of the drivers
+============================
+
+Unlike previous drivers, these drivers are no longer character devices,
+but they are now true kernel network interfaces. Installation is therefore
+simple. Once installed, four interfaces named bc{sf,sh,p,e}[0-3] are available.
+sethdlc from the ax25 utilities may be used to set driver states etc.
+Users of userland AX.25 stacks may use the net2kiss utility (also available
+in the ax25 utilities package) to convert packets of a network interface
+to a KISS stream on a pseudo tty. There's also a patch available from
+me for WAMPES which allows attaching a kernel network interface directly.
+
+
+Configuring the driver
+======================
+
+Every time a driver is inserted into the kernel, it has to know which
+modems it should access at which ports. This can be done with the setbaycom
+utility. If you are only using one modem, you can also configure the
+driver from the insmod command line (or by means of an option line in
+``/etc/modprobe.d/*.conf``).
+
+Examples::
+
+ modprobe baycom_ser_fdx mode="ser12*" iobase=0x3f8 irq=4
+ sethdlc -i bcsf0 -p mode "ser12*" io 0x3f8 irq 4
+
+Both lines configure the first port to drive a ser12 modem at the first
+serial port (COM1 under DOS). The * in the mode parameter instructs the driver
+to use the software DCD algorithm (see below)::
+
+ insmod baycom_par mode="picpar" iobase=0x378
+ sethdlc -i bcp0 -p mode "picpar" io 0x378
+
+Both lines configure the first port to drive a picpar modem at the
+first parallel port (LPT1 under DOS). (Note: picpar implies
+hardware DCD, par96 implies software DCD).
+
+The channel access parameters can be set with sethdlc -a or kissparms.
+Note that both utilities interpret the values slightly differently.
+
+
+Hardware DCD versus Software DCD
+================================
+
+To avoid collisions on the air, the driver must know when the channel is
+busy. This is the task of the DCD circuitry/software. The driver may either
+utilise a software DCD algorithm (options=1) or use a DCD signal from
+the hardware (options=0).
+
+======= =================================================================
+ser12 if software DCD is utilised, the radio's squelch should always be
+ open. It is highly recommended to use the software DCD algorithm,
+ as it is much faster than most hardware squelch circuitry. The
+ disadvantage is a slightly higher load on the system.
+
+par96 the software DCD algorithm for this type of modem is rather poor.
+ The modem simply does not provide enough information to implement
+ a reasonable DCD algorithm in software. Therefore, if your radio
+ feeds the DCD input of the PAR96 modem, the use of the hardware
+ DCD circuitry is recommended.
+
+picpar the picpar modem features a builtin DCD hardware, which is highly
+ recommended.
+======= =================================================================
+
+
+
+Compatibility with the rest of the Linux kernel
+===============================================
+
+The serial driver and the baycom serial drivers compete
+for the same hardware resources. Of course only one driver can access a given
+interface at a time. The serial driver grabs all interfaces it can find at
+startup time. Therefore the baycom drivers subsequently won't be able to
+access a serial port. You might therefore find it necessary to release
+a port owned by the serial driver with 'setserial /dev/ttyS# uart none', where
+# is the number of the interface. The baycom drivers do not reserve any
+ports at startup, unless one is specified on the 'insmod' command line. Another
+method to solve the problem is to compile all drivers as modules and
+leave it to kmod to load the correct driver depending on the application.
+
+The parallel port drivers (baycom_par, baycom_epp) now use the parport subsystem
+to arbitrate the ports between different client drivers.
+
+vy 73s de
+
+Tom Sailer, sailer@ife.ee.ethz.ch
+
+hb9jnx @ hb9w.ampr.org
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..7e7317320
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,19 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+Amateur Radio Device Drivers
+============================
+
+Contents:
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 2
+
+ baycom
+ z8530drv
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/z8530drv.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/z8530drv.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..d2942760f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/hamradio/z8530drv.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,686 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+=========================================================
+SCC.C - Linux driver for Z8530 based HDLC cards for AX.25
+=========================================================
+
+
+This is a subset of the documentation. To use this driver you MUST have the
+full package from:
+
+Internet:
+
+ 1. ftp://ftp.ccac.rwth-aachen.de/pub/jr/z8530drv-utils_3.0-3.tar.gz
+
+ 2. ftp://ftp.pspt.fi/pub/ham/linux/ax25/z8530drv-utils_3.0-3.tar.gz
+
+Please note that the information in this document may be hopelessly outdated.
+A new version of the documentation, along with links to other important
+Linux Kernel AX.25 documentation and programs, is available on
+http://yaina.de/jreuter
+
+Copyright |copy| 1993,2000 by Joerg Reuter DL1BKE <jreuter@yaina.de>
+
+portions Copyright |copy| 1993 Guido ten Dolle PE1NNZ
+
+for the complete copyright notice see >> Copying.Z8530DRV <<
+
+1. Initialization of the driver
+===============================
+
+To use the driver, 3 steps must be performed:
+
+ 1. if compiled as module: loading the module
+ 2. Setup of hardware, MODEM and KISS parameters with sccinit
+ 3. Attach each channel to the Linux kernel AX.25 with "ifconfig"
+
+Unlike the versions below 2.4 this driver is a real network device
+driver. If you want to run xNOS instead of our fine kernel AX.25
+use a 2.x version (available from above sites) or read the
+AX.25-HOWTO on how to emulate a KISS TNC on network device drivers.
+
+
+1.1 Loading the module
+======================
+
+(If you're going to compile the driver as a part of the kernel image,
+ skip this chapter and continue with 1.2)
+
+Before you can use a module, you'll have to load it with::
+
+ insmod scc.o
+
+please read 'man insmod' that comes with module-init-tools.
+
+You should include the insmod in one of the /etc/rc.d/rc.* files,
+and don't forget to insert a call of sccinit after that. It
+will read your /etc/z8530drv.conf.
+
+1.2. /etc/z8530drv.conf
+=======================
+
+To setup all parameters you must run /sbin/sccinit from one
+of your rc.*-files. This has to be done BEFORE you can
+"ifconfig" an interface. Sccinit reads the file /etc/z8530drv.conf
+and sets the hardware, MODEM and KISS parameters. A sample file is
+delivered with this package. Change it to your needs.
+
+The file itself consists of two main sections.
+
+1.2.1 configuration of hardware parameters
+==========================================
+
+The hardware setup section defines the following parameters for each
+Z8530::
+
+ chip 1
+ data_a 0x300 # data port A
+ ctrl_a 0x304 # control port A
+ data_b 0x301 # data port B
+ ctrl_b 0x305 # control port B
+ irq 5 # IRQ No. 5
+ pclock 4915200 # clock
+ board BAYCOM # hardware type
+ escc no # enhanced SCC chip? (8580/85180/85280)
+ vector 0 # latch for interrupt vector
+ special no # address of special function register
+ option 0 # option to set via sfr
+
+
+chip
+ - this is just a delimiter to make sccinit a bit simpler to
+ program. A parameter has no effect.
+
+data_a
+ - the address of the data port A of this Z8530 (needed)
+ctrl_a
+ - the address of the control port A (needed)
+data_b
+ - the address of the data port B (needed)
+ctrl_b
+ - the address of the control port B (needed)
+
+irq
+ - the used IRQ for this chip. Different chips can use different
+ IRQs or the same. If they share an interrupt, it needs to be
+ specified within one chip-definition only.
+
+pclock - the clock at the PCLK pin of the Z8530 (option, 4915200 is
+ default), measured in Hertz
+
+board
+ - the "type" of the board:
+
+ ======================= ========
+ SCC type value
+ ======================= ========
+ PA0HZP SCC card PA0HZP
+ EAGLE card EAGLE
+ PC100 card PC100
+ PRIMUS-PC (DG9BL) card PRIMUS
+ BayCom (U)SCC card BAYCOM
+ ======================= ========
+
+escc
+ - if you want support for ESCC chips (8580, 85180, 85280), set
+ this to "yes" (option, defaults to "no")
+
+vector
+ - address of the vector latch (aka "intack port") for PA0HZP
+ cards. There can be only one vector latch for all chips!
+ (option, defaults to 0)
+
+special
+ - address of the special function register on several cards.
+ (option, defaults to 0)
+
+option - The value you write into that register (option, default is 0)
+
+You can specify up to four chips (8 channels). If this is not enough,
+just change::
+
+ #define MAXSCC 4
+
+to a higher value.
+
+Example for the BAYCOM USCC:
+----------------------------
+
+::
+
+ chip 1
+ data_a 0x300 # data port A
+ ctrl_a 0x304 # control port A
+ data_b 0x301 # data port B
+ ctrl_b 0x305 # control port B
+ irq 5 # IRQ No. 5 (#)
+ board BAYCOM # hardware type (*)
+ #
+ # SCC chip 2
+ #
+ chip 2
+ data_a 0x302
+ ctrl_a 0x306
+ data_b 0x303
+ ctrl_b 0x307
+ board BAYCOM
+
+An example for a PA0HZP card:
+-----------------------------
+
+::
+
+ chip 1
+ data_a 0x153
+ data_b 0x151
+ ctrl_a 0x152
+ ctrl_b 0x150
+ irq 9
+ pclock 4915200
+ board PA0HZP
+ vector 0x168
+ escc no
+ #
+ #
+ #
+ chip 2
+ data_a 0x157
+ data_b 0x155
+ ctrl_a 0x156
+ ctrl_b 0x154
+ irq 9
+ pclock 4915200
+ board PA0HZP
+ vector 0x168
+ escc no
+
+A DRSI would should probably work with this:
+--------------------------------------------
+(actually: two DRSI cards...)
+
+::
+
+ chip 1
+ data_a 0x303
+ data_b 0x301
+ ctrl_a 0x302
+ ctrl_b 0x300
+ irq 7
+ pclock 4915200
+ board DRSI
+ escc no
+ #
+ #
+ #
+ chip 2
+ data_a 0x313
+ data_b 0x311
+ ctrl_a 0x312
+ ctrl_b 0x310
+ irq 7
+ pclock 4915200
+ board DRSI
+ escc no
+
+Note that you cannot use the on-board baudrate generator off DRSI
+cards. Use "mode dpll" for clock source (see below).
+
+This is based on information provided by Mike Bilow (and verified
+by Paul Helay)
+
+The utility "gencfg"
+--------------------
+
+If you only know the parameters for the PE1CHL driver for DOS,
+run gencfg. It will generate the correct port addresses (I hope).
+Its parameters are exactly the same as the ones you use with
+the "attach scc" command in net, except that the string "init" must
+not appear. Example::
+
+ gencfg 2 0x150 4 2 0 1 0x168 9 4915200
+
+will print a skeleton z8530drv.conf for the OptoSCC to stdout.
+
+::
+
+ gencfg 2 0x300 2 4 5 -4 0 7 4915200 0x10
+
+does the same for the BAYCOM USCC card. In my opinion it is much easier
+to edit scc_config.h...
+
+
+1.2.2 channel configuration
+===========================
+
+The channel definition is divided into three sub sections for each
+channel:
+
+An example for scc0::
+
+ # DEVICE
+
+ device scc0 # the device for the following params
+
+ # MODEM / BUFFERS
+
+ speed 1200 # the default baudrate
+ clock dpll # clock source:
+ # dpll = normal half duplex operation
+ # external = MODEM provides own Rx/Tx clock
+ # divider = use full duplex divider if
+ # installed (1)
+ mode nrzi # HDLC encoding mode
+ # nrzi = 1k2 MODEM, G3RUH 9k6 MODEM
+ # nrz = DF9IC 9k6 MODEM
+ #
+ bufsize 384 # size of buffers. Note that this must include
+ # the AX.25 header, not only the data field!
+ # (optional, defaults to 384)
+
+ # KISS (Layer 1)
+
+ txdelay 36 # (see chapter 1.4)
+ persist 64
+ slot 8
+ tail 8
+ fulldup 0
+ wait 12
+ min 3
+ maxkey 7
+ idle 3
+ maxdef 120
+ group 0
+ txoff off
+ softdcd on
+ slip off
+
+The order WITHIN these sections is unimportant. The order OF these
+sections IS important. The MODEM parameters are set with the first
+recognized KISS parameter...
+
+Please note that you can initialize the board only once after boot
+(or insmod). You can change all parameters but "mode" and "clock"
+later with the Sccparam program or through KISS. Just to avoid
+security holes...
+
+(1) this divider is usually mounted on the SCC-PBC (PA0HZP) or not
+ present at all (BayCom). It feeds back the output of the DPLL
+ (digital pll) as transmit clock. Using this mode without a divider
+ installed will normally result in keying the transceiver until
+ maxkey expires --- of course without sending anything (useful).
+
+2. Attachment of a channel by your AX.25 software
+=================================================
+
+2.1 Kernel AX.25
+================
+
+To set up an AX.25 device you can simply type::
+
+ ifconfig scc0 44.128.1.1 hw ax25 dl0tha-7
+
+This will create a network interface with the IP number 44.128.20.107
+and the callsign "dl0tha". If you do not have any IP number (yet) you
+can use any of the 44.128.0.0 network. Note that you do not need
+axattach. The purpose of axattach (like slattach) is to create a KISS
+network device linked to a TTY. Please read the documentation of the
+ax25-utils and the AX.25-HOWTO to learn how to set the parameters of
+the kernel AX.25.
+
+2.2 NOS, NET and TFKISS
+=======================
+
+Since the TTY driver (aka KISS TNC emulation) is gone you need
+to emulate the old behaviour. The cost of using these programs is
+that you probably need to compile the kernel AX.25, regardless of whether
+you actually use it or not. First setup your /etc/ax25/axports,
+for example::
+
+ 9k6 dl0tha-9 9600 255 4 9600 baud port (scc3)
+ axlink dl0tha-15 38400 255 4 Link to NOS
+
+Now "ifconfig" the scc device::
+
+ ifconfig scc3 44.128.1.1 hw ax25 dl0tha-9
+
+You can now axattach a pseudo-TTY::
+
+ axattach /dev/ptys0 axlink
+
+and start your NOS and attach /dev/ptys0 there. The problem is that
+NOS is reachable only via digipeating through the kernel AX.25
+(disastrous on a DAMA controlled channel). To solve this problem,
+configure "rxecho" to echo the incoming frames from "9k6" to "axlink"
+and outgoing frames from "axlink" to "9k6" and start::
+
+ rxecho
+
+Or simply use "kissbridge" coming with z8530drv-utils::
+
+ ifconfig scc3 hw ax25 dl0tha-9
+ kissbridge scc3 /dev/ptys0
+
+
+3. Adjustment and Display of parameters
+=======================================
+
+3.1 Displaying SCC Parameters:
+==============================
+
+Once a SCC channel has been attached, the parameter settings and
+some statistic information can be shown using the param program::
+
+ dl1bke-u:~$ sccstat scc0
+
+ Parameters:
+
+ speed : 1200 baud
+ txdelay : 36
+ persist : 255
+ slottime : 0
+ txtail : 8
+ fulldup : 1
+ waittime : 12
+ mintime : 3 sec
+ maxkeyup : 7 sec
+ idletime : 3 sec
+ maxdefer : 120 sec
+ group : 0x00
+ txoff : off
+ softdcd : on
+ SLIP : off
+
+ Status:
+
+ HDLC Z8530 Interrupts Buffers
+ -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ Sent : 273 RxOver : 0 RxInts : 125074 Size : 384
+ Received : 1095 TxUnder: 0 TxInts : 4684 NoSpace : 0
+ RxErrors : 1591 ExInts : 11776
+ TxErrors : 0 SpInts : 1503
+ Tx State : idle
+
+
+The status info shown is:
+
+============== ==============================================================
+Sent number of frames transmitted
+Received number of frames received
+RxErrors number of receive errors (CRC, ABORT)
+TxErrors number of discarded Tx frames (due to various reasons)
+Tx State status of the Tx interrupt handler: idle/busy/active/tail (2)
+RxOver number of receiver overruns
+TxUnder number of transmitter underruns
+RxInts number of receiver interrupts
+TxInts number of transmitter interrupts
+EpInts number of receiver special condition interrupts
+SpInts number of external/status interrupts
+Size maximum size of an AX.25 frame (*with* AX.25 headers!)
+NoSpace number of times a buffer could not get allocated
+============== ==============================================================
+
+An overrun is abnormal. If lots of these occur, the product of
+baudrate and number of interfaces is too high for the processing
+power of your computer. NoSpace errors are unlikely to be caused by the
+driver or the kernel AX.25.
+
+
+3.2 Setting Parameters
+======================
+
+
+The setting of parameters of the emulated KISS TNC is done in the
+same way in the SCC driver. You can change parameters by using
+the kissparms program from the ax25-utils package or use the program
+"sccparam"::
+
+ sccparam <device> <paramname> <decimal-|hexadecimal value>
+
+You can change the following parameters:
+
+=========== =====
+param value
+=========== =====
+speed 1200
+txdelay 36
+persist 255
+slottime 0
+txtail 8
+fulldup 1
+waittime 12
+mintime 3
+maxkeyup 7
+idletime 3
+maxdefer 120
+group 0x00
+txoff off
+softdcd on
+SLIP off
+=========== =====
+
+
+The parameters have the following meaning:
+
+speed:
+ The baudrate on this channel in bits/sec
+
+ Example: sccparam /dev/scc3 speed 9600
+
+txdelay:
+ The delay (in units of 10 ms) after keying of the
+ transmitter, until the first byte is sent. This is usually
+ called "TXDELAY" in a TNC. When 0 is specified, the driver
+ will just wait until the CTS signal is asserted. This
+ assumes the presence of a timer or other circuitry in the
+ MODEM and/or transmitter, that asserts CTS when the
+ transmitter is ready for data.
+ A normal value of this parameter is 30-36.
+
+ Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 txd 20
+
+persist:
+ This is the probability that the transmitter will be keyed
+ when the channel is found to be free. It is a value from 0
+ to 255, and the probability is (value+1)/256. The value
+ should be somewhere near 50-60, and should be lowered when
+ the channel is used more heavily.
+
+ Example: sccparam /dev/scc2 persist 20
+
+slottime:
+ This is the time between samples of the channel. It is
+ expressed in units of 10 ms. About 200-300 ms (value 20-30)
+ seems to be a good value.
+
+ Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 slot 20
+
+tail:
+ The time the transmitter will remain keyed after the last
+ byte of a packet has been transferred to the SCC. This is
+ necessary because the CRC and a flag still have to leave the
+ SCC before the transmitter is keyed down. The value depends
+ on the baudrate selected. A few character times should be
+ sufficient, e.g. 40ms at 1200 baud. (value 4)
+ The value of this parameter is in 10 ms units.
+
+ Example: sccparam /dev/scc2 4
+
+full:
+ The full-duplex mode switch. This can be one of the following
+ values:
+
+ 0: The interface will operate in CSMA mode (the normal
+ half-duplex packet radio operation)
+ 1: Fullduplex mode, i.e. the transmitter will be keyed at
+ any time, without checking the received carrier. It
+ will be unkeyed when there are no packets to be sent.
+ 2: Like 1, but the transmitter will remain keyed, also
+ when there are no packets to be sent. Flags will be
+ sent in that case, until a timeout (parameter 10)
+ occurs.
+
+ Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 fulldup off
+
+wait:
+ The initial waittime before any transmit attempt, after the
+ frame has been queue for transmit. This is the length of
+ the first slot in CSMA mode. In full duplex modes it is
+ set to 0 for maximum performance.
+ The value of this parameter is in 10 ms units.
+
+ Example: sccparam /dev/scc1 wait 4
+
+maxkey:
+ The maximal time the transmitter will be keyed to send
+ packets, in seconds. This can be useful on busy CSMA
+ channels, to avoid "getting a bad reputation" when you are
+ generating a lot of traffic. After the specified time has
+ elapsed, no new frame will be started. Instead, the trans-
+ mitter will be switched off for a specified time (parameter
+ min), and then the selected algorithm for keyup will be
+ started again.
+ The value 0 as well as "off" will disable this feature,
+ and allow infinite transmission time.
+
+ Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 maxk 20
+
+min:
+ This is the time the transmitter will be switched off when
+ the maximum transmission time is exceeded.
+
+ Example: sccparam /dev/scc3 min 10
+
+idle:
+ This parameter specifies the maximum idle time in full duplex
+ 2 mode, in seconds. When no frames have been sent for this
+ time, the transmitter will be keyed down. A value of 0 is
+ has same result as the fullduplex mode 1. This parameter
+ can be disabled.
+
+ Example: sccparam /dev/scc2 idle off # transmit forever
+
+maxdefer
+ This is the maximum time (in seconds) to wait for a free channel
+ to send. When this timer expires the transmitter will be keyed
+ IMMEDIATELY. If you love to get trouble with other users you
+ should set this to a very low value ;-)
+
+ Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 maxdefer 240 # 2 minutes
+
+
+txoff:
+ When this parameter has the value 0, the transmission of packets
+ is enable. Otherwise it is disabled.
+
+ Example: sccparam /dev/scc2 txoff on
+
+group:
+ It is possible to build special radio equipment to use more than
+ one frequency on the same band, e.g. using several receivers and
+ only one transmitter that can be switched between frequencies.
+ Also, you can connect several radios that are active on the same
+ band. In these cases, it is not possible, or not a good idea, to
+ transmit on more than one frequency. The SCC driver provides a
+ method to lock transmitters on different interfaces, using the
+ "param <interface> group <x>" command. This will only work when
+ you are using CSMA mode (parameter full = 0).
+
+ The number <x> must be 0 if you want no group restrictions, and
+ can be computed as follows to create restricted groups:
+ <x> is the sum of some OCTAL numbers:
+
+
+ === =======================================================
+ 200 This transmitter will only be keyed when all other
+ transmitters in the group are off.
+ 100 This transmitter will only be keyed when the carrier
+ detect of all other interfaces in the group is off.
+ 0xx A byte that can be used to define different groups.
+ Interfaces are in the same group, when the logical AND
+ between their xx values is nonzero.
+ === =======================================================
+
+ Examples:
+
+ When 2 interfaces use group 201, their transmitters will never be
+ keyed at the same time.
+
+ When 2 interfaces use group 101, the transmitters will only key
+ when both channels are clear at the same time. When group 301,
+ the transmitters will not be keyed at the same time.
+
+ Don't forget to convert the octal numbers into decimal before
+ you set the parameter.
+
+ Example: (to be written)
+
+softdcd:
+ use a software dcd instead of the real one... Useful for a very
+ slow squelch.
+
+ Example: sccparam /dev/scc0 soft on
+
+
+4. Problems
+===========
+
+If you have tx-problems with your BayCom USCC card please check
+the manufacturer of the 8530. SGS chips have a slightly
+different timing. Try Zilog... A solution is to write to register 8
+instead to the data port, but this won't work with the ESCC chips.
+*SIGH!*
+
+A very common problem is that the PTT locks until the maxkeyup timer
+expires, although interrupts and clock source are correct. In most
+cases compiling the driver with CONFIG_SCC_DELAY (set with
+make config) solves the problems. For more hints read the (pseudo) FAQ
+and the documentation coming with z8530drv-utils.
+
+I got reports that the driver has problems on some 386-based systems.
+(i.e. Amstrad) Those systems have a bogus AT bus timing which will
+lead to delayed answers on interrupts. You can recognize these
+problems by looking at the output of Sccstat for the suspected
+port. If it shows under- and overruns you own such a system.
+
+Delayed processing of received data: This depends on
+
+- the kernel version
+
+- kernel profiling compiled or not
+
+- a high interrupt load
+
+- a high load of the machine --- running X, Xmorph, XV and Povray,
+ while compiling the kernel... hmm ... even with 32 MB RAM ... ;-)
+ Or running a named for the whole .ampr.org domain on an 8 MB
+ box...
+
+- using information from rxecho or kissbridge.
+
+Kernel panics: please read /linux/README and find out if it
+really occurred within the scc driver.
+
+If you cannot solve a problem, send me
+
+- a description of the problem,
+- information on your hardware (computer system, scc board, modem)
+- your kernel version
+- the output of cat /proc/net/z8530
+
+4. Thor RLC100
+==============
+
+Mysteriously this board seems not to work with the driver. Anyone
+got it up-and-running?
+
+
+Many thanks to Linus Torvalds and Alan Cox for including the driver
+in the Linux standard distribution and their support.
+
+::
+
+ Joerg Reuter ampr-net: dl1bke@db0pra.ampr.org
+ AX-25 : DL1BKE @ DB0ABH.#BAY.DEU.EU
+ Internet: jreuter@yaina.de
+ WWW : http://yaina.de/jreuter
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..a3113ffd7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,26 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+Hardware Device Drivers
+=======================
+
+Contents:
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 2
+
+ appletalk/index
+ atm/index
+ cable/index
+ cellular/index
+ ethernet/index
+ fddi/index
+ hamradio/index
+ wan/index
+ wifi/index
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wan/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wan/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9d9ae94f0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wan/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,18 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+Classic WAN Device Drivers
+==========================
+
+Contents:
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 2
+
+ z8530book
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wan/z8530book.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wan/z8530book.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..fea2c40e7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wan/z8530book.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,256 @@
+=======================
+Z8530 Programming Guide
+=======================
+
+:Author: Alan Cox
+
+Introduction
+============
+
+The Z85x30 family synchronous/asynchronous controller chips are used on
+a large number of cheap network interface cards. The kernel provides a
+core interface layer that is designed to make it easy to provide WAN
+services using this chip.
+
+The current driver only support synchronous operation. Merging the
+asynchronous driver support into this code to allow any Z85x30 device to
+be used as both a tty interface and as a synchronous controller is a
+project for Linux post the 2.4 release
+
+Driver Modes
+============
+
+The Z85230 driver layer can drive Z8530, Z85C30 and Z85230 devices in
+three different modes. Each mode can be applied to an individual channel
+on the chip (each chip has two channels).
+
+The PIO synchronous mode supports the most common Z8530 wiring. Here the
+chip is interface to the I/O and interrupt facilities of the host
+machine but not to the DMA subsystem. When running PIO the Z8530 has
+extremely tight timing requirements. Doing high speeds, even with a
+Z85230 will be tricky. Typically you should expect to achieve at best
+9600 baud with a Z8C530 and 64Kbits with a Z85230.
+
+The DMA mode supports the chip when it is configured to use dual DMA
+channels on an ISA bus. The better cards tend to support this mode of
+operation for a single channel. With DMA running the Z85230 tops out
+when it starts to hit ISA DMA constraints at about 512Kbits. It is worth
+noting here that many PC machines hang or crash when the chip is driven
+fast enough to hold the ISA bus solid.
+
+Transmit DMA mode uses a single DMA channel. The DMA channel is used for
+transmission as the transmit FIFO is smaller than the receive FIFO. it
+gives better performance than pure PIO mode but is nowhere near as ideal
+as pure DMA mode.
+
+Using the Z85230 driver
+=======================
+
+The Z85230 driver provides the back end interface to your board. To
+configure a Z8530 interface you need to detect the board and to identify
+its ports and interrupt resources. It is also your problem to verify the
+resources are available.
+
+Having identified the chip you need to fill in a struct z8530_dev,
+which describes each chip. This object must exist until you finally
+shutdown the board. Firstly zero the active field. This ensures nothing
+goes off without you intending it. The irq field should be set to the
+interrupt number of the chip. (Each chip has a single interrupt source
+rather than each channel). You are responsible for allocating the
+interrupt line. The interrupt handler should be set to
+:c:func:`z8530_interrupt()`. The device id should be set to the
+z8530_dev structure pointer. Whether the interrupt can be shared or not
+is board dependent, and up to you to initialise.
+
+The structure holds two channel structures. Initialise chanA.ctrlio and
+chanA.dataio with the address of the control and data ports. You can or
+this with Z8530_PORT_SLEEP to indicate your interface needs the 5uS
+delay for chip settling done in software. The PORT_SLEEP option is
+architecture specific. Other flags may become available on future
+platforms, eg for MMIO. Initialise the chanA.irqs to &z8530_nop to
+start the chip up as disabled and discarding interrupt events. This
+ensures that stray interrupts will be mopped up and not hang the bus.
+Set chanA.dev to point to the device structure itself. The private and
+name field you may use as you wish. The private field is unused by the
+Z85230 layer. The name is used for error reporting and it may thus make
+sense to make it match the network name.
+
+Repeat the same operation with the B channel if your chip has both
+channels wired to something useful. This isn't always the case. If it is
+not wired then the I/O values do not matter, but you must initialise
+chanB.dev.
+
+If your board has DMA facilities then initialise the txdma and rxdma
+fields for the relevant channels. You must also allocate the ISA DMA
+channels and do any necessary board level initialisation to configure
+them. The low level driver will do the Z8530 and DMA controller
+programming but not board specific magic.
+
+Having initialised the device you can then call
+:c:func:`z8530_init()`. This will probe the chip and reset it into
+a known state. An identification sequence is then run to identify the
+chip type. If the checks fail to pass the function returns a non zero
+error code. Typically this indicates that the port given is not valid.
+After this call the type field of the z8530_dev structure is
+initialised to either Z8530, Z85C30 or Z85230 according to the chip
+found.
+
+Once you have called z8530_init you can also make use of the utility
+function :c:func:`z8530_describe()`. This provides a consistent
+reporting format for the Z8530 devices, and allows all the drivers to
+provide consistent reporting.
+
+Attaching Network Interfaces
+============================
+
+If you wish to use the network interface facilities of the driver, then
+you need to attach a network device to each channel that is present and
+in use. In addition to use the generic HDLC you need to follow some
+additional plumbing rules. They may seem complex but a look at the
+example hostess_sv11 driver should reassure you.
+
+The network device used for each channel should be pointed to by the
+netdevice field of each channel. The hdlc-> priv field of the network
+device points to your private data - you will need to be able to find
+your private data from this.
+
+The way most drivers approach this particular problem is to create a
+structure holding the Z8530 device definition and put that into the
+private field of the network device. The network device fields of the
+channels then point back to the network devices.
+
+If you wish to use the generic HDLC then you need to register the HDLC
+device.
+
+Before you register your network device you will also need to provide
+suitable handlers for most of the network device callbacks. See the
+network device documentation for more details on this.
+
+Configuring And Activating The Port
+===================================
+
+The Z85230 driver provides helper functions and tables to load the port
+registers on the Z8530 chips. When programming the register settings for
+a channel be aware that the documentation recommends initialisation
+orders. Strange things happen when these are not followed.
+
+:c:func:`z8530_channel_load()` takes an array of pairs of
+initialisation values in an array of u8 type. The first value is the
+Z8530 register number. Add 16 to indicate the alternate register bank on
+the later chips. The array is terminated by a 255.
+
+The driver provides a pair of public tables. The z8530_hdlc_kilostream
+table is for the UK 'Kilostream' service and also happens to cover most
+other end host configurations. The z8530_hdlc_kilostream_85230 table
+is the same configuration using the enhancements of the 85230 chip. The
+configuration loaded is standard NRZ encoded synchronous data with HDLC
+bitstuffing. All of the timing is taken from the other end of the link.
+
+When writing your own tables be aware that the driver internally tracks
+register values. It may need to reload values. You should therefore be
+sure to set registers 1-7, 9-11, 14 and 15 in all configurations. Where
+the register settings depend on DMA selection the driver will update the
+bits itself when you open or close. Loading a new table with the
+interface open is not recommended.
+
+There are three standard configurations supported by the core code. In
+PIO mode the interface is programmed up to use interrupt driven PIO.
+This places high demands on the host processor to avoid latency. The
+driver is written to take account of latency issues but it cannot avoid
+latencies caused by other drivers, notably IDE in PIO mode. Because the
+drivers allocate buffers you must also prevent MTU changes while the
+port is open.
+
+Once the port is open it will call the rx_function of each channel
+whenever a completed packet arrived. This is invoked from interrupt
+context and passes you the channel and a network buffer (struct
+sk_buff) holding the data. The data includes the CRC bytes so most
+users will want to trim the last two bytes before processing the data.
+This function is very timing critical. When you wish to simply discard
+data the support code provides the function
+:c:func:`z8530_null_rx()` to discard the data.
+
+To active PIO mode sending and receiving the ``z8530_sync_open`` is called.
+This expects to be passed the network device and the channel. Typically
+this is called from your network device open callback. On a failure a
+non zero error status is returned.
+The :c:func:`z8530_sync_close()` function shuts down a PIO
+channel. This must be done before the channel is opened again and before
+the driver shuts down and unloads.
+
+The ideal mode of operation is dual channel DMA mode. Here the kernel
+driver will configure the board for DMA in both directions. The driver
+also handles ISA DMA issues such as controller programming and the
+memory range limit for you. This mode is activated by calling the
+:c:func:`z8530_sync_dma_open()` function. On failure a non zero
+error value is returned. Once this mode is activated it can be shut down
+by calling the :c:func:`z8530_sync_dma_close()`. You must call
+the close function matching the open mode you used.
+
+The final supported mode uses a single DMA channel to drive the transmit
+side. As the Z85C30 has a larger FIFO on the receive channel this tends
+to increase the maximum speed a little. This is activated by calling the
+``z8530_sync_txdma_open``. This returns a non zero error code on failure. The
+:c:func:`z8530_sync_txdma_close()` function closes down the Z8530
+interface from this mode.
+
+Network Layer Functions
+=======================
+
+The Z8530 layer provides functions to queue packets for transmission.
+The driver internally buffers the frame currently being transmitted and
+one further frame (in order to keep back to back transmission running).
+Any further buffering is up to the caller.
+
+The function :c:func:`z8530_queue_xmit()` takes a network buffer
+in sk_buff format and queues it for transmission. The caller must
+provide the entire packet with the exception of the bitstuffing and CRC.
+This is normally done by the caller via the generic HDLC interface
+layer. It returns 0 if the buffer has been queued and non zero values
+for queue full. If the function accepts the buffer it becomes property
+of the Z8530 layer and the caller should not free it.
+
+The function :c:func:`z8530_get_stats()` returns a pointer to an
+internally maintained per interface statistics block. This provides most
+of the interface code needed to implement the network layer get_stats
+callback.
+
+Porting The Z8530 Driver
+========================
+
+The Z8530 driver is written to be portable. In DMA mode it makes
+assumptions about the use of ISA DMA. These are probably warranted in
+most cases as the Z85230 in particular was designed to glue to PC type
+machines. The PIO mode makes no real assumptions.
+
+Should you need to retarget the Z8530 driver to another architecture the
+only code that should need changing are the port I/O functions. At the
+moment these assume PC I/O port accesses. This may not be appropriate
+for all platforms. Replacing :c:func:`z8530_read_port()` and
+``z8530_write_port`` is intended to be all that is required to port
+this driver layer.
+
+Known Bugs And Assumptions
+==========================
+
+Interrupt Locking
+ The locking in the driver is done via the global cli/sti lock. This
+ makes for relatively poor SMP performance. Switching this to use a
+ per device spin lock would probably materially improve performance.
+
+Occasional Failures
+ We have reports of occasional failures when run for very long
+ periods of time and the driver starts to receive junk frames. At the
+ moment the cause of this is not clear.
+
+Public Functions Provided
+=========================
+
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/net/wan/z85230.c
+ :export:
+
+Internal Functions
+==================
+
+.. kernel-doc:: drivers/net/wan/z85230.c
+ :internal:
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/index.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/index.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..bf91a87c7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/index.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,20 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: (GPL-2.0-only OR BSD-2-Clause)
+
+Wi-Fi Device Drivers
+====================
+
+Contents:
+
+.. toctree::
+ :maxdepth: 2
+
+ intel/ipw2100
+ intel/ipw2200
+ ray_cs
+
+.. only:: subproject and html
+
+ Indices
+ =======
+
+ * :ref:`genindex`
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/intel/ipw2100.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/intel/ipw2100.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..883e96355
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/intel/ipw2100.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,323 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+===========================================
+Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2100 Driver for Linux
+===========================================
+
+Support for:
+
+- Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2100 Network Connection
+
+Copyright |copy| 2003-2006, Intel Corporation
+
+README.ipw2100
+
+:Version: git-1.1.5
+:Date: January 25, 2006
+
+.. Index
+
+ 0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER
+ 1. Introduction
+ 2. Release git-1.1.5 Current Features
+ 3. Command Line Parameters
+ 4. Sysfs Helper Files
+ 5. Radio Kill Switch
+ 6. Dynamic Firmware
+ 7. Power Management
+ 8. Support
+ 9. License
+
+
+0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER
+=================================================
+
+Important Notice FOR ALL USERS OR DISTRIBUTORS!!!!
+
+Intel wireless LAN adapters are engineered, manufactured, tested, and
+quality checked to ensure that they meet all necessary local and
+governmental regulatory agency requirements for the regions that they
+are designated and/or marked to ship into. Since wireless LANs are
+generally unlicensed devices that share spectrum with radars,
+satellites, and other licensed and unlicensed devices, it is sometimes
+necessary to dynamically detect, avoid, and limit usage to avoid
+interference with these devices. In many instances Intel is required to
+provide test data to prove regional and local compliance to regional and
+governmental regulations before certification or approval to use the
+product is granted. Intel's wireless LAN's EEPROM, firmware, and
+software driver are designed to carefully control parameters that affect
+radio operation and to ensure electromagnetic compliance (EMC). These
+parameters include, without limitation, RF power, spectrum usage,
+channel scanning, and human exposure.
+
+For these reasons Intel cannot permit any manipulation by third parties
+of the software provided in binary format with the wireless WLAN
+adapters (e.g., the EEPROM and firmware). Furthermore, if you use any
+patches, utilities, or code with the Intel wireless LAN adapters that
+have been manipulated by an unauthorized party (i.e., patches,
+utilities, or code (including open source code modifications) which have
+not been validated by Intel), (i) you will be solely responsible for
+ensuring the regulatory compliance of the products, (ii) Intel will bear
+no liability, under any theory of liability for any issues associated
+with the modified products, including without limitation, claims under
+the warranty and/or issues arising from regulatory non-compliance, and
+(iii) Intel will not provide or be required to assist in providing
+support to any third parties for such modified products.
+
+Note: Many regulatory agencies consider Wireless LAN adapters to be
+modules, and accordingly, condition system-level regulatory approval
+upon receipt and review of test data documenting that the antennas and
+system configuration do not cause the EMC and radio operation to be
+non-compliant.
+
+The drivers available for download from SourceForge are provided as a
+part of a development project. Conformance to local regulatory
+requirements is the responsibility of the individual developer. As
+such, if you are interested in deploying or shipping a driver as part of
+solution intended to be used for purposes other than development, please
+obtain a tested driver from Intel Customer Support at:
+
+https://www.intel.com/support/wireless/sb/CS-006408.htm
+
+1. Introduction
+===============
+
+This document provides a brief overview of the features supported by the
+IPW2100 driver project. The main project website, where the latest
+development version of the driver can be found, is:
+
+ http://ipw2100.sourceforge.net
+
+There you can find the not only the latest releases, but also information about
+potential fixes and patches, as well as links to the development mailing list
+for the driver project.
+
+
+2. Release git-1.1.5 Current Supported Features
+===============================================
+
+- Managed (BSS) and Ad-Hoc (IBSS)
+- WEP (shared key and open)
+- Wireless Tools support
+- 802.1x (tested with XSupplicant 1.0.1)
+
+Enabled (but not supported) features:
+- Monitor/RFMon mode
+- WPA/WPA2
+
+The distinction between officially supported and enabled is a reflection
+on the amount of validation and interoperability testing that has been
+performed on a given feature.
+
+
+3. Command Line Parameters
+==========================
+
+If the driver is built as a module, the following optional parameters are used
+by entering them on the command line with the modprobe command using this
+syntax::
+
+ modprobe ipw2100 [<option>=<VAL1><,VAL2>...]
+
+For example, to disable the radio on driver loading, enter:
+
+ modprobe ipw2100 disable=1
+
+The ipw2100 driver supports the following module parameters:
+
+========= ============== ============ ==============================
+Name Value Example Meaning
+========= ============== ============ ==============================
+debug 0x0-0xffffffff debug=1024 Debug level set to 1024
+mode 0,1,2 mode=1 AdHoc
+channel int channel=3 Only valid in AdHoc or Monitor
+associate boolean associate=0 Do NOT auto associate
+disable boolean disable=1 Do not power the HW
+========= ============== ============ ==============================
+
+
+4. Sysfs Helper Files
+=====================
+
+There are several ways to control the behavior of the driver. Many of the
+general capabilities are exposed through the Wireless Tools (iwconfig). There
+are a few capabilities that are exposed through entries in the Linux Sysfs.
+
+
+**Driver Level**
+
+For the driver level files, look in /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100/
+
+ debug_level
+ This controls the same global as the 'debug' module parameter. For
+ information on the various debugging levels available, run the 'dvals'
+ script found in the driver source directory.
+
+ .. note::
+
+ 'debug_level' is only enabled if CONFIG_IPW2100_DEBUG is turn on.
+
+**Device Level**
+
+For the device level files look in::
+
+ /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100/{PCI-ID}/
+
+For example::
+
+ /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100/0000:02:01.0
+
+For the device level files, see /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2100:
+
+ rf_kill
+ read
+
+ == =========================================
+ 0 RF kill not enabled (radio on)
+ 1 SW based RF kill active (radio off)
+ 2 HW based RF kill active (radio off)
+ 3 Both HW and SW RF kill active (radio off)
+ == =========================================
+
+ write
+
+ == ==================================================
+ 0 If SW based RF kill active, turn the radio back on
+ 1 If radio is on, activate SW based RF kill
+ == ==================================================
+
+ .. note::
+
+ If you enable the SW based RF kill and then toggle the HW
+ based RF kill from ON -> OFF -> ON, the radio will NOT come back on
+
+
+5. Radio Kill Switch
+====================
+
+Most laptops provide the ability for the user to physically disable the radio.
+Some vendors have implemented this as a physical switch that requires no
+software to turn the radio off and on. On other laptops, however, the switch
+is controlled through a button being pressed and a software driver then making
+calls to turn the radio off and on. This is referred to as a "software based
+RF kill switch"
+
+See the Sysfs helper file 'rf_kill' for determining the state of the RF switch
+on your system.
+
+
+6. Dynamic Firmware
+===================
+
+As the firmware is licensed under a restricted use license, it can not be
+included within the kernel sources. To enable the IPW2100 you will need a
+firmware image to load into the wireless NIC's processors.
+
+You can obtain these images from <http://ipw2100.sf.net/firmware.php>.
+
+See INSTALL for instructions on installing the firmware.
+
+
+7. Power Management
+===================
+
+The IPW2100 supports the configuration of the Power Save Protocol
+through a private wireless extension interface. The IPW2100 supports
+the following different modes:
+
+ === ===========================================================
+ off No power management. Radio is always on.
+ on Automatic power management
+ 1-5 Different levels of power management. The higher the
+ number the greater the power savings, but with an impact to
+ packet latencies.
+ === ===========================================================
+
+Power management works by powering down the radio after a certain
+interval of time has passed where no packets are passed through the
+radio. Once powered down, the radio remains in that state for a given
+period of time. For higher power savings, the interval between last
+packet processed to sleep is shorter and the sleep period is longer.
+
+When the radio is asleep, the access point sending data to the station
+must buffer packets at the AP until the station wakes up and requests
+any buffered packets. If you have an AP that does not correctly support
+the PSP protocol you may experience packet loss or very poor performance
+while power management is enabled. If this is the case, you will need
+to try and find a firmware update for your AP, or disable power
+management (via ``iwconfig eth1 power off``)
+
+To configure the power level on the IPW2100 you use a combination of
+iwconfig and iwpriv. iwconfig is used to turn power management on, off,
+and set it to auto.
+
+ ========================= ====================================
+ iwconfig eth1 power off Disables radio power down
+ iwconfig eth1 power on Enables radio power management to
+ last set level (defaults to AUTO)
+ iwpriv eth1 set_power 0 Sets power level to AUTO and enables
+ power management if not previously
+ enabled.
+ iwpriv eth1 set_power 1-5 Set the power level as specified,
+ enabling power management if not
+ previously enabled.
+ ========================= ====================================
+
+You can view the current power level setting via::
+
+ iwpriv eth1 get_power
+
+It will return the current period or timeout that is configured as a string
+in the form of xxxx/yyyy (z) where xxxx is the timeout interval (amount of
+time after packet processing), yyyy is the period to sleep (amount of time to
+wait before powering the radio and querying the access point for buffered
+packets), and z is the 'power level'. If power management is turned off the
+xxxx/yyyy will be replaced with 'off' -- the level reported will be the active
+level if `iwconfig eth1 power on` is invoked.
+
+
+8. Support
+==========
+
+For general development information and support,
+go to:
+
+ http://ipw2100.sf.net/
+
+The ipw2100 1.1.0 driver and firmware can be downloaded from:
+
+ http://support.intel.com
+
+For installation support on the ipw2100 1.1.0 driver on Linux kernels
+2.6.8 or greater, email support is available from:
+
+ http://supportmail.intel.com
+
+9. License
+==========
+
+ Copyright |copy| 2003 - 2006 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+ under the terms of the GNU General Public License (version 2) as
+ published by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
+ ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+ FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for
+ more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+ this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59
+ Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+ The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in the
+ file called LICENSE.
+
+ License Contact Information:
+
+ James P. Ketrenos <ipw2100-admin@linux.intel.com>
+
+ Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/intel/ipw2200.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/intel/ipw2200.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..0cb42d2fd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/intel/ipw2200.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,526 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+==============================================
+Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux
+==============================================
+
+
+Support for:
+
+- Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2200BG Network Connection
+- Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Network Connection
+
+Note: The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux and Intel(R)
+PRO/Wireless 2200BG Driver for Linux is a unified driver that works on
+both hardware adapters listed above. In this document the Intel(R)
+PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux will be used to reference the
+unified driver.
+
+Copyright |copy| 2004-2006, Intel Corporation
+
+README.ipw2200
+
+:Version: 1.1.2
+:Date: March 30, 2006
+
+
+.. Index
+
+ 0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER
+ 1. Introduction
+ 1.1. Overview of features
+ 1.2. Module parameters
+ 1.3. Wireless Extension Private Methods
+ 1.4. Sysfs Helper Files
+ 1.5. Supported channels
+ 2. Ad-Hoc Networking
+ 3. Interacting with Wireless Tools
+ 3.1. iwconfig mode
+ 3.2. iwconfig sens
+ 4. About the Version Numbers
+ 5. Firmware installation
+ 6. Support
+ 7. License
+
+
+0. IMPORTANT INFORMATION BEFORE USING THIS DRIVER
+=================================================
+
+Important Notice FOR ALL USERS OR DISTRIBUTORS!!!!
+
+Intel wireless LAN adapters are engineered, manufactured, tested, and
+quality checked to ensure that they meet all necessary local and
+governmental regulatory agency requirements for the regions that they
+are designated and/or marked to ship into. Since wireless LANs are
+generally unlicensed devices that share spectrum with radars,
+satellites, and other licensed and unlicensed devices, it is sometimes
+necessary to dynamically detect, avoid, and limit usage to avoid
+interference with these devices. In many instances Intel is required to
+provide test data to prove regional and local compliance to regional and
+governmental regulations before certification or approval to use the
+product is granted. Intel's wireless LAN's EEPROM, firmware, and
+software driver are designed to carefully control parameters that affect
+radio operation and to ensure electromagnetic compliance (EMC). These
+parameters include, without limitation, RF power, spectrum usage,
+channel scanning, and human exposure.
+
+For these reasons Intel cannot permit any manipulation by third parties
+of the software provided in binary format with the wireless WLAN
+adapters (e.g., the EEPROM and firmware). Furthermore, if you use any
+patches, utilities, or code with the Intel wireless LAN adapters that
+have been manipulated by an unauthorized party (i.e., patches,
+utilities, or code (including open source code modifications) which have
+not been validated by Intel), (i) you will be solely responsible for
+ensuring the regulatory compliance of the products, (ii) Intel will bear
+no liability, under any theory of liability for any issues associated
+with the modified products, including without limitation, claims under
+the warranty and/or issues arising from regulatory non-compliance, and
+(iii) Intel will not provide or be required to assist in providing
+support to any third parties for such modified products.
+
+Note: Many regulatory agencies consider Wireless LAN adapters to be
+modules, and accordingly, condition system-level regulatory approval
+upon receipt and review of test data documenting that the antennas and
+system configuration do not cause the EMC and radio operation to be
+non-compliant.
+
+The drivers available for download from SourceForge are provided as a
+part of a development project. Conformance to local regulatory
+requirements is the responsibility of the individual developer. As
+such, if you are interested in deploying or shipping a driver as part of
+solution intended to be used for purposes other than development, please
+obtain a tested driver from Intel Customer Support at:
+
+http://support.intel.com
+
+
+1. Introduction
+===============
+
+The following sections attempt to provide a brief introduction to using
+the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux.
+
+This document is not meant to be a comprehensive manual on
+understanding or using wireless technologies, but should be sufficient
+to get you moving without wires on Linux.
+
+For information on building and installing the driver, see the INSTALL
+file.
+
+
+1.1. Overview of Features
+-------------------------
+The current release (1.1.2) supports the following features:
+
++ BSS mode (Infrastructure, Managed)
++ IBSS mode (Ad-Hoc)
++ WEP (OPEN and SHARED KEY mode)
++ 802.1x EAP via wpa_supplicant and xsupplicant
++ Wireless Extension support
++ Full B and G rate support (2200 and 2915)
++ Full A rate support (2915 only)
++ Transmit power control
++ S state support (ACPI suspend/resume)
+
+The following features are currently enabled, but not officially
+supported:
+
++ WPA
++ long/short preamble support
++ Monitor mode (aka RFMon)
+
+The distinction between officially supported and enabled is a reflection
+on the amount of validation and interoperability testing that has been
+performed on a given feature.
+
+
+
+1.2. Command Line Parameters
+----------------------------
+
+Like many modules used in the Linux kernel, the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless
+2915ABG Driver for Linux allows configuration options to be provided
+as module parameters. The most common way to specify a module parameter
+is via the command line.
+
+The general form is::
+
+ % modprobe ipw2200 parameter=value
+
+Where the supported parameter are:
+
+ associate
+ Set to 0 to disable the auto scan-and-associate functionality of the
+ driver. If disabled, the driver will not attempt to scan
+ for and associate to a network until it has been configured with
+ one or more properties for the target network, for example configuring
+ the network SSID. Default is 0 (do not auto-associate)
+
+ Example: % modprobe ipw2200 associate=0
+
+ auto_create
+ Set to 0 to disable the auto creation of an Ad-Hoc network
+ matching the channel and network name parameters provided.
+ Default is 1.
+
+ channel
+ channel number for association. The normal method for setting
+ the channel would be to use the standard wireless tools
+ (i.e. `iwconfig eth1 channel 10`), but it is useful sometimes
+ to set this while debugging. Channel 0 means 'ANY'
+
+ debug
+ If using a debug build, this is used to control the amount of debug
+ info is logged. See the 'dvals' and 'load' script for more info on
+ how to use this (the dvals and load scripts are provided as part
+ of the ipw2200 development snapshot releases available from the
+ SourceForge project at http://ipw2200.sf.net)
+
+ led
+ Can be used to turn on experimental LED code.
+ 0 = Off, 1 = On. Default is 1.
+
+ mode
+ Can be used to set the default mode of the adapter.
+ 0 = Managed, 1 = Ad-Hoc, 2 = Monitor
+
+
+1.3. Wireless Extension Private Methods
+---------------------------------------
+
+As an interface designed to handle generic hardware, there are certain
+capabilities not exposed through the normal Wireless Tool interface. As
+such, a provision is provided for a driver to declare custom, or
+private, methods. The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux
+defines several of these to configure various settings.
+
+The general form of using the private wireless methods is::
+
+ % iwpriv $IFNAME method parameters
+
+Where $IFNAME is the interface name the device is registered with
+(typically eth1, customized via one of the various network interface
+name managers, such as ifrename)
+
+The supported private methods are:
+
+ get_mode
+ Can be used to report out which IEEE mode the driver is
+ configured to support. Example:
+
+ % iwpriv eth1 get_mode
+ eth1 get_mode:802.11bg (6)
+
+ set_mode
+ Can be used to configure which IEEE mode the driver will
+ support.
+
+ Usage::
+
+ % iwpriv eth1 set_mode {mode}
+
+ Where {mode} is a number in the range 1-7:
+
+ == =====================
+ 1 802.11a (2915 only)
+ 2 802.11b
+ 3 802.11ab (2915 only)
+ 4 802.11g
+ 5 802.11ag (2915 only)
+ 6 802.11bg
+ 7 802.11abg (2915 only)
+ == =====================
+
+ get_preamble
+ Can be used to report configuration of preamble length.
+
+ set_preamble
+ Can be used to set the configuration of preamble length:
+
+ Usage::
+
+ % iwpriv eth1 set_preamble {mode}
+
+ Where {mode} is one of:
+
+ == ========================================
+ 1 Long preamble only
+ 0 Auto (long or short based on connection)
+ == ========================================
+
+
+1.4. Sysfs Helper Files
+-----------------------
+
+The Linux kernel provides a pseudo file system that can be used to
+access various components of the operating system. The Intel(R)
+PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux exposes several configuration
+parameters through this mechanism.
+
+An entry in the sysfs can support reading and/or writing. You can
+typically query the contents of a sysfs entry through the use of cat,
+and can set the contents via echo. For example::
+
+ % cat /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/debug_level
+
+Will report the current debug level of the driver's logging subsystem
+(only available if CONFIG_IPW2200_DEBUG was configured when the driver
+was built).
+
+You can set the debug level via::
+
+ % echo $VALUE > /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/debug_level
+
+Where $VALUE would be a number in the case of this sysfs entry. The
+input to sysfs files does not have to be a number. For example, the
+firmware loader used by hotplug utilizes sysfs entries for transferring
+the firmware image from user space into the driver.
+
+The Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux exposes sysfs entries
+at two levels -- driver level, which apply to all instances of the driver
+(in the event that there are more than one device installed) and device
+level, which applies only to the single specific instance.
+
+
+1.4.1 Driver Level Sysfs Helper Files
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+For the driver level files, look in /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/
+
+ debug_level
+ This controls the same global as the 'debug' module parameter
+
+
+
+1.4.2 Device Level Sysfs Helper Files
+^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
+
+For the device level files, look in::
+
+ /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/{PCI-ID}/
+
+For example:::
+
+ /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200/0000:02:01.0
+
+For the device level files, see /sys/bus/pci/drivers/ipw2200:
+
+ rf_kill
+ read -
+
+ == =========================================
+ 0 RF kill not enabled (radio on)
+ 1 SW based RF kill active (radio off)
+ 2 HW based RF kill active (radio off)
+ 3 Both HW and SW RF kill active (radio off)
+ == =========================================
+
+ write -
+
+ == ==================================================
+ 0 If SW based RF kill active, turn the radio back on
+ 1 If radio is on, activate SW based RF kill
+ == ==================================================
+
+ .. note::
+
+ If you enable the SW based RF kill and then toggle the HW
+ based RF kill from ON -> OFF -> ON, the radio will NOT come back on
+
+ ucode
+ read-only access to the ucode version number
+
+ led
+ read -
+
+ == =================
+ 0 LED code disabled
+ 1 LED code enabled
+ == =================
+
+ write -
+
+ == ================
+ 0 Disable LED code
+ 1 Enable LED code
+ == ================
+
+
+ .. note::
+
+ The LED code has been reported to hang some systems when
+ running ifconfig and is therefore disabled by default.
+
+
+1.5. Supported channels
+-----------------------
+
+Upon loading the Intel(R) PRO/Wireless 2915ABG Driver for Linux, a
+message stating the detected geography code and the number of 802.11
+channels supported by the card will be displayed in the log.
+
+The geography code corresponds to a regulatory domain as shown in the
+table below.
+
+ +------+----------------------------+--------------------+
+ | | | Supported channels |
+ | Code | Geography +----------+---------+
+ | | | 802.11bg | 802.11a |
+ +======+============================+==========+=========+
+ | --- | Restricted | 11 | 0 |
+ +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+
+ | ZZF | Custom US/Canada | 11 | 8 |
+ +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+
+ | ZZD | Rest of World | 13 | 0 |
+ +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+
+ | ZZA | Custom USA & Europe & High | 11 | 13 |
+ +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+
+ | ZZB | Custom NA & Europe | 11 | 13 |
+ +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+
+ | ZZC | Custom Japan | 11 | 4 |
+ +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+
+ | ZZM | Custom | 11 | 0 |
+ +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+
+ | ZZE | Europe | 13 | 19 |
+ +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+
+ | ZZJ | Custom Japan | 14 | 4 |
+ +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+
+ | ZZR | Rest of World | 14 | 0 |
+ +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+
+ | ZZH | High Band | 13 | 4 |
+ +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+
+ | ZZG | Custom Europe | 13 | 4 |
+ +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+
+ | ZZK | Europe | 13 | 24 |
+ +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+
+ | ZZL | Europe | 11 | 13 |
+ +------+----------------------------+----------+---------+
+
+2. Ad-Hoc Networking
+=====================
+
+When using a device in an Ad-Hoc network, it is useful to understand the
+sequence and requirements for the driver to be able to create, join, or
+merge networks.
+
+The following attempts to provide enough information so that you can
+have a consistent experience while using the driver as a member of an
+Ad-Hoc network.
+
+2.1. Joining an Ad-Hoc Network
+------------------------------
+
+The easiest way to get onto an Ad-Hoc network is to join one that
+already exists.
+
+2.2. Creating an Ad-Hoc Network
+-------------------------------
+
+An Ad-Hoc networks is created using the syntax of the Wireless tool.
+
+For Example:
+iwconfig eth1 mode ad-hoc essid testing channel 2
+
+2.3. Merging Ad-Hoc Networks
+----------------------------
+
+
+3. Interaction with Wireless Tools
+==================================
+
+3.1 iwconfig mode
+-----------------
+
+When configuring the mode of the adapter, all run-time configured parameters
+are reset to the value used when the module was loaded. This includes
+channels, rates, ESSID, etc.
+
+3.2 iwconfig sens
+-----------------
+
+The 'iwconfig ethX sens XX' command will not set the signal sensitivity
+threshold, as described in iwconfig documentation, but rather the number
+of consecutive missed beacons that will trigger handover, i.e. roaming
+to another access point. At the same time, it will set the disassociation
+threshold to 3 times the given value.
+
+
+4. About the Version Numbers
+=============================
+
+Due to the nature of open source development projects, there are
+frequently changes being incorporated that have not gone through
+a complete validation process. These changes are incorporated into
+development snapshot releases.
+
+Releases are numbered with a three level scheme:
+
+ major.minor.development
+
+Any version where the 'development' portion is 0 (for example
+1.0.0, 1.1.0, etc.) indicates a stable version that will be made
+available for kernel inclusion.
+
+Any version where the 'development' portion is not a 0 (for
+example 1.0.1, 1.1.5, etc.) indicates a development version that is
+being made available for testing and cutting edge users. The stability
+and functionality of the development releases are not know. We make
+efforts to try and keep all snapshots reasonably stable, but due to the
+frequency of their release, and the desire to get those releases
+available as quickly as possible, unknown anomalies should be expected.
+
+The major version number will be incremented when significant changes
+are made to the driver. Currently, there are no major changes planned.
+
+5. Firmware installation
+========================
+
+The driver requires a firmware image, download it and extract the
+files under /lib/firmware (or wherever your hotplug's firmware.agent
+will look for firmware files)
+
+The firmware can be downloaded from the following URL:
+
+ http://ipw2200.sf.net/
+
+
+6. Support
+==========
+
+For direct support of the 1.0.0 version, you can contact
+http://supportmail.intel.com, or you can use the open source project
+support.
+
+For general information and support, go to:
+
+ http://ipw2200.sf.net/
+
+
+7. License
+==========
+
+ Copyright |copy| 2003 - 2006 Intel Corporation. All rights reserved.
+
+ This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it
+ under the terms of the GNU General Public License version 2 as
+ published by the Free Software Foundation.
+
+ This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT
+ ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
+ FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for
+ more details.
+
+ You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
+ this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59
+ Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307, USA.
+
+ The full GNU General Public License is included in this distribution in the
+ file called LICENSE.
+
+ Contact Information:
+
+ James P. Ketrenos <ipw2100-admin@linux.intel.com>
+
+ Intel Corporation, 5200 N.E. Elam Young Parkway, Hillsboro, OR 97124-6497
+
diff --git a/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/ray_cs.rst b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/ray_cs.rst
new file mode 100644
index 000000000..9a46d1ae8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Documentation/networking/device_drivers/wifi/ray_cs.rst
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+.. SPDX-License-Identifier: GPL-2.0
+
+.. include:: <isonum.txt>
+
+=========================
+Raylink wireless LAN card
+=========================
+
+September 21, 1999
+
+Copyright |copy| 1998 Corey Thomas (corey@world.std.com)
+
+This file is the documentation for the Raylink Wireless LAN card driver for
+Linux. The Raylink wireless LAN card is a PCMCIA card which provides IEEE
+802.11 compatible wireless network connectivity at 1 and 2 megabits/second.
+See http://www.raytheon.com/micro/raylink/ for more information on the Raylink
+card. This driver is in early development and does have bugs. See the known
+bugs and limitations at the end of this document for more information.
+This driver also works with WebGear's Aviator 2.4 and Aviator Pro
+wireless LAN cards.
+
+As of kernel 2.3.18, the ray_cs driver is part of the Linux kernel
+source. My web page for the development of ray_cs is at
+http://web.ralinktech.com/ralink/Home/Support/Linux.html
+and I can be emailed at corey@world.std.com
+
+The kernel driver is based on ray_cs-1.62.tgz
+
+The driver at my web page is intended to be used as an add on to
+David Hinds pcmcia package. All the command line parameters are
+available when compiled as a module. When built into the kernel, only
+the essid= string parameter is available via the kernel command line.
+This will change after the method of sorting out parameters for all
+the PCMCIA drivers is agreed upon. If you must have a built in driver
+with nondefault parameters, they can be edited in
+/usr/src/linux/drivers/net/pcmcia/ray_cs.c. Searching for module_param
+will find them all.
+
+Information on card services is available at:
+
+ http://pcmcia-cs.sourceforge.net/
+
+
+Card services user programs are still required for PCMCIA devices.
+pcmcia-cs-3.1.1 or greater is required for the kernel version of
+the driver.
+
+Currently, ray_cs is not part of David Hinds card services package,
+so the following magic is required.
+
+At the end of the /etc/pcmcia/config.opts file, add the line:
+source ./ray_cs.opts
+This will make card services read the ray_cs.opts file
+when starting. Create the file /etc/pcmcia/ray_cs.opts containing the
+following::
+
+ #### start of /etc/pcmcia/ray_cs.opts ###################
+ # Configuration options for Raylink Wireless LAN PCMCIA card
+ device "ray_cs"
+ class "network" module "misc/ray_cs"
+
+ card "RayLink PC Card WLAN Adapter"
+ manfid 0x01a6, 0x0000
+ bind "ray_cs"
+
+ module "misc/ray_cs" opts ""
+ #### end of /etc/pcmcia/ray_cs.opts #####################
+
+
+To join an existing network with
+different parameters, contact the network administrator for the
+configuration information, and edit /etc/pcmcia/ray_cs.opts.
+Add the parameters below between the empty quotes.
+
+Parameters for ray_cs driver which may be specified in ray_cs.opts:
+
+=============== =============== =============================================
+bc integer 0 = normal mode (802.11 timing),
+ 1 = slow down inter frame timing to allow
+ operation with older breezecom access
+ points.
+
+beacon_period integer beacon period in Kilo-microseconds,
+
+ legal values = must be integer multiple
+ of hop dwell
+
+ default = 256
+
+country integer 1 = USA (default),
+ 2 = Europe,
+ 3 = Japan,
+ 4 = Korea,
+ 5 = Spain,
+ 6 = France,
+ 7 = Israel,
+ 8 = Australia
+
+essid string ESS ID - network name to join
+
+ string with maximum length of 32 chars
+ default value = "ADHOC_ESSID"
+
+hop_dwell integer hop dwell time in Kilo-microseconds
+
+ legal values = 16,32,64,128(default),256
+
+irq_mask integer linux standard 16 bit value 1bit/IRQ
+
+ lsb is IRQ 0, bit 1 is IRQ 1 etc.
+ Used to restrict choice of IRQ's to use.
+ Recommended method for controlling
+ interrupts is in /etc/pcmcia/config.opts
+
+net_type integer 0 (default) = adhoc network,
+ 1 = infrastructure
+
+phy_addr string string containing new MAC address in
+ hex, must start with x eg
+ x00008f123456
+
+psm integer 0 = continuously active,
+ 1 = power save mode (not useful yet)
+
+pc_debug integer (0-5) larger values for more verbose
+ logging. Replaces ray_debug.
+
+ray_debug integer Replaced with pc_debug
+
+ray_mem_speed integer defaults to 500
+
+sniffer integer 0 = not sniffer (default),
+ 1 = sniffer which can be used to record all
+ network traffic using tcpdump or similar,
+ but no normal network use is allowed.
+
+translate integer 0 = no translation (encapsulate frames),
+ 1 = translation (RFC1042/802.1)
+=============== =============== =============================================
+
+More on sniffer mode:
+
+tcpdump does not understand 802.11 headers, so it can't
+interpret the contents, but it can record to a file. This is only
+useful for debugging 802.11 lowlevel protocols that are not visible to
+linux. If you want to watch ftp xfers, or do similar things, you
+don't need to use sniffer mode. Also, some packet types are never
+sent up by the card, so you will never see them (ack, rts, cts, probe
+etc.) There is a simple program (showcap) included in the ray_cs
+package which parses the 802.11 headers.
+
+Known Problems and missing features
+
+ Does not work with non x86
+
+ Does not work with SMP
+
+ Support for defragmenting frames is not yet debugged, and in
+ fact is known to not work. I have never encountered a net set
+ up to fragment, but still, it should be fixed.
+
+ The ioctl support is incomplete. The hardware address cannot be set
+ using ifconfig yet. If a different hardware address is needed, it may
+ be set using the phy_addr parameter in ray_cs.opts. This requires
+ a card insertion to take effect.